XDM-900 IMM ETSI A02 8.3 en

XDM-900
Version 8.3
Installation and Maintenance Manual

417006-2318-0H3-A02
XDM-900 (ETSI) Installation and Maintenance Manual

V8.3
Catalog No: X39178
December 2011
2nd Edition
Copyright by ECI Telecom, 2010-2011. All rights reserved worldwide.

This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and ECI Telecom Ltd. (ECI Telecom). BY OPENING THE
DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS
AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE
UNOPENED DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS (INCLUDING
WRITTEN MATERIALS AND BINDERS OR OTHER CONTAINERS), TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH YOU
OBTAINED THEM.
The information contained in the documentation and/or disk is proprietary and is subject to all relevant copyright,
patent, and other laws protecting intellectual property, as well as any specific agreement protecting ECI Telecom's
rights in the aforesaid information. Neither this document nor the information contained in the documentation and/or
disk may be published, reproduced, or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part, without the express prior
written permission of ECI Telecom. In addition, any use of this document, the documentation and/or the disk, or the
information contained therein for any purposes other than those for which it was disclosed, is strictly forbidden.
ECI Telecom reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in equipment design or
specifications. Information supplied by ECI Telecom is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no
responsibility whatsoever is assumed by ECI Telecom for the use thereof, nor for the rights of third parties, which
may be affected in any way by the use and/or dissemination thereof.
Any representation(s) in the documentation and/or disk concerning performance of ECI Telecom product(s) are for
informational purposes only and are not warranties of product performance or otherwise, either express or implied.
ECI Telecom's standard limited warranty, stated in its sales contract or order confirmation form, is the only warranty
offered by ECI Telecom.
The documentation and/or disk is provided AS IS and may contain flaws, omissions, or typesetting errors. No
warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto, unless specifically undertaken in ECI Telecom's sales
contract or order confirmation. Information contained in the documentation and in the disk is periodically updated,
and changes will be incorporated in subsequent editions. If you have encountered an error, please notify ECI
Telecom. All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
The documentation and/or disk and all information contained therein is owned by ECI Telecom and is protected by
all relevant copyright, patent, and other applicable laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must
treat the information contained in the documentation and disk as any other copyrighted material (for example, a
book or musical recording).
Other Restrictions. You may not rent, lease, sell, or otherwise dispose of the documentation and disk, as
applicable. YOU MAY NOT USE, COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK OR
ANY COPY IN WHOLE OR PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE. ALL RIGHTS NOT
EXPRESSLY GRANTED ARE RESERVED BY ECI Telecom.
All trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective holders.
ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage whatsoever or howsoever
caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with this documentation and/or disk, the information contained
therein, its use, or otherwise. Notwithstanding the generality of the aforementioned, you expressly waive any claim
and/or demand regarding liability for indirect, special, incidental, or consequential loss or damage which may arise
in respect of the documentation and/or disk and/or the information contained therein, howsoever caused, even if
advised of the possibility of such damages.
The end user hereby undertakes and acknowledges that they read the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines"
instructions and that such instructions were understood by them.
It is hereby clarified that ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage
whatsoever or howsoever caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with you fulfilling and/or failed to fulfill
in whole or in part the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines" instructions.
Contents
About This Manual ................................................................... xv
Overview ............................................................................................................ xv
Intended Audience ............................................................................................. xv
Document Organization ..................................................................................... xvi
Document Conventions ..................................................................................... xvi
Related Documentation .................................................................................... xvii
Obtaining Technical Documentation ................................................................xviii
Technical Assistance........................................................................................xviii
Installing XDM-900: Before You Start Safety Guidelines ..... 1-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 1-1
Warning Definition ............................................................................................ 1-3
Qualified Personnel Warning ............................................................................ 1-4
Installation Warning .......................................................................................... 1-5
General Safety Requirements .......................................................................... 1-6
Jewelry Removal Warning ................................................................................ 1-7
Grounding Requirements ................................................................................. 1-8
Power Supply Requirements .......................................................................... 1-11
TUV Statutory Warnings and Requirements .................................................. 1-17
ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory Warnings and Requirements ................................ 1-19
Laser Safety Requirements ............................................................................ 1-21
Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge .................................................... 1-24
Environmental and Health Concerns .............................................................. 1-29
Introduction.............................................................................. 2-1
XDM-900 Platform Overview ............................................................................ 2-1
XDM-900 I/O Protection Options ...................................................................... 2-3
XDM-900 Shelf with CWDM Networking Capabilities ...................................... 2-7
Site Preparation and Rack Installation .................................. 3-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1
Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 3-4
Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection ................................................... 3-5
XDM Rack Installation Options ......................................................................... 3-6
Preparing Cables and Fibers ............................................................................ 3-7
XDM-900 Accessories .................................................................................... 3-18
Equipment Installation .................................................................................... 3-32
Rack Installation ............................................................................................. 3-42
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks ................................................................... 3-48
417006-2318-0H3-A02
ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary
Contents
XDM-900 Installation and

Maintenance Manual
Platform Installation ................................................................ 4-1

Installation Options ........................................................................................... 4-1
Installing the XDM-900 Shelf in Racks ............................................................. 4-7
Grounding the XDM-900 Shelf ....................................................................... 4-26
Card and Module Installation ................................................. 5-1

Installing XDM-900 Cards ................................................................................ 5-1
Installing XDM-900 Modules .......................................................................... 5-15
Installing TPU Modules .................................................................................. 5-24
Optical Fiber and Cable Installation and Routing................. 6-1

Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks .............................................. 6-1
Connecting Power Cables ................................................................................ 6-3
Connecting Alarm Cables ................................................................................. 6-4
Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical Modules and Cards ................................ 6-5
Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface Cables to Electrical Modules ...... 6-6
Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 7-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 7-1
Test Equipment ................................................................................................ 7-2
Site Commissioning Tests ................................................................................ 7-3
Network Commissioning Tests ......................................................................... 7-7
Maintenance ............................................................................. 8-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 8-1
Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials .............................................. 8-1
Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................... 8-2
Traffic Monitoring System ................................................................................. 8-7
Onsite Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 8-12
Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 8-20
Replacing RAP Components .......................................................................... 8-28
Connector Pin Assignments ................................................. A-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... A-1
ECU900 Card Connectors ................................................................................ A-2
F-CHANNEL Connector ................................................................................... A-5
T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 Connectors ........................................................... A-6
ETHERNET Connectors ................................................................................... A-7
MXC900 DC Input Power Connectors .............................................................. A-8
PIM2_21 Connection Data ............................................................................... A-8
PIM2_42 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-12
PIM2_63/B Connection Data .......................................................................... A-18
PIM2_63S Connection Data ........................................................................... A-22
ii
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Contents
TPM2_63_3 Connection Data ........................................................................ A-30

EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors .................................................................. A-38
ACP900 Connectors....................................................................................... A-39
xRAP-100 Connectors.................................................................................... A-40
RAP-4B Connectors ....................................................................................... A-45
xRAP-D Connectors ....................................................................................... A-50
Standards and References .................................................... B-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... B-1
Broadband Forum ............................................................................................ B-2
Environmental Standards ................................................................................. B-2
ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute ............................... B-2
IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission .............................................. B-4
IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers ...................................... B-5
IETF: Internet Engineering Task Force ............................................................ B-5
ISO: International Organization for Standardization ......................................... B-8
ITU-T: International Telecommunication Union ................................................ B-8
MEF: Metro Ethernet Forum ........................................................................... B-13
NIST: National Institute of Standards and Technology .................................. B-13
North American Standards ............................................................................. B-13
OMG: Object Management Group ................................................................. B-14
TMF: TeleManagement Forum ....................................................................... B-15
Web Protocol Standards ................................................................................ B-15
Index .......................................................................................... I-1
417006-2318-0H3-A02
iii
Contents
iv

Maintenance Manual
417006-2318-0H3-A02
List of Figures
Figure 1-1: Optical rack grounding bar and rack frame grounding post ........................ 1-9
Figure 1-2: Grounding the optical rack to the site grounding bar................................. 1-10
Figure 1-3: Power input warning label ......................................................................... 1-17
Figure 1-4: Basic ESD warning symbol ....................................................................... 1-24
Figure 1-5: XDM900 shelf EPA arrangement .............................................................. 1-27
Figure 1-6: Pollution control logos ............................................................................... 1-30
Figure 1-7: WEEE recycling symbol ............................................................................ 1-31
Figure 2-1: XDM-900 shelf ............................................................................................. 2-2
Figure 2-2: Basic XDM-900 shelf, horizontal installation ............................................... 2-4
Figure 2-3: Basic XDM-900 shelf, vertical Installation ................................................... 2-4
Figure 2-4: XDM-900 with one TPU on top of the shelf ................................................. 2-5
Figure 2-5: XDM-900 with two TPUs ............................................................................. 2-6
Figure 2-6: XDM-900 with an OCU and two TPUs ........................................................ 2-7
Figure 3-1: xRAP-D power supply flow ........................................................................ 3-19
Figure 3-2: xRAP-D front panel .................................................................................... 3-21
Figure 3-3: xRAP-D connectors ................................................................................... 3-23
Figure 3-4: Y-cable connection .................................................................................... 3-24
Figure 3-5: Double-Y cable connection........................................................................ 3-24
Figure 3-6: xRAP-100 front panel ................................................................................ 3-26
Figure 3-7: xRAP-100 connectors ................................................................................ 3-27
Figure 3-8: RAP-BG front panel ................................................................................... 3-28
Figure 3-9: RAP-4B front panel .................................................................................... 3-30
Figure 3-10: RAP-4B alarm connectors ....................................................................... 3-31
Figure 3-11: Components of XDM-900 horizontal installation ..................................... 3-34
Figure 3-12: Components of XDM-900 vertical installation ......................................... 3-37
Figure 3-13: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks .......................................................... 3-44
Figure 3-14: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks................................................ 3-45
Figure 3-15: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended
overhead tray (2200 mm rack) ..................................................................................... 3-46
Figure 3-16: Example of an approved European 19" rack ........................................... 3-47
Figure 3-17: xRAP-D power supply flow ...................................................................... 3-50
Figure 3-18: xRAP-D power supply with bridge, two variations ................................... 3-51
Figure 3-19: Location of xRAP-D grounding stud ........................................................ 3-52
Figure 3-20: xRAP-D power supply flow ...................................................................... 3-53
Figure 3-21: Identification of xRAP-D cable routes ...................................................... 3-54
Figure 3-22: Connecting DC power cables .................................................................. 3-55
417006-2318-0H3-A02
List of Figures

Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-23: Side screws highlighted on left side of xRAP-D unit ............................... 3-57
Figure 3-24: Replacement spacer screw ..................................................................... 3-57
Figure 3-25: Replacement spacer screws in place in xRAP-D unit ............................. 3-58
Figure 3-26: Protection cover for xRAP-D ................................................................... 3-58
Figure 3-27: xRAP-D protective covers in place .......................................................... 3-59
Figure 3-28: Bottom panel for xRAP-D ........................................................................ 3-59
Figure 3-29: xRAP-D connectors ................................................................................. 3-60
Figure 3-30: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers .................................................... 3-61
Figure 3-31: Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud ..................................................... 3-64
Figure 3-32: Identification of xRAP-100 cable routes .................................................. 3-65
Figure 3-33: Connecting DC power cables to the xRAP-100 ...................................... 3-66
Figure 3-34: Identification of xRAP-100 connectors .................................................... 3-67
Figure 3-35: Installation of xRAP-100 circuit breakers ................................................ 3-68
Figure 3-36: Location of RAP-BG grounding stud ....................................................... 3-71
Figure 3-37: Identification of RAP-BG cable routes ..................................................... 3-72
Figure 3-38: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG ......................................... 3-72
Figure 3-39: RAP-BG platform power cable grounding screws ................................... 3-74
Figure 3-40: RAP-BG front cover removal ................................................................... 3-75
Figure 3-41: RAP-BG circuit breaker installation ......................................................... 3-75
Figure 3-42: Platform DC input power connector pin functions ................................... 3-76
Figure 3-43: Locating RAP-4B grounding stud ............................................................ 3-78
Figure 3-44: RAP-4B with grounding cable.................................................................. 3-79
Figure 3-45: Identifying RAP-4B cable routes.............................................................. 3-79
Figure 3-46: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B .......................................... 3-80
Figure 3-47: RAP-4B platform power cable grounding screws .................................... 3-81
Figure 3-48: RAP-4B front cover removal .................................................................... 3-82
Figure 3-49: RAP-4B circuit breaker installation .......................................................... 3-82
Figure 3-50: Platform DC input power connector pin functions ................................... 3-83
Figure 3-51: Cable guide.............................................................................................. 3-84
Figure 3-52: Fiber guide ............................................................................................... 3-85
Figure 3-53: Cable slack tray ....................................................................................... 3-85
Figure 3-54: PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray for above shelf installations .................. 3-86
Figure 3-55: PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray for under shelf installations .................. 3-86
Figure 3-56: Threading optical fibers in the FST.......................................................... 3-88
Figure 3-57: Attaching rack mount brackets to the ODF ............................................. 3-89
Figure 3-58: ODF front panel ....................................................................................... 3-90
Figure 3-59: ODF open view ........................................................................................ 3-90
Figure 3-60: ODF fiber routes ...................................................................................... 3-91
Figure 3-61: Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP ............................... 3-93
vi
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
List of Figures
Figure 4-1: Typical XDM-900 horizontal installation in an ETSI A ................................. 4-2

Figure 4-2: Typical horizontal installation of two XDM-900 shelves in
an ETSI A rack ............................................................................................................... 4-3
Figure 4-3: Typical horizontal installation of three basic XDM-900 shelves
in 2200 mm ETSI A rack ................................................................................................ 4-4
Figure 4-4: Typical horizontal installation of three XDM-900 shelves with
TPUs in 2600 mm ETSI A rack ...................................................................................... 4-5
Figure 4-5: Typical XDM-900 vertical installation in an ETSI A rack ............................. 4-6
Figure 4-6: ETSI A rack closed view .............................................................................. 4-9
Figure 4-7: Typical XDM-900 horizontal installation in an ETSI A ............................... 4-11
Figure 4-8: Typical installation of XDM-900 and XDM-100 shelves
in an ETSI A rack ......................................................................................................... 4-12
Figure 4-9: Typical installation of XDM-900 and XDM-1000 shelves
in an ETSI A rack ......................................................................................................... 4-13
Figure 4-10: Installing the vertical lower bracket.......................................................... 4-16
Figure 4-11: Preparing the filter frame assembly ......................................................... 4-17
Figure 4-12: Installing the filter frame assembly .......................................................... 4-18
Figure 4-13: Installing the vertical upper bracket ......................................................... 4-19
Figure 4-14: Installing the thumbnuts ........................................................................... 4-20
Figure 4-15: Releasing the thumbnuts ......................................................................... 4-22
Figure 4-16: Lowering the filter frame .......................................................................... 4-23
Figure 4-17: Filter frame in lower position.................................................................... 4-24
Figure 4-18: Inserting the air filter ................................................................................ 4-25
Figure 4-19: XDM-900 shelf and rack grounding ......................................................... 4-27
Figure 5-1: Installing the FCU900 .................................................................................. 5-2
Figure 5-2: Installing the ECU900/ ECU900-F ............................................................... 5-3
Figure 5-3: Installing the MXC900 ................................................................................. 5-4
Figure 5-4: Installing the NVM in the MXC900............................................................... 5-5
Figure 5-5: Installing the ACP900 or a blank panel ....................................................... 5-8
Figure 5-6: Installing a quad I/O card ........................................................................... 5-10
Figure 5-7: Removing a module guide ......................................................................... 5-12
Figure 5-8: Installing the quad I/O card right adapter .................................................. 5-13
Figure 5-9: Installing the SIM64_XFP left adapter ....................................................... 5-13
Figure 5-10: Installing a quad I/O card in quad I/O slots ............................................. 5-14
Figure 5-11: Inserting an I/O module in the I/O slots ................................................... 5-16
Figure 5-12: Installing the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter ............................................ 5-18
Figure 5-13: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module............................. 5-20
Figure 5-14: Installation of typical double-slot modules in the XDM-900 ..................... 5-22
Figure 5-15: Removing the module guide .................................................................... 5-23
Figure 5-16: Inserting the TC module (XDM-900)........................................................ 5-25
417006-2318-0H3-A02
vii
List of Figures

Maintenance Manual
Figure 5-17: Inserting a single-slot TPM in the TPU (XDM-900) ................................. 5-26
Figure 5-18: Inserting a double-slot TPM in the TPU (XDM-900) ................................ 5-27
Figure 5-19: Removing a TPM guide ........................................................................... 5-28
Figure 5-20: Inserting a triple-slot TPM in the TPU (XDM-900) ................................... 5-29
Figure 5-21: Removing the TPU connector from the XDM-900 ................................... 5-31
Figure 5-22: Inserting the TPU connector onto the XDM-900 ..................................... 5-32
Figure 5-23: Installing the pin guides in the TPU ......................................................... 5-32
Figure 5-24: Lowering the TPU onto the XDM-900 ..................................................... 5-33
Figure 5-25: Securing the TPU onto the XDM-900 ...................................................... 5-33
Figure 5-26: Installing the XDM-900 pin guides and removing the lower
connector cover ............................................................................................................ 5-35
Figure 5-27: Assembling the TPU bracket and jumper connector ............................... 5-36
Figure 5-28: Lowering the XDM-900 onto the TPU ..................................................... 5-37
Figure 5-29: Securing the lower TPU to the shelf ........................................................ 5-37
Figure 5-30: Removing the connector cover and fastening bracket from the
first TPU/OCU .............................................................................................................. 5-39
Figure 5-31: Installing the pin guides in the TPU ......................................................... 5-39
Figure 5-32: Inserting the TPU/OCU connector onto the first TPU/OCU
in the XDM-900 ............................................................................................................ 5-40
Figure 5-33: Lowering the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded XDM-900 ............... 5-41
Figure 5-34: Securing the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded XDM-900 ............... 5-41
Figure 6-1: Routing cables and fibers in an ETSI A rack ............................................... 6-2
Figure 6-2: PIM2_63S traffic cable ................................................................................ 6-8
Figure 6-3: PIM2_63S traffic cable installation ............................................................ 6-10
Figure 6-4: XDM-900 1:1 protection scheme example ................................................ 6-15
Figure 6-6: XDM-300 1_2 protection scheme example (PIM2_63S) ........................... 6-17
Figure 6-8: TPM2_63_3 protection connections in XDM-300/XDM-900 ..................... 6-19
Figure 6-9: TPM2_42_2 protection slot allocation in XDM-900 ................................... 6-20
Figure 6-10: XDM-900 1:3 protection scheme example .............................................. 6-21
Figure 6-11: Connecting to a TPMH_1 protection with an XDM-900 .......................... 6-22
Figure 6-12: XDM-900 with 252 E1s in 1:2 protection connections ............................. 6-23
Figure 6-13: RJ-45 extractor ........................................................................................ 6-28
Figure 6-14: Inserting the cables (upper row) .............................................................. 6-28
Figure 6-15: Attaching the extractor to the handle (upper row) ................................... 6-29
Figure 6-16: Extracting the connector (upper row) ...................................................... 6-29
Figure 6-17: Inserting the cables (lower row)............................................................... 6-30
Figure 6-18: Attaching the extractor to the handle (lower row) .................................... 6-30
Figure 6-19: Extracting the connector (lower row) ....................................................... 6-31
viii
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
List of Figures
Figure 6-20: LC/SFP extractor ..................................................................................... 6-31

Figure 6-21: Inserting the fiber into the extractor ......................................................... 6-32
Figure 6-22: Pressing extractor's release tab onto SFP's clip ..................................... 6-32
Figure 6-23: Extracting the LC connector .................................................................... 6-33
Figure 6-24: Moving the connector beyond the tab ..................................................... 6-33
Figure 6-25: Removing the fiber .................................................................................. 6-33
Figure 6-26: Inserting the fiber into extractor's narrow end ......................................... 6-34
Figure 6-27: Moving extractor's end to the connector.................................................. 6-34
Figure 6-28: Inserting the connector into the SFP ....................................................... 6-34
Figure 6-29: Moving the extractor backward................................................................ 6-34
Figure 6-30: Removing the extractor from the fiber ..................................................... 6-35
Figure 6-31: Orienting the extractor in front of the SFP ............................................... 6-35
Figure 6-32: Moving the extractor forward ................................................................... 6-35
Figure 6-33: Fitting SFP's partition into extractor's slot ............................................... 6-36
Figure 6-34: Moving extractor toward SFP clip ............................................................ 6-36
Figure 6-35: Pulling the extractor backward with grasped clip .................................... 6-36
Figure 6-36: Locking the clip between lever and extractor's teeth ............................... 6-37
Figure 6-37: Releasing the SFP from housing ............................................................. 6-37
Figure 6-38: Extracting the SFP ................................................................................... 6-37
Figure 6-39: DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor ............................................................................... 6-38
Figure 6-40: Placing the extractor in front of the connector ......................................... 6-39
Figure 6-41: Attaching the extractor to the connector's step ....................................... 6-39
Figure 6-42: Extracting the connector .......................................................................... 6-40
Figure 6-43: Inserting the coaxial cable into the extractor ........................................... 6-40
Figure 6-44: Positioning the connector in the extractor ............................................... 6-41
Figure 6-45: Inserting the connector ............................................................................ 6-41
Figure 6-46: Removing the extractor ........................................................................... 6-42
Figure 7-1: Optical commissioning tests setup ............................................................ 7-22
Figure 8-1: Inserting the air filter .................................................................................... 8-5
Figure 8-2: ECU900-F monitoring system interface....................................................... 8-7
Figure 8-3: Monitoring system interface of a typical module ......................................... 8-8
Figure 8-4: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module............................... 8-26
Figure 8-5: Replacing the xRAP-100 circuit breakers .................................................. 8-29
Figure 8-6: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers ...................................................... 8-30
Figure A-1: F-CHANNEL connector pin identification .................................................... A-5
Figure A-2: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin identification ............................ A-6
Figure A-3: ETHERNET connectors pin identification ................................................... A-7
Figure A-4: POWER input power connector pin functions ............................................. A-8
Figure A-5: PIM2_21 E1 connectors pin identification ................................................... A-8
417006-2318-0H3-A02
ix
List of Figures

Maintenance Manual
Figure A-6: PIM2_42 E1 connectors pin identification ................................................. A-12

Figure A-7: PIM2_63/B typical pair connectors pin identification................................. A-18
Figure A-8: PIM2_63S connector pin identification ...................................................... A-22
Figure A-9: TPM_2_63_3 jumper cable structure ........................................................ A-30
Figure A-10: TPM2_63_3, typical double 136-pin VHDCI connector,
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-30
Figure A-11: 10/100BaseT connectors pin identification ............................................. A-38
Figure A-12: ACP900 connector pin identification ....................................................... A-39
Figure A-13: DC input power connectors pin functions ............................................... A-40
Figure A-14: xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connector pin identification .......................... A-40
Figure A-15: xRAP-100 ALARM IN/OUT connector pin identification ......................... A-42
Figure A-16: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector, pin identification ............................ A-45
Figure A-17: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin identification ............................ A-47
Figure A-18: xRAP-D and xRAP-B shelf DC input power connector pin functions...... A-50
Figure A-19: SHELF alarm connector pin identification ............................................... A-50
Figure A-20: ALARMS connector pin identification ...................................................... A-52
417006-2318-0H3-A02
List of Tables
Table 3-1:
Equipment dimensions .......................................................................... 3-2
Table 3-2:
Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools ....................................... 3-4
Table 3-3:
Equipment rack data.............................................................................. 3-6
Table 3-4:
Optical fibers and mating connector data ............................................ 3-15
Table 3-5:
EISM optical fibers and mating connector data ................................... 3-16
Table 3-6:
EISMB Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data ............ 3-16
Table 3-7:
DIOM optical fibers and mating connector data .................................. 3-17
Table 3-8:
DIOM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data .............. 3-17
Table 3-9:
MCSM optical fibers and mating connector data ................................ 3-17
Table 3-10:
MCSM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data ............ 3-18
Table 3-11:
xRAP-D front panel component functions ........................................... 3-22
Table 3-12:
xRAP-D connector functions ............................................................... 3-23
Table 3-13:
xRAP-100 front panel component functions ........................................ 3-26
Table 3-14:
xRAP-100 connectors.......................................................................... 3-27
Table 3-15:
RAP-BG front panel component functions .......................................... 3-29
Table 3-16:
RAP-4B front panel component functions ........................................... 3-30
Table 3-17:
RAP-4B connector functions ............................................................... 3-31
Table 3-18:
Outline of XDM-900 horizontal installation sequence ......................... 3-35
Table 3-19:
Outline of XDM-900 vertical installation sequence .............................. 3-38
Table 6-1:
XDM-900 protection schemes ............................................................. 6-14
Table 6-2:
XDM-900 slots allocation for protection schemes ............................... 6-15
Table 6-3:
XDM-900 1:2 I/O protection (PIM2_63) ............................................... 6-16
Table 6-4:
XDM-900 1:2 I/O protection (PIM2_63S) ............................................ 6-17
Table 6-5:
XDM-900 1:3 I/O protection ................................................................. 6-18
Table 6-6:
XDM-900 1:3 I/O protection ................................................................. 6-19
Table 6-7:
TPM2_42_2 and PIM2_42 slot assignment in the XDM-900 .............. 6-20
Table 7-1:
Card and module inventory ................................................................... 7-3
Table 7-2:
Visual inspection and mechanical checks ............................................. 7-4
Table 7-3:
Measured optical levels ......................................................................... 7-5
Table 7-4:
Traffic stability test time intervals ........................................................ 7-11
Table 7-5:
Throughput and latency test results .................................................... 7-18
Table 7-6:
Frame loss rate test procedure ........................................................... 7-19
Table 7-7:
Frame loss rate test results ................................................................. 7-20
Table 7-8:
BER and Stability Test time intervals .................................................. 7-27
417006-2318-0H3-A02
xi
List of Tables

Maintenance Manual
Table 8-1:
Preventive maintenance inspection and checks ................................... 8-2
Table 8-2:
I/O modules monitoring data ............................................................... 8-10
Table 8-3:
Troubleshooting power problems ........................................................ 8-13
Table 8-4:
General troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules ..................... 8-14
Table 8-5:
General troubleshooting procedures for optical
transceiver plug-ins ...................................................................................................... 8-15
Table 8-6:
Troubleshooting procedures for electrical interface modules.............. 8-15
Table 8-7:
Troubleshooting procedures for optical OADM and Mux/DeMux ........ 8-16
Table 8-8:
Troubleshooting procedures for EISMs ............................................... 8-16
Table 8-9:
Troubleshooting procedures for timing subsystem ............................. 8-17
Table 8-10:
Troubleshooting transmission and traffic alarms ................................. 8-18
Table 8-11:
Troubleshooting management communication ................................... 8-19
Table A-1:
ALARMS client cable wiring .................................................................. A-2
Table A-2:
xRAP-100 alarms cable wiring .............................................................. A-3
Table A-3:
F-CHANNEL connector pin assignment ................................................ A-5
Table A-4:
T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin assignment........................ A-6
Table A-5:
ETHERNET connectors pin assignment ............................................... A-7
Table A-6:
PIM2_21 receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment .................... A-9
Table A-7:
PIM2_21 transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment.................. A-10
Table A-8:
PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines upper connector (1-21)
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-12
Table A-9:
PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines lower connector (22-42)
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-15
Table A-10:
PIM2_63/B typical receive lines (upper) connector
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-18
Table A-11:
PIM2_63 typical transmit lines (lower) connector
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-20
xii
Table A-12:
Connector P1, E1 #1 to E1 #21 Tx lines ............................................. A-22
Table A-13:
Connector P3, E1 #1 to E1 #21 Rx lines ............................................. A-24
Table A-14:
Connector P1, E1 #22 to E1 #42 Tx lines ........................................... A-25
Table A-15:
Connector P3, E1 #22 to E1 #42 Rx lines ........................................... A-26
Table A-16:
Connector P1, E1 #43 to E1 #63 Tx lines ........................................... A-27
Table A-17:
Connector P3, E1 #43 to E1 #63 Rx lines ........................................... A-28
Table A-18:
Connectors P1 and P2, E1 #1 to E1 #21 Tx lines ............................... A-31
Table A-19:
Connectors P3 and P4, E1 #1 to E1 #21 Rx lines .............................. A-32
Table A-20:
Connector P1 and P2, E1 #22 to E1 #42 Tx lines ............................... A-33
Table A-21:
Connectors P3 and P4, E1 #22 to E1 #42 Rx lines ............................ A-34
Table A-22:
Connectors P1 and P2, E1 #43 to E1 #63 Tx lines ............................. A-35
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
List of Tables
Table A-23:
Connectors P3 and P4, E1 #43 to E1 #63 Rx lines ............................ A-36
Table A-24:
10/100BaseT connectors pin assignment ........................................... A-38
Table A-25:
1000BaseT connector pin assignment ................................................ A-39
Table A-26:
ACP900 Ethernet connector pin assignments .................................... A-39
Table A-27:
xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connector pin assignment ........................ A-40
Table A-28:
xRAP-100 ALARM IN/OUT connector pin assignment ....................... A-42
Table A-29:
RAP-4B PLATFORM ALARM connector, pin assignment .................. A-45
Table A-30:
RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin assignment.......................... A-47
Table A-31:
SHELF alarm connector pin assignment ............................................. A-50
Table A-32:
ALARMS connector pin assignment.................................................... A-53
417006-2318-0H3-A02
xiii
List of Tables
xiv

Maintenance Manual
417006-2318-0H3-A02
About This Manual

In this chapter:
Overview .......................................................................................................... xv
Intended Audience ............................................................................................ xv
Document Organization ................................................................................... xvi
Document Conventions ................................................................................... xvi
Related Documentation .................................................................................. xvii
Obtaining Technical Documentation ............................................................. xviii
Technical Assistance ..................................................................................... xviii
Overview
The XDM-900 Installation and Maintenance Manual (IMM) describes how to
set up, configure, and install XDM-900 shelves and their components and
accessories.
The manual also provides task-oriented instructions for LED indications,
troubleshooting hardware-related problems, and replacing hardware
components (cards, modules, accessories).
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for installation and other qualified service personnel
responsible for installing the system and its accessories.
The instructions require you to understand and follow the safety practices
included here, as well as any applicable national regulations and those enforced
at your site. They also require that you understand the physical, optical, and
electrical requirements of the installation site.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
xv
About This Manual

Maintenance Manual
Document Organization
This manual contains the following information:
Installation
Maintenance
Additional functionality
Document Conventions
When applicable, this manual uses the following conventions.
Convention
Indicates
Example
Bold
Names of windows, dialog On the Alarms menu...

boxes, menus, buttons, and
most other GUI elements
Menu > Option
Selection from a menu, or

leading to another
command
Italics
New terms, emphasized

Examples in text
text, and names of manuals
and documents
Borders around text
Notes, cautions, and

warnings
Select Update > View

Objects
See examples below
NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying

information, specific instructions, commentary, sidelights, or
interesting points of information.
CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or
loss of information.
WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life.
xvi
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
About This Manual
LASER WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates

how to avoid personal injury. All personnel involved in
equipment installation, operation, and maintenance must be
aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although
protective devices generally prevent direct exposure to the
beam, personnel must strictly observe the applicable safety
precautions and, in particular, must avoid staring into optical
connectors, either directly or using optical instruments.
ESD: Text set off in this manner indicates information on

how to avoid discharge of static electricity and subsequent
damage to the unit.
TIP: Text set off in this manner includes helpful information

and handy hints that can make your task easier.
IMPORTANT: Text set off in this manner presents essential

information to which you must pay attention.
Related Documentation
The following publications may be of assistance to you in the installation and
commissioning processes. Some of these documents present information
supplied in this installation manual in greater or lesser detail.
XDM Converged MSPP and All-Range ROADM General Description
XDM Small Shelves Reference Manual
XDM System Specifications
EMS-XDM (Element Management System) User Manual
LightSoft (Network Management System) User Manual
IEC Publication 825 Laser Safety Requirements
417006-2318-0H3-A02
xvii
About This Manual

Maintenance Manual
Obtaining Technical
Documentation
To obtain technical documentation related to ECI Telecom products, contact:
ECI Telecom Ltd.
Documentation Department
30 Hasivim St.
Petach Tikva 49130
Israel
Fax: +972-3-9268060
Email: techdoc.feedback@ecitele.com
Technical Assistance
The configuration, installation, and operation of the XDM-900 and its
operation in a network are highly specialized processes. Due to the different
nature of each installation, some planning aspects may not be covered in this
manual.
If you have questions or concerns about your network design or if you require
installation personnel to perform the actual installation process, ECI Telecom
maintains a staff of design engineers and highly trained field service personnel.
The services of this group are available to customers at any time.
If you are interested in obtaining design assistance or a network installation
plan from ECI Telecom's Customer Support team, contact your ECI Telecom
sales representative. With any support related issues, technical or logistic,
contact the ECI Telecom Customer Support center at your location or our
central customer support center action line at:
Telephone
+972-3-9266000
Telefax
+972-3-9266370
Email
on.support@ecitele.com
ECI Telecom's XDM and BroadGate product lines are

certified to comply with MEF9 and MEF14 standards.
ECI Telecom's qualification lab is accredited by A2LA for

competence in electrical testing according to the International
Standard ISO IEC 17025-2005 General Requirements for the
Competence of Testing and Calibration Laboratories.
xviii
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1
Installing XDM-900: Before
You Start Safety Guidelines
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 1-1
Warning Definition .......................................................................................... 1-3
Qualified Personnel Warning .......................................................................... 1-4
Installation Warning ........................................................................................ 1-5
General Safety Requirements .......................................................................... 1-6
Jewelry Removal Warning .............................................................................. 1-7
Grounding Requirements ................................................................................. 1-8
Power Supply Requirements ......................................................................... 1-11
TUV Statutory Warnings and Requirements ................................................. 1-17
ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory Warnings and Requirements .............................. 1-19
Laser Safety Requirements ............................................................................ 1-21
Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge ................................................... 1-24
Environmental and Health Concerns ............................................................. 1-29
Overview
This chapter describes the XDM safety guidelines. The safety rules and
warnings in this chapter must be read before beginning any platform
installation or maintenance work. These safety guidelines must be adhered to
carefully.
WARNING: XDM equipment (the "XDM equipment" or the
"Equipment") is intended for installation in restricted access areas only.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-1
Installing XDM-900: Before You Start

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual
WARNING: XDM equipment has two power sources.

Disconnect both before servicing.
Before starting installation, make sure that the DC power is
not connected to the rack, and that the circuit breakers in the
xRAP or in the user-provided power distribution panel are set
to OFF.
NOTE: This chapter includes translations of some of the

warnings that appear in this guide. The translated warnings
are presented with the English text first, followed by these
languages:
1-2
Danish
Dutch
Finnish
French
German
Italian
Portuguese
Spanish
Swedish
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
Warning Definition
WARNING: This symbol means danger. You are in a situation that
could result in severe bodily injury. Before you work on any
equipment, be aware of the potential electrical hazards and become
familiar with accident prevention measures.
ADVARSEL: Dette symbol betyder fare. Der er risiko for alvorlig

legemsbeskadigelse. Vr opmrksom p potentielle elektriske risici,
og st dig ind i forholdsreglerne til uheldsforebyggelse, fr du arbejder
p nogen form for udstyr.
WAARSCHUWING: Dit symbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een
situatie die ernstig lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u met de
apparatuur gaat werken dient u zich bewust te zijn van mogelijke
elektriciteitsrisicos en zich op de hoogte te stellen van maatregelen ter
voorkoming van ongelukken.
VAROITUS: Tm merkki tarkoittaa vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi

johtaa vakavaan loukkaantumiseen. Ennen kuin kytt mitn laitetta,
ota huomioon mahdolliset shkiset vaaratekijt ja tutustu ennalta
onnettomuuden ehkisemisohjeisiin.
ATTENTION: Ce symbole est signe de danger. Vous risquez de

graves blessures corporelles. Avant de travailler sur un appareil, vous
devez avoir conscience des risques lectriques encourus et vous
familiariser avec les mesures de prvention des accidents.
WARNUNG: Dieses Symbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in

einer Situation, die zu schwerwiegenden Verletzungen fhren kann.
Bedenken Sie vor dem Gebrauch der Gerte mgliche Gefahren durch
elektrischen Strom und machen Sie sich mit den Manahmen zur
Unfallverhtung vertraut.
AVVERTENZA: Questo simbolo indica una situazione di pericolo.

Tale situazione potrebbe provocare gravi danni fisici. Prima di
utilizzare qualsiasi dispositivo, fare attenzione ai potenziali rischi
elettrici e acquisire familiarit con le eventuali misure di prevenzione.
AVISO: Este smbolo significa perigo. Encontra-se numa situao em

que a sua sade corre srios riscos. Antes de comear a trabalhar com o
equipamento, verifique o risco potencial de choque elctrico e
familiarize-se com as medidas de preveno de acidente.
ADVERTENCIA: Este smbolo significa peligro. Est expuesto a sufrir

daos corporales serios. Antes de utilizar el equipo, tenga en cuenta la
posibilidad de riesgo elctrico potencial y lea atentamente las medidas
de prevencin de accidentes.
VARNING: Denna symbol betyder livsfara. Du befinner dig i en

situation som kan leda till allvarliga kroppsskador. Innan du arbetar
med utrustningen mste du vara medveten om potentiella faror och
knna till olycksfrebyggande tgrder.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-3

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual
Qualified Personnel Warning

WARNING: Only trained qualified personnel must install, maintain, or
replace the equipment.
ADVARSEL: Kun uddannet, kvalificeret personale m installere,

vedligeholde eller udskifte udstyr.
WAARSCHUWING: Installatie, onderhoud of vervanging van de
apparatuur mag uitsluitend worden uitgevoerd door opgeleid en
bevoegd personeel.
VAROITUS: Vain koulutettu, ptev henkilkunta saa asentaa,

yllpit tai vaihtaa laitteella.
ATTENTION: Seules des personnes formes et qualifies sont
habilites installer, entretenir ou changer l'quipements.
WARNUNG: Nur geschultes, qualifiziertes Personal sollte den

Ausrstung installieren, warten oder ersetzen.
AVVERTENZA: Il apparecchiature pu essere installato, controllato o

sostituito solo da personale qualificato.
AVISO: S pessoal especializado e qualificado deve instalar, fazer a

manuteno ou substituir o equipamento.
ADVERTENCIA: La instalacin, el mantenimiento y la sustitucin de

este equipo slo deber realizarlo personal cualificado.
VARNING: Endast utbildad, kvalificerad personal fr installera,

underhlla eller erstta utrustning.
1-4
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
Installation Warning
WARNING: Before you connect the equipment to a power source, read
the installation information in this guide.
ADVARSEL: Gennemls installationsoplysningerne i denne

vejledning, fr udstyr sluttes til en strmkilde.
WAARSCHUWING: Lees de aanwijzingen voor de installatie in deze
handleiding voordat u de apparatuur aansluit op een voedingsbron.
VAROITUS: Ennen kuin liitt laitteella virtalhteeseen, lue

asennusohjeet tst oppaasta.
ATTENTION: Avant de brancher l'quipements une source

d'alimentation, lisez les instructions d'installation de ce manuel.
WARNUNG: Lesen Sie die Hinweise zur Installation in diesem

Handbuch, bevor Sie den Ausrstung an eine Stromquelle anschlieen.
AVVERTENZA: Prima di collegare il apparecchiature alla presa di

alimentazione, leggere le informazioni relative all'installazione
riportate in questa guida.
AVISO: Antes de ligar o equipamento a uma fonte de energia, leia as

instrues para instalao neste guia.
ADVERTENCIA: Antes de conectar el equipo a la fuente de

alimentacin, lea la informacin sobre instalacin en esta gua.
VARNING: Innan du ansluter utrustning till en strmklla ska du lsa

installationsinformationen i denna handbok.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-5

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual
General Safety Requirements

XDM platforms contain power sources of varying voltages. Make sure to
install the platforms in compliance with the following guidelines:
1-6
Use the equipment in restricted access locations only.
Note that the equipment racks and XDM platforms are suitable for
mounting on concrete or other noncombustible surfaces only.
Ensure the integrity of the grounding connections.
XDM platforms must be installed in accordance with the National

Electrical Code.
Sufficient lighting is available while working on the equipment.
Do not work on any equipment connected to a voltage source (DC or AC),

except for inserting/removing cards or modules (these activities can be
performed on operating equipment).
Ensure that the maximum working temperature does not exceed 50C.
Use only insulated tools during installation.
Wear protective clothing as required by the requisite safety regulations.
Do not install or maintain equipment connected to external lines (for

example, electrical tributaries) during thunderstorms.
Avoid contact with high voltage sources when installing platforms, cards,
and modules.
Make sure you are familiar with the warning signals and labels affixed to
the equipment, and strictly observe the procedures to avoid the indicated
hazards.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
Jewelry Removal Warning

WARNING: Before you work on equipment that is connected to power
lines, remove all jewelry (including rings, necklaces, and watches).
When connected to power and ground, metal objects may heat up and
cause serious burns, or weld the objects to the terminals.
ADVARSEL: Fr du arbejder p udstyr, der er sluttet til strmledninger,

skal du tage evt. smykker af (f.eks. ringe, halskder og ure). Ved
tilslutning til strm og jord kan metalobjekter blive varme og forrsage
alvorlige forbrndinger, eller objekterne kan blive svejset fast til
terminalerne.
WAARSCHUWING: Voordat u aan apparatuur gaat werken die met
elektrische leidingen is verbonden, dient u sieraden (zoals ringen,
kettingen en horloges) af te doen. Metalen voorwerpen worden warm
wanneer deze met stroom en aarde verbonden zijn en kunnen ernstige
brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de
aansluitklemmen vastlassen.
VAROITUS: Ennen kuin tyskentelet laitteella, joka on kytketty
virtajohtoihin, riisu kaikki korut (mukaanlukien sormukset, kaulanauhat
ja rannekellot). Ollessaan kosketuksissa sek shkvirtaan ett maahan,
metalliesineet saattavat kuumentua ja aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai
hitsautua kiinni napoihin.
ATTENTION: Avant de travailler sur un quipement connect au

secteur, enlevez tous vos bijoux (y compris les bagues, les colliers et les
montres). Lorsque vous tes connect au secteur et la masse, les objets
mtalliques peuvent chauffer et causer de srieuses brlures ou se souder
l'appareil.
WARNUNG: Legen Sie jeglichen Schmuck (wie Ringe, Ketten und
Uhren) ab, bevor Sie bei bestehender Stromzufuhr an dem Gert arbeiten.
Wenn eine Verbindung zur Stromversorgung und zur Masse besteht,
knnen sich Gegenstnde aus Metall erhitzen und Verbrennungen
verursachen oder an die Anschlsse angeschweit werden.
AVVERTENZA: Prima di utilizzare apparecchiature collegate

all'alimentazione, togliersi anelli, collane e orologi e altri oggetti. Dopo
aver eseguito il collegamento all'alimentazione e la messa a terra, tali
oggetti metallici possono riscaldarsi e provocare la fusione di oggetti sui
terminali.
AVISO: Antes de iniciar o trabalho com o equipamento que estiver
ligado corrente elctrica, retire qualquer tipo de artigos de joalharia
(tais como anis, colares e relgios). Quando esto ligados corrente e
terra, os objectos em metal podem aquecer e provocar graves
queimaduras ou at mesmo ficar soldados aos terminais de corrente.
ADVERTENCIA: Antes de trabajar con un equipo que est conectado a

la alimentacin, deber uitarse todas las joyas que lleve (incluidos
anillos, collares y relojes). Los objetos metlicos que estn conectados a
la alimentacin y a una toma de tierra, se podran calentar y causar
quemaduras graves o soldar objetos a los terminales.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-7

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual
VARNING: Innan du utfr arbete p utrustning som r ansluten till

ntsladdar ska du ta av smycken (inkl. ringar, halsband och klockor). Nr
apparaten r ansluten till strm och jord kan metallfreml bli heta och
orsaka allvarliga brnnskador eller svetsa fast fremlen till terminalerna.
Grounding Requirements
All equipment, including XDM platforms, ancillary units, and equipment from
other vendors, must be properly grounded at all times. Good grounding is
necessary to protect personnel and equipment, minimize noise, and allow the
discharge of accumulated static charges to earth.
Proper operation of the XDM equipment requires that the positive supply line
be connected to the common ground (CGND) of the site at the power source, in
accordance with ETS300132-2.
WARNING: When installing the equipment, the ground connection
must always be made first and disconnected last.
ADVARSEL: Nr udstyr installeres, skal jordledningen altid monteres

frst og afmonteres sidst.
WAARSCHUWING: Bij het installeren van de apparatuur moet de
aarde als eerste worden aangesloten en als laatste worden afgekoppeld.
VAROITUS: Kun reititint asennetaan, maaliitnt pit aina tehd

ensin ja laitteella viimeisen.
ATTENTION: Lors de l'installation du quipements, la mise la terre

doit toujours tre effectue en premier et dconnecte en dernier.
WARNUNG: Bei der Installation des Ausrstung muss der Masseleiter

stets zuerst angeschlossen und zuletzt entfernt werden.
AVVERTENZA: Durante l'installazione del apparecchiature, la

connessione a terra deve essere eseguita per prima e disconnessa per
ultima.
AVISO: Ao instalar o equipamento, a ligao terra deve ser sempre a

primeira a ser ligada e a ltima a ser desligada.
ADVERTENCIA: Al instalar el equipo, la conexin de tierra se deber

hacer en primer lugar y se deber desconectar en ltimo lugar.
VARNING: Nr du installerar utrustning mste jordsladden kopplas in

frst och kopplas ur sist.
1-8
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
Rack Grounding Requirements

The rack is supplied with a main copper or brass grounding bolt ('grounding
stud') welded to the rack frame. The grounding stud is identified on the rack by
the ground symbol label. The stud must be free of paint. The rack also has a
rack grounding bar, which includes a set of connection points for grounding all
the equipment used in the rack. The following figure highlights the rack
grounding stud and rack grounding bar on an optical rack used in a typical
XDM-3000 installation.
Figure 1-1: Optical rack grounding bar and rack frame grounding post
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-9

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual
A connection must be made between the rack grounding bar and the site
grounding bar in compliance with TUV/ETSI recommendations. For example,
grounding may be completed by means of a copper cable with green/yellow
insulation of the same diameter as the power feeding cables (or thicker), and as
short as possible. A length of appropriate 50 mm2 grounding cable is included
with the platform accessories. As long as the grounding connection is in
compliance with TUV/ETSI recommendations, a different connection bar may
also be used. The rack grounding stud is connected to the rack grounding bar
by means of a metal panel. These rack grounding connections are highlighted
in the following figure.
Figure 1-2: Grounding the optical rack to the site grounding bar
1-10
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
Equipment Grounding Requirements

Each equipment unit mounted on the rack is grounded to the rack frame by the
retaining bolts and nuts attaching the unit to the rack frame.
Equipment grounding is performed via the mounting brackets to the rack rails.
The mounting bracket's internal surface facing the rails and the equipment must
be free of paint and provide electrical continuity to the equipment frame. Check
that the resistance between any mounting bracket and the equipment frame
(chassis) is lower than 0.1 .
WARNING: To prevent possible damage to XDM
equipment, all racks and equipment must be completely
grounded before connecting any external devices powered
from an AC source (110/220 V) to the platform. All
grounding procedures described in Grounding the XDM-900
Platform must be completed before, for example, connecting
an external PC to configure and initialize the network element
(NE) management system.
Power Supply Requirements

Connection via RAP
XDM platforms require two power sources with voltage of -40.5 VDC ranging
to -72 VDC, with the positive line connected to the site ground. The nominal
feeding voltage is -48 VDC.
NOTE: The working voltage range for the USA market is
-40.5 VDC to -60 VDC.
Each power source must be protected by a TUV-listed circuit breaker installed
in the RAP. These circuit breakers are included in the installation kit supplied
with the equipment, and their current ratings are therefore in accordance with
the order.
In addition, the site operator must provide a readily accessible TUV-listed
disconnect device incorporated in the fixed power wiring of the site. The
device limits the maximum delivered current to a safe value.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-11

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual
DC Power Warnings
WARNING: Follow this wiring sequence when connecting power:
ground to ground, positive lead to +RTN terminal, and negative lead to
-48 V terminal. To disconnect power, perform the sequence in reverse
order. Always connect the ground wire first and disconnect it last.
ADVARSEL: Ledningsfring ved strmtilslutning: Jord til jord, positiv

ledning til +RTN-terminalen og negativ ledning til -48V-terminalen.
Foretag dette i omvendt rkkeflge ved frakobling af strmmen.
Jordledningen skal altid monteres frst og afmonteres sidst.
WAARSCHUWING: Houd u bij het aansluiten van de stroom aan de
volgende bedradingsvolgorde: aarde naar aarde, de positieve draad naar
de klem +RTN en de negatieve draad naar de klem -48 V. Voor het
afkoppelen past u de omgekeerde volgorde toe. De aarddraad moet
altijd het eerst worden aangesloten en het laatst worden afgekoppeld.
VAROITUS: Noudata seuraavaa johdotusjrjestyst kytkiesssi virtaa:

maasta maahan, positiivinen johdin +RTN-napaan ja negatiivinen
johdin -48 V -napaan. Tee edellinen knteisess jrjestyksess, kun
olet katkaisemassa virtaa. Maajohto tulisi aina kytke ensimmisen
kiinni ja viimeisen pois.
ATTENTION: Lorsque vous vous connectez au secteur, suivez les
instructions suivantes : terre la terre, cble positif vers connexion
+RTN et cble ngatif vers connexion 48V. Suivez ces instructions
dans l'ordre inverse pour vous dconnecter du secteur. Le cble la
terre doit toujours tre connect en premier et dconnect en dernier.
WARNUNG: Beachten Sie beim Anschluss an das Stromnetz folgende

Reihenfolge der Verkabelung: Masseleiter an Masseanschluss, positiver
Pol an +RTN-Anschluss und negativer Pol an -48 V-Anschluss.
Verwenden Sie bei der Unterbrechung der Stromversorgung die
umgekehrte Reihenfolge. Der Masseleiter sollte immer zuerst
angeschlossen und zuletzt entfernt werden.
AVVERTENZA: Quando si collega il router alla presa di

alimentazione, seguire la sequenza di fili elettrici indicata di seguito:
terra a terra, polo positivo sul terminale +RTN e polo negativo sul
terminale -48 V. Per scollegare il router dalla presa di alimentazione,
seguire la sequenza nell'ordine inverso. Il filo della terra deve essere
sempre collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo.
AVISO: Ao ligar a corrente elctrica, observar a seguinte sequncia de

cablagem: fio de terra a fio de terra, plo positivo com terminal +RTN,
e plo negativo com terminal -48 V. Para desligar a corrente, executar a
sequncia em ordem inversa. O fio de terra deve ser sempre ligado em
primeiro lugar e desligado em ltimo lugar.
ADVERTENCIA: Cuando conecte la alimentacin, siga la secuencia de
cableado que se indica a continuacin: tierra a tierra, toma positiva a
terminal +RTN, y toma negativa a terminal -48 V. Para desconectar la
alimentacin, realice la secuencia en orden inverso. La toma de tierra
siempre deber conectarse en primer lugar y desconectarse en ltimo.
1-12
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
VARNING: Nr du ansluter strmmen ska du flja denna sekvens: jord

till jord, positiv sladd till +RTN-terminalen och negativ sladd till -48
V-terminalen. Utfr dessa steg i motsatt ordning nr du kopplar frn
strmmen. Jordsladden br alltid kopplas in frst och kopplas ur sist.
WARNING: Ensure the DC input wiring is connected in the correct

polarity, as reversed polarity may trip the circuit breaker or damage the
equipment.
ADVARSEL: Kontrollr, at jvnstrmstilfrselsledningen er tilsluttet

med korrekt polaritet, da omvendt polaritet kan udlse brydekontakten
eller beskadige udstyr.
WAARSCHUWING: Controleer of de ingangsbedrading voor
gelijkstroom is aangesloten op de juiste polariteit, aangezien
omgekeerde polariteit de stroomonderbreker kan uitschakelen of de
apparatuur kan beschadigen.
VAROITUS: Varmista, ett tasavirran syttjohdotus on kytketty

oikeisiin napoihin, sill vastakkainen napaisuus saattaa suojalaukaista
katkaisijan (tripata) tai aiheuttaa vahinkoa laitteella.
ATTENTION: Assurez-vous que le cble de l'entre de courant continu

se trouve dans la bonne polarit, sinon vous risquez d'allumer le
disjoncteur ou d'endommager l'quipements.
WARNUNG: Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Gleichstromkabel an die

richtige Polaritt angeschlossen ist. Andernfalls kann der Trennschalter
ausgeschaltet oder der Ausrstung beschdigt werden.
AVVERTENZA: Assicurarsi che i fili CC siano collegati alla polarit

corretta, in caso contrario pu scattare l'interruttore automatico o si pu
danneggiare il apparecchiature.
AVISO: Certifique-se de que a ligao de entrada de corrente feita

com a polaridade adequada, pois a polaridade invertida pode fazer com
que o circuito dispare ou danificar o equipamento.
ADVERTENCIA: Asegrese de que el cable de entrada de CC est

conectado con la polaridad adecuada ya que la polaridad contraria
podra provocar un cortacircuitos o daar el equipo.
VARNING: Kontrollera att ingngssladdarna fr likstrm r anslutna

till rtt pol. Fel pol kan leda till att strmbrytaren stngs av eller att
utrustning skadas.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-13

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual
WARNING: When stranded wiring is used, make sure that no stray

strands protrude from the DC power entry terminals.
ADVARSEL: Nr der bruges flertrdede ledninger, skal det

kontrolleres, at der ikke stikker trde ud af stikkene.
WAARSCHUWING: Wanneer er geslagen bedrading wordt gebruikt,
moet u ervoor zorgen dat er geen lekdraden uit de
gelijkstroomingangsklemmen steken.
VAROITUS: Jos kytetn johdotusta, jossa on sikeit, varmista, ettei
yksikn sie harota tasavirran syttnavoista.
ATTENTION: Lorsque vous utilisez des cbles toronns, assurez-vous

qu'aucun brin ne dpasse des entres de courant continu.
WARNUNG: Achten Sie bei verseilten Kabeln darauf, dass keine

Litzen aus den Gleichstromanschlssen hervorstehen.
AVVERTENZA: Se si utilizzano cavi a connettori multipli, assicurarsi

che nessun cavo sporga dai terminali dell'alimentazione CC.
AVISO: Quando for utilizado fio entranado, certifique-se que no

ficam pontas soltas aparentes nos terminais de entrada de energia de
CC.
ADVERTENCIA: Si se utiliza cable trenzado, asegrese de que no se
ha salido ningn hilo de los terminales de entrada de CC.
VARNING: Om du anvnder tvinnade kablar ska du kontrollera att

inga lsa filament sticker ut frn ingngsterminalerna fr likstrm.
WARNING: Before working on the equipment or near the power

entries, ensure that the power cables have been disconnected from both
DC power entry terminals. Do not touch the DC power entries while
the power cables are connected. Voltages may be present within the
power entries when the power is switched off and the power cables are
connected.
ADVARSEL: Fr der arbejdes p udstyr eller nr strmindgangene,

skal det kontrolleres, at ledningerne er taget ud af begge strmtilfrsler.
Rr ikke ved strmtilfrslerne, mens ledningerne er tilsluttet. Der kan
vre spnding i strmtilfrslerne, nr der er slukket for strmmen, og
strmledningerne er tilsluttet.
WAARSCHUWING: Controleer of de stroomkabels zijn afgekoppeld
van beide gelijkstroomingangen, voordat u aan de apparatuur of in de
buurt van de stroomingangen gaat werken. Raak de
gelijkstroomingangen niet aan terwijl de stroomkabels worden
aangesloten. De stroomingangen kunnen onder spanning staan wanneer
de stroom wordt uitgeschakeld en de stroomkabels worden aangesloten.
VAROITUS: Ennen laitteella tai sen virtalhteiden lhell tyskentely
varmista, ett virtakaapelit on irrotettu molemmista tasavirran
syttnavoista. l koske tasavirran syttkohtiin kun virtakaapelit on
kytketty kiinni. Virransyttkohdissa saattaa olla viel jnnitett silloin,
kun virta on kytketty pois ja virtakaapelit ovat kiinni.
1-14
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
ATTENTION: Avant de travailler sur l'quipements ou prs de ses

entres lectriques, assurez-vous que les cbles d'alimentation sont
dconnects des deux entres de courant continu. Ne touchez pas les
entres de courant continu lorsque les cbles d'alimentation sont
connects. Il risque d'y avoir encore du courant dans les entres
d'alimentation lorsque l'interrupteur est teint et que les cbles sont
connects.
WARNUNG: Entfernen Sie vor allen Arbeiten am Ausrstung oder

nahe der Stromanschlsse die Stromkabel aus beiden
Gleichstromanschlssen. Berhren Sie die Gleichstromeingnge nicht,
wenn die Stromkabel angeschlossen sind. An den Stromeingngen
knnen Spannungen anliegen, wenn die Stromzufuhr unterbrochen ist
und die Stromkabel angeschlossen sind.
AVVERTENZA: Prima di eseguire interventi sul apparecchiature o di
avvicinarsi agli ingressi della corrente, assicurarsi che i cavi
dell'alimentazione siano stati scollegati da entrambi i terminali
dell'alimentazione CC. Non avvicinarsi agli ingressi dell'alimentazione
CC mentre i cavi dell'alimentazione sono collegati. possibile che la
tensione sia presente negli ingressi quando l'alimentazione scollegata
ma i cavi sono collegati.
AVISO: Antes de iniciar o trabalho com o equipamento que estiver

ligado corrente elctrica, retire qualquer tipo de artigos de joalharia
(tais como anis, colares e relgios). Quando esto ligados corrente e
terra, os objectos em metal podem aquecer e provocar graves
queimaduras ou at mesmo ficar soldados aos terminais de corrente.
ADVERTENCIA: Antes de trabajar en el equipo o cerca de las entradas
de alimentacin, compruebe que los cables de alimentacin estn
desconectados de los dos terminales de entrada de CC. No toque las
entradas de CC mientras que los cables de alimentacin estn
conectados. Es posible que haya corriente en las entradas de
alimentacin cuando el equipo est apagado y los cables de
alimentacin estn conectados.
VARNING: Innan du arbetar med utrustning eller i nrheten av

strmingngarna ska du kontrollera att ntsladdarna har kopplats ur
frn bda ingngsterminalerna fr likstrm. Rr inte
ingngsterminalerna fr likstrm nr ntsladdarna r inkopplade. Det
kan finnas strm kvar i strmingngarna nr strmmen r av och
ntsladdarna r inkopplade.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-15

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual
Electricity Safety Warning

WARNING: Do not touch uninsulated wiring or ports when they have
not been disconnected from a power source; doing so may result in
electrical shock.
ADVARSEL: Rr ikke ved uisolerede ledninger eller porte, nr de ikke

er koblet fra strmkilden, da det kan medfre elektrisk std.
WAARSCHUWING: Raak geen ongesoleerde bedrading of poorten
aan wanneer deze niet zijn afgekoppeld van de voeding, aangezien dit
een elektrische schok kan veroorzaken.
VAROITUS: l koske eristmttmiin johtoihin tai napoihin, jos ne

ovat kytkksiss virtalhteeseen, sill tst voi seurata shkisku.
ATTENTION: Ne touchez pas les cbles ou ports non isols lorsqu'ils
ne sont pas dconnects du secteur, car vous risquez de vous
lectrocuter.
WARNUNG: Berhren Sie keine unisolierten Kabel oder Anschlsse,

wenn sie noch an eine Stromquelle angeschlossen sind, da dies zu
einem Stromschlag fhren knnte.
AVVERTENZA: Evitare di toccare i cavi o le porte non isolate quando

sono ancora collegati alla presa di alimentazione, poich si potrebbero
verificare scosse elettriche.
AVISO: No tocar na cablagem aparente ou nas portas de entrada de

corrente que no tiverem sido desligadas da fonte de energia, pois desse
facto podem resultar choques elctricos.
ADVERTENCIA: No toque los puertos ni los cables que no estn

aislados si no estn desconectados de la fuente de alimentacin ya que
podra provocar una descarga elctrica.
VARNING: Rr inte sladdar eller portar som inte r isolerade om de

inte har kopplats ur frn strmkllan. Det kan leda till elektriska sttar.
1-16
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
TUV Statutory Warnings and

Requirements
This section outlines the TUV statutory warnings and requirements
applicable to XDM platforms.
Warning Label
The following warning label is affixed alongside the XDM power input
connectors and the RAP circuit breakers.
Figure 1-3: Power input warning label
CAUTION: XDM equipment has two power sources.

Disconnect both before servicing.
Overcurrent Protection Requirements

NOTE: Rating and type of overcurrent protection are
according to Classification Level 5 (L5) for power supplies
having output circuits that meet the requirements for SELV
circuits.
WARNING: Observe the following precautions when

replacing circuit breakers:
Replace only with a circuit breaker of the same type and

rating.
Disconnect power before changing a circuit breaker.
ATTENTION: Pour ne pas compromettre la protection

contre les risques dincendie, remplacer par un fusible de
mme type et de mmes caractristiques nominales.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-17

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual

CAUTION: The equipment must have a connection between
the grounded conductor of the DC power supply circuit and
the equipment grounding conductor.
Connect the equipment directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode

conductor or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to
which the DC supply system grounding electrode is connected.
Locate the equipment in the same immediate area (for example, in adjacent
racks) as any other equipment that has a connection between the grounding
conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor, and as
the grounding point of the DC system. The DC system must not be grounded
elsewhere.
Position the DC supply source in the same premises as this equipment.
There must be no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit
conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding
electrode conductor.
Grounded Conductors Requirements

Connect the equipment directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode
conductor or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to
which the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor is connected.
Locate the DC supply source within the same premises as the equipment. There
must be no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit
conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding
electrode conductor.
1-18
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory
Warnings and Requirements
This section outlines the ITU-T and Telcordia statutory warnings and
requirements applicable to XDM platforms. The source for these requirements
can be found in IEC 60950-1/3.2.1.2.
DC Supply Circuit Connection to the

Grounding Conductor
WARNING: There must be a connection between the grounded
conductor of the DC power supply circuit and the equipment grounding
conductor. See installation instructions for more details.
When this connection is made, all the following conditions must be met:
417006-2318-0H3-A02
The equipment is connected directly to the DC supply system

grounding electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from a
grounding terminal bar/bus to which the DC supply system grounding
electrode is connected.
The equipment is located in the same immediate area (such as
adjacent cabinets) as any other equipment that has a connection
between the grounded conductor of the same DC supply circuit and
the grounding conductor, as well as the point of grounding of the DC
system. The DC system must not be grounded elsewhere.
The DC supply source is located within the same premises as this
equipment.
There is no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded
circuit conductor between the DC source and the point of connection
of the grounding electrode conductor.
1-19

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual
WARNING: Cet appareil est conu pour permettre le raccordement du

conducteur reli la terre du circuit dalimentation c.c. au conducteur de
terre de lappareil.
Pour ce raccordement, toutes les conditions suivantes doivent tre
respectes:
Ce matriel doit tre raccord directement au conducteur de la prise

de terre du circuit dalimentation c.c. ou une tresse de mise la
masse relie une barre omnibus de terre laquelle est raccorde
llectrode de terre du circuit dalimentation c.c.
Les appareils dont les conducteurs de terre respectifs sont raccords
au conducteur de terre du mme circuit dalimentation c.c. doivent
tre installs proximit les uns des autres (p.ex., dans des armoires
adjacentes) et proximit de la prise de terre du circuit dalimentation
c.c. Le circuit dalimentation c.c. ne doit comporter aucune autre
prise de terre.
La source dalimentation du circuit c.c. doit tre situe dans la mme
pice que le matriel.
Il ne doit y avoir aucun dispositif de commutation ou de
sectionnement entre le point de raccordement au conducteur de la
source dalimentation c.c. et le point de raccordement la prise de
terre.
Ethernet Port Precautions

WARNINGS:
1-20
Ethernet ports must be cabled with shielded cables and the shield
grounded at both ends.
Intra-building ports of the equipment or subassembly are suitable for
connection to intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling only.
Intra-building ports of the equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be
connected metallically to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its
wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building
interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed OSP
cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient
protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP
wiring.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
Laser Safety Requirements

Laser Classification
ECI Telecom equipment and components equipped with laser devices
described in this manual comply with the International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) safety standards, including IEC 60825-1 and IEC 60825-2
(AS/NZS 2211.2) - Safety of Laser Products.
Except for certain high power EDFA and Raman optical amplifiers, XDM
equipment is classified as Class 1 laser products. The product and its
accessories do not emit hazardous light and the beam is totally enclosed during
normal operating modes of customer operation. As long as the equipment is
operated in accordance with the applicable safety instructions, the Hazard
Level in equipment access locations is inherently Class 1M or lower.
The high power EDFA and Raman optical amplifiers are also classified as
Class 1M (or lower) laser products. However, note that these units emit power
within Hazard Level 3B and Hazard Level 4. The hazard level might be higher
than the product class, depending on network implementation and fiber
accessibility.
ECI Telecom provides product and installation information so that the products
may be installed and serviced safely.
Laser Information
See the XDM System Specification for information regarding the laser
transmitters of the various optical cards.
Warning Labels for Laser Products

The following labels are affixed near the
optical connectors of optical cards and
modules to indicate that the product is
classified as a Class 1 laser product.
The following labels are affixed near the

optical connectors of optical cards and
modules with a laser to indicate that the
product is classified as a Class 1M laser
product.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-21

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual
Laser Safety Statutory Warning

All personnel involved in equipment installation, operation, and maintenance
must be aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although protective
devices generally prevent direct exposure to the beam, personnel must strictly
observe the applicable safety precautions and, in particular, must avoid staring
into optical connectors, either directly or using optical instruments.
Remember that observing safety precautions is not a matter of personal choice;
ignoring safety puts all the people within line of sight in danger!
Training for Laser Safety

Personnel must be trained for safety before being authorized to operate, install,
and/or maintain laser products. The IEC 60825 (AS/NZS 2211.2) standards
require organizations to appoint a laser safety officer who is responsible for
training personnel, establishing safe operational procedures, and supervising
the implementation of these procedures during routine work.
Untrained personnel must not be allowed to operate, install, and/or maintain
laser products.
Laser Device Operating Precautions

In addition to the general precautions described in this section, be sure to
observe the following warnings when operating a product equipped with a laser
device. Failure to observe these warnings could result in bodily injury and
damage to equipment.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:
Protection goggles with nominal OD2 for the wavelength range of
1300 nm to 1600 nm are recommended. Protection goggles are
mandatory for tasks performed on equipment with up to 30 dBm
optical power lasers.
Hot insertion or swapping of a DWDM module or optical interface
module must be carried out only by authorized personnel.
During hot removal and insertion of a fiber termination, avoid looking
into the fiber to prevent irremediable damage to your eyes.
Place plastic covers on module fiber ports and fiber terminations not
currently in use.
Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures
associated with the laser device other than those specified herein.
Only ECI Telecom authorized service technicians must repair the unit.
To avoid potential fiber fusing, burnt connectors, or loss of laser
power, ensure all high power connections are clean before you power
on the optical amplifier.
It is strictly forbidden to override any protective devices and interlocks
used to prevent direct exposure to the laser beam.
1-22
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
WARNING: Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture

of optical ports when no fiber cable is connected. Avoid exposure and
do not stare into open apertures.
ADVARSEL: Der kan forekomme usynlige laserstrler fra de optiske

portes bninger, nr der ikke er tilsluttet et lyslederkabel. Undg at
blive udsat for disse strler, og kig ikke ind i bninger.
WAARSCHUWING: Er kan onzichtbare laserstraling uit de opening
van de optische poorten komen wanneer er geen fiberkabel is
aangesloten. Vermijd blootstelling aan straling en kijk niet in de
openingen.
VAROITUS: Optisten porttien aukoista saattaa steill nkymtnt
lasersteily silloin, kun niiss ei ole kuitukaapeleita kiinni. Vlt
altistumista ja l tuijota nihin avoimiin aukkoihin.
ATTENTION: Un rayonnement laser invisible peut tre mis partir
de l'ouverture des ports optiques lorsque aucun cble fibres optiques
n'est connect. vitez de vous y exposer et ne fixez pas les ouvertures.
WARNUNG: Wenn kein Faserkabel angeschlossen ist, knnen aus der
ffnung der optischen Anschlsse Laserstrahlen austreten. Vermeiden
Sie Bestrahlungen und schauen Sie nicht in diese ffnungen.
AVVERTENZA: Le aperture delle porte ottiche possono emettere
radiazioni laser invisibili quando i cavi in fibra non sono collegati.
Evitare lunghe esposizioni davanti alle aperture.
AVISO: Podem ser emitidas radiaes invisveis de laser a partir das
aberturas das portas pticas se no estiver ligado qualquer cabo de fibra
ptica. Evitar a exposio e no olhar directamente pelas aberturas
aparentes.
ADVERTENCIA: Es posible que la radiacin lser invisible se emita

desde la apertura de puertos pticos cuando no haya ningn cable de
fibra conectado. Evite la exposicin y no mire fijamente a las aberturas.
VARNING: Osynlig laserstrlning kan spridas frn ppningen p

optiska portar om ingen fiberoptikkabel r ansluten. Undvik exponering
och stirra inte in i ppningarna.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-23

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual
Protection Against Electrostatic

Discharge
This section provides guidelines for protecting XDM equipment and its
components against damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD) during
handling, packaging/unpackaging, transportation, installation, commissioning,
inspection, servicing, and maintenance activities.
Items sensitive to ESD are identified by the basic ESD warning symbol shown
in the following figure.
Figure 1-4: Basic ESD warning symbol
The information in this section presents generally accepted workmanship

practices and procedures that, when properly applied, minimize the probability
of electrostatic damage to XDM equipment and its components.
The information is also in line with CENELEC Electronic Components
Committee (CECC) specification CECC 00 015 that deals with protection of
devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESDS devices).
General
Most types of electronic equipment, assemblies, and components can be
damaged by ESDs. An ESD between two objects occurs when an object
carrying static electrical charges touches, or is brought near the other object.
Static electrical charges appear as a result of friction between surfaces of
insulating materials or separation of two such surfaces, and may also be
induced by electrical fields. Routine activities, such as walking across an
insulating floor, friction between garment parts, friction between objects, and
so on, can easily build up charges to levels that may cause damage, especially
when humidity is low.
In many cases, the buildup of charges can be avoided by using special
materials, for example, garments and packaging made of antistatic materials or
materials that have high resistivity but are not insulators.
1-24
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
The best approach to avoiding damage by ESD includes a combination of

means and procedures that:
Avoids build-up of electrostatic charges
Creates a protected work environment preventing ESD
Provides means for controlled discharge of any accumulated electrostatic

charges when entering the protected work environment
NOTE: An area in which ESDS devices can be handled with
minimum risk of damage and in which the operator is not
exposed to additional risks, is called an ESD Protected Area
(EPA).
Personnel Training
During production and assembly, equipment is handled in work spaces
especially prepared and certified to serve as a permanent EPA. However, in
many cases, the environment in which the same equipment is installed or
maintained cannot be assumed to form an EPA with a permanently controlled
boundary.
Therefore, all the work requiring the handling of unprotected ESDS devices
must be considered as field work.
Field work in this context includes activities such as service and maintenance,
installation, site inspection, and commissioning of components and assemblies
classified as ESDS, together with the packing and unpacking activities
associated with such activities.
All the staff involved in field work must be trained to perform field work in the
same way as work performed in permanent EPAs with respect to the material
quality and personal responsibilities, training, labeling, and packaging.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-25

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual
Use of Temporary EPA

Where necessary, a temporary EPA must be used. A typical temporary EPA
arrangement suitable for field work on XDM-900 equipment is shown in the
following figure. The EPA tool kit includes:
Wrist strap with 1 M series resistor
Bonding strap with 1 M series resistor
ESD carpet (work surface), 0.25 m2 minimum
The temporary EPA must include temporary controlled work surfaces and/or
flooring capable of providing protection against ESD.
CAUTION: The temporary EPA must be constructed in a
way that ensures electrical bonding of all the materials used,
and prevents the occurrence of any sudden changes in
potential within the EPA that could cause unacceptable
voltages or discharges to be applied to ESDs.
1-26
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
Figure 1-5: XDM900 shelf EPA arrangement
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-27

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual
Work Arrangements within a Temporary

EPA
To ensure that effective ESD protection is indeed achieved, the following
arrangements must be observed by persons entering and/or performing field
work within a temporary EPA:
1-28
All operators working within a temporary EPA must wear, as a minimum,

an antistatic protecting garment made of cotton.
If the extent of the temporary work area is such that the operator needs to
walk and move within that area, the floor must be capable of providing
protection against ESD.
The operator must be bonded to ground at all times when handling an

ESDS device.
If it becomes necessary to remove an ESDS device from equipment and

transfer it to a temporary work surface away from the equipment, the ESDS
device must be given protective packaging unless equipotential bonding of
the operator to ground is maintained.
An ESDS device must be placed directly into protective packaging upon

removal from equipment. A replacement ESDS device must be kept in its
protective packaging until required for immediate installation in the
equipment.
The field service operator must ensure that the materials and tools
necessary to maintain and control the temporary EPA are available at the
place of the field work at service time.
All tools intended for use within the EPA must, as far as is practical, be so
constructed that they do not generate or hold an induced electrostatic
charge.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
Environmental and Health

Concerns
ECI Telecom is committed to achieving high standards of environmental
quality and product safety.
The International Standardization Organization (ISO) has developed the
internationally recognized standards ISO 9001 and ISO 14001. These are
quality management standards that are administered by independent
accreditation and certification bodies.
ISO 9000 is a family of standards for quality management systems that has
been accepted as a model when assessing the adequacy of quality management
systems. Some of the requirements in ISO 9001 (one of the standards in the
ISO 9000 family) include:
Procedures that cover all key business processes
Process monitoring to ensure effectiveness
Adequate record-keeping
Monitoring output for defects, with appropriate and corrective action where
necessary
Regular review of individual processes and the complete quality system as

a whole
Facilitating continual improvement
ISO 14000 is the international specification for an Environmental Management

System (EMS). It specifies requirements for establishing an environmental
policy, determining environmental aspects and impacts of products, activities,
and services, planning environmental objectives and measurable targets,
implementation and operation of programs to meet objectives and targets,
checking and corrective action, and management review. ECI Telecom Quality
and Environmental Management Systems were certified to these ISO standards
and are periodically audited by third-party organizations.
ECI Telecom policies and products meet the spirit of the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency's Design for the Environment (DfE) Program to reduce risk
to people and the environment by preventing pollution and improving energy
efficiency. ECI Telecom is certified to OHSAS 18000, which was developed as
a standard against which occupational safety management systems can
objectively be assessed. OHSAS 18000 (compatible with ISO 9001 and ISO
14001) is being developed through a concerted effort from a number of the
world's leading national standards bodies, certification bodies, and specialist
consultancies.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-29

Safety Guidelines

Maintenance Manual
As a part of ECI Telecoms environmental commitment and in pursuit of

compliance with applicable environmental legislation, ECI Telecom makes
every effort to ensure that its products supplied to the EU market are compliant
with the RoHS Europe directive restricting use of certain hazardous substances
in electrical and electronic equipment. ECI Telecom also requires RoHS
compliance from all its suppliers. All new electrical and electronic equipment
delivered to locations within the EU do not contain any cadmium (Cd), lead
(Pb), hexavalent chromium compounds (Cr6+), mercury (Hg), polybrominated
biphenyls (PBB), or polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE), subject to certain
exemptions and limitations as outlined in the RoHS directive.
Without limiting the generality of the preceding statement, we wish to stress
that use of lead in solders in network infrastructure equipment has been
exempted by the RoHS directive and may be found in certain ECI Telecom
products.
All equipment delivered to locations within the EU complies with the
requirements of the RoHS Europe directive. Similarly, ECI Telecom equipment
is compliant with the RoHS California directive and RoHS Chinese directive
where relevant. All ECI Telecom equipment included in the Electronic
Information Products (EIP) category includes a table of Toxic and Hazardous
Substances and Elements, verifying hazardous substance levels in accordance
with the RoHS China directive. Equipment documentation includes the
appropriate Environmental Protection Use Period (EPUP) lifespan symbol
indicating the point in time when the equipment may be expected to enter the
recycling system. The following are examples of these pollution control
symbols.
Figure 1-6: Pollution control logos
NOTE: The number in Logo 2 is for illustrative purposes

only. When in actual use, the number indicates the
corresponding environmental protection use period of the
product.
1-30
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Safety Guidelines
ECI Telecom adheres to the Waste Electrical and Electronic equipment

(WEEE) directive requiring that all new products introduced into the EU
market be labeled with the crossed-out wheeled bin recycling symbol defined
by CENELEC standard EN 50419 and accepted by the member states. Note
that specific WEEE procedures may differ from state to state, depending on the
local implementation of the WEEE requirements.
Figure 1-7: WEEE recycling symbol
Do not dispose of ECI Telecom equipment and accessories together with

standard household waste. Check with ECI Telecom technical support for
information about product disposal, including recycling and reuse. For more
information about ECI Telecom's environmental, healths, and safety policy, see
the quality policy pages on the ECI Telecom website. (Environmental, Health,
and Safety Policy
http://www.ecitele.com/AboutECI/Quality/Pages/EnvironmentalHealthSafetyP
olicy.aspx)
For any further information regarding ECI Telecom's environmental and safety
policies, please contact technical support.
WARNING: The ultimate disposal of this product should be handled
according to national laws and regulations.
ADVARSEL: Endelig bortskaffelse af dette produkt skal ske i

overensstemmelse med nationale love og regler.
WAARSCHUWING: Dit product dient overeenkomstig de nationale
wetgeving en voorschriften te worden weggegooid.
VAROITUS: Tmn tuotteen lopullinen hvittminen tulee tehd
kansallisten lakien ja asetusten mukaisesti.
ATTENTION: La mise au rebut de ce produit devrait se faire

conformment aux lois et rglementations de chaque pays.
WARNUNG: Entsorgen Sie dieses Produkt entsprechend den geltenden

Gesetzen und Vorschriften.
AVVERTENZA: L'utilizzo di questo prodotto deve essere conforme alle

leggi e alle normative nazionali.
AVISO: A destruio final deste produto deve ser feita de acordo com as
leis e regulamentos nacionais.
ADVERTENCIA: Este producto debe utilizarse de acuerdo a las normas
y leyes nacionales.
VARNING: Slutlig kassering av denna produkt br hanteras enligt

nationella lagar och riktlinjer.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1-31

Safety Guidelines
1-32

Maintenance Manual
417006-2318-0H3-A02
2
Introduction
In this chapter:
XDM-900 Platform Overview ......................................................................... 2-1
XDM-900 I/O Protection Options ................................................................... 2-3
XDM-900 Shelf with CWDM Networking Capabilities ................................. 2-7
XDM-900 Platform Overview

The XDM-900 is a high density (120 Gbps TDM and 240 Gbps switching)
hybrid Ethernet/TDM multiservice platform optimized for high-capacity nodes
in metro and metro-core networks. The XDM-900 provides cost-optimized
native Ethernet and TDM handling, from MADM-16/64 to full blown 10 GbE
Layer 2 Ethernet and MPLS-TP switching, all in a single chassis, enabling
cost-effective network expansion and smooth migration to NG packet-based
transport networks. This future-proof platform offers best-of-breed capabilities
and optional ASON control support for enhanced protection and restoration
with minimal power consumption and footprint.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
2-1
Introduction

Maintenance Manual
By supporting the most advanced carrier class Ethernet-based services (Layer

1, Layer 2, EoS, MPLS-TP over transport as well as native
Ethernet/MPLS-TP), the XDM-900 is well positioned to implement cellular
backhaul transition/migration plans while supporting full triple play services
for residential NGN applications. This platform lets you preserve your existing
network structure and working procedures as you shift seamlessly towards
packet-based services.
Figure 2-1: XDM-900 shelf
The XDM-900 is a small footprint subrack that fits into ETSI, 19, and 21
racks. Its dimensions are 325 mm high, 443 mm wide, and 300 mm deep. Up to
three XDM-900 platforms can be installed per rack, providing up to 360 Gbps
capacity per rack with low power consumption. The XDM-900 standard shelf
is arranged as follows:
2-2
Eighteen slots (I1 to I18) flexibly allocated to up to eighteen I/O interface

modules, including 2 SDH quad I/O modules (wide slots) and 16 tributary
interface modules (PIM, SIM, and Ethernet cards DIOM, EISMB, and
MCSM). These modules enable a combination of PDH, SDH, and Ethernet
services, supporting up to 12 STM-64 or up to 48 STM-16 interfaces.
Two slots (MXC-A and MXC-B) allocated to the MXC900 cards, for 120G
cross connect control. Integrated ASON control capabilities are available
using an optional ASON module in the MXC-900.
One slot allocated to the ECU900/ECU900F module.
One FCU900 that consists of eight separate fans to support cooling system
redundancy, activated by redundant controllers located on the MXC cards.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Introduction
XDM-900 I/O Protection Options

The XDM-900 shelf boasts an extremely high modular design with two module
cages, one in the upper part, one in the lower part, and a card cage in the
middle. An expansion TPU shelf that adds protection capabilities to the I/O
modules can be mounted on top and under the shelf. An expansion OCU shelf
that adds CWDM networking capabilities to the XDM-900 can be mounted on
top of the upper TPU or directly on top of the XDM-900 shelf.
Protection of I/O modules in the upper and lower module cages is supported.
CAUTION: When the XDM-900 shelf is to be installed
vertically, pay attention to position the shelf with the FCU900
facing downwards, to ensure proper air flow to the XDM-900.
Basic XDM-900 Shelf

The basic XDM-900 shelf is housed in a 246 mm (9.68 in.) deep, 443 mm
(17.44 in.) wide, and 350 mm (13.78 in.) high equipment cage. The shelf
consists of two module cages, one in the upper part, the second in the lower
part, and a card cage in the middle. Each module cage can house up to 8 I/O
modules, totaling 16 modules in the entire shelf. The card cage accommodates
two MXC900 cards (main and protection), an External Connection Unit
(ECU900 or ECU900-F), and two wide I/O cards. When I/O cards are not used
in the wide slots, they can be adapted to accommodate one SIM16_1 module
each, using a mechanical adapter.
I/O protection is not supported in this option.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
2-3
Introduction

Maintenance Manual
The XDM-900 shelf can be installed in a horizontal or vertical position.
Figure 2-2: Basic XDM-900 shelf, horizontal installation
Figure 2-3: Basic XDM-900 shelf, vertical Installation
2-4
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Introduction
Expanded XDM-900 with I/O Protection

The following I/O protection options are supported for XDM-900 shelves
installed in a horizontal position:
A TPU mounted on top of the basic shelf protecting the I/O modules in the
upper module cage.
A TPU attached under the basic shelf protecting the I/O modules in the
lower module cage.
Two TPUs, one mounted on top of the basic shelf protecting the I/O
modules in the upper cage, and one attached under the shelf protecting the
I/O modules in the lower cage.
Each TPU adds only 75 mm (3 in.) to the height of the XDM-900 shelf.
Each TPM is connected to both operating and protection I/O modules in the
shelf in a 1:1, 1:2, or 1:3 configuration. If a failure is detected in one of the
operating I/O modules, the active MXC via the TC module in the TPU switches
the traffic from the active I/O module to the protection module.
The following figures show several options for installing TPUs with the
XDM-900 shelf.
Figure 2-4: XDM-900 with one TPU on top of the shelf
417006-2318-0H3-A02
2-5
Introduction

Maintenance Manual
Figure 2-5: XDM-900 with two TPUs
Similar I/O protection options are supported for XDM-900 shelves installed in
a vertical position.
2-6
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Introduction
XDM-900 Shelf with CWDM

Networking Capabilities
An OCU can be mounted on top of the basic shelf or on top of a TPU installed
on the basic shelf to add CWDM networking capabilities to the platform. The
OCU can accept various CWDM modules like Mux/DeMux, splitters/couplers,
OADMs, and power amplifiers. Each expansion shelf (TPU or OCU) adds 75
mm (3 in.) to the height of the XDM-900.
NOTE: The OCU is not supported for installation under the
XDM-900 shelf.
A typical XDM-900 shelf with an OCU (and two TPUs) is shown in the
following figure.
Figure 2-6: XDM-900 with an OCU and two TPUs
417006-2318-0H3-A02
2-7
Introduction
2-8

Maintenance Manual
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3
Site Preparation and Rack
Installation
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 3-1
Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 3-4
Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection ................................................. 3-5
XDM Rack Installation Options ...................................................................... 3-6
Preparing Cables and Fibers ............................................................................ 3-7
XDM-900 Accessories .................................................................................. 3-18
Equipment Installation ................................................................................... 3-32
Rack Installation ............................................................................................ 3-42
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks ............................................................... 3-48
Overview
The following sections describe the conditions required for installing the
equipment at the site, including site preparation, power sources, rack
installation, preparing cables and fibers, installing ancillary units and more.
Site Preparation
Perform a preliminary survey of the installation site, taking the following issues
into consideration:
System environmental requirements
Physical location of the XDM-900 platforms
Location of power sources
Types of interfaces used at the site (optical, electrical, management, alarm
monitoring, etc.)
Work and equipment safety requirements
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-1

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Site Environmental Requirements

The following environmental conditions must be provided at the installation
site.
Parameter
Compliance requirements
Electromagnetic interference
FTZ 1TR9, EN 55022-2/2003, EN 50082-1/97
Temperature
ETSI ETS 300-19-2-3 Test Spec. T3.1
Main Equipment Dimensions

Table 3-1:
3-2
Equipment dimensions
Equipment type
Height
(mm)
Width
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
Max. weight (kg)
XDM-900
350
443
246
8.2 (shelf only)

30 (fully populated)
TPU
75
443
246
5.5 (shelf only)

XDM-900 + TPU
425
443
246
13.7 (shelves only)

XDM-900 + two
TPUs
500
443
246
21.9 (shelves only)

XDM-900 + two
TPUs + OCU
575
443
246
30.1 (shelves only)

xRAP-100
133
445
185
10
RAP-BG
88
440
150
RAP-4B
88
447
155
2.4
xRAP-D
133
445
185
9.5
xDDF-21
44.5
440
150
FST
44.5
440
240
ODF
44.5
440
240
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Physical Location
WARNING: XDM-900 shelves are intended for installation
in restricted access areas only.
Choose the physical location of the XDM-900 shelves, taking the following
aspects into consideration:
1. Equipment dimensions, as specified in the following table.
2. Required floor loading capability: 150 kg per rack for a typical 4-shelf
installation.
3. Routing requirements for grounding, power, alarm monitoring, and
management cables, and optical fibers. To ensure convenient access to
cables and fibers, it is recommended to use overhead cable ladders
whenever possible, to bring the cables/fibers to the top of each rack.
When a network management station, for example EMS-XDM, is installed on
the site, consider the method of connection to the local network management
station and the maximum allowed distance.
Power Sources
XDM equipment must be powered only by DC sources in compliance with the
applicable sections of ETSI 300 132-2 and FTZ 19PFL1, and the SELV of EN
60950-1 requirements. The nominal supply voltage is -48 VDC (positive lead
grounded); the allowed supply voltage range is -40 VDC to -57.6 VDC. For
redundancy, two separate DC power sources should be available.
The power consumption of the XDM-900 is:
Typical: 1000 W
Maximum: 1400 W
NOTE: If the input power connected to one of the xINFs
exceeds -57.6 VDC, both xINFs are shut down and the shelf
is switched off.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-3

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Tools and Test Equipment

No special-purpose tools beyond a standard technician toolbox are required for
the installation of XDM-900 shelves.
Since traffic cables can be prepared on site, suitable tool kits should also be
available. This includes tools for the assembly of coaxial cables (see the
following table) and tools for the preparation of optical patch cords.
Table 3-2:
Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools
No.
Name
Description
Stripper
DIN 1.0/2.3
Center contact crimp tool (blue)
DIN 1.0/2.3
Crimp tool, outer
DIN 1.0/2.3
Cable stripper
NCX1
Nipper (cutter for center contact)
NCX1
Die for NCX1
NCX1
Cleaning Optical Connectors

When handling optical fibers, clean the optical connectors using the standard
cleaning kits recommended by the optical connector manufacturers.
3-4
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Unpacking and Performing

Visual Inspection
Before you start:
Before unpacking, make a preliminary inspection of the shipping boxes.
Immediately report evidence of damage to the carrier, the project manager, and
your local ECI Telecom representative.
CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices
Proper handling and grounding precautions required
XDM-900 equipment contains components sensitive to ESD.
To prevent ESD damage, strictly observe all the precautions
listed in Protection against Electrostatic Discharge (page 124). Keep parts and cards in their antistatic packaging
material until you are ready to install them.
The use of an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded
equipment frame or rack is recommended when handling
cards and modules during installation, removal, or connection
to internal connectors.
You must unpack the equipment on a clean flat surface.

To unpack the equipment:
1. Place the shipping boxes with the top upwards, cut the sealing tape using a
short knife so as not to damage the internal items, and open the top flaps.
2. Remove the items contained in the box and inspect each item for damage.
Check for loose parts or any visual damage to the rack, platform, and
auxiliary equipment. Also check the integrity of all the connectors, leads,
and cables.
NOTE: Do not remove plastic covers from optical connectors
until optical cables are connected to them.
3. Search the shipping boxes for any additional small items that may be
present.
4. Open each of the module and card packages for inspection, but do not
remove the modules/cards from their individual protective packages until
they can be inserted in the platform.
5. Check the contents of the shipping boxes against the packing list attached
to each box. If damaged parts are detected or if any parts are missing,
notify the project manager and your local ECI Telecom representative.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-5

Installation

Maintenance Manual
XDM Rack Installation Options

XDM platforms can be installed in the following rack types:
ECI Telecom's recommended enhanced ETSI optical racks (hereafter

referred to as the optical rack), or the improved ETSI racks (hereafter
referred to as ETSI A). These racks have been specially adapted by ECI
Telecom and are tailored to meet platform requirements and simplify
platform installation and maintenance, including the following benefits:
Removable rear and side panels for tidy routing and efficient
maintenance of all rack cables, including:
Control cables
Power cables
Data cables (where relevant)
Two channels on the racks front rails for routing up to 400 (ETSI A) or
800 (optical rack) optical fibers.
Open frame top and bottom for easy routing of cables from suspension
floors and/or ceiling ladders.
Perforated door for free air flow to the installed equipment (see
Environmental Requirements).
Front door for left or right opening mounting.
Standard ETSI racks (hereafter referred to as ETSI B).
ISO 19 racks and standard US racks. These racks should be used only in
consultation with and when approved by ECI Telecom's Mechanical
Department.
XDM racks options are summarized in the following table.

Table 3-3:
Equipment rack data
Type
Height
Width
Depth
Available space
Optical
Rack
2200 mm
600 mm
300 mm
47U (2100 mm)
ETSI A
2200 mm
600 mm
300 mm
46U (2050 mm)
ETSI A
2600 mm
600 mm
300 mm
55U (2450 mm)
ETSI B
2200 mm
600 mm
300 mm
46U (2050 mm)
ETSI B
2600 mm
600 mm
300 mm
55U (2450 mm)
US
7 ft.
(2134 mm)
23 in.
(585 mm)
12 in.
(305 mm)
44U
(6.5 ft./1960 mm)
US
7 ft.
(2134 mm)
19 in.
(483 mm)
12 in.
(305 mm)
44U
(6.5 ft./1960 mm)
ISO 19
7.25 ft.
(2200 mm)
24 in.
(600 mm)
24 in.
(600 mm)
47U
(6.85 ft./2089 mm)
The loading of a fully equipped rack is 7.35 kn/m2, or 55.35 kn/ft.2.

3-6
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
NOTES:
Not all XDM platforms can be installed in all types of

racks. This section includes a general list of the rack
options available. The installation instructions for each
platform include a list of the racks appropriate for that
platform.
The installation instructions in this manual are written on
the basis of an installation using an ECI Telecom enhanced
rack. Some of these instructions may not be relevant if you
are using a standard rack supplied by other vendors.
Before any installation plan can be completed, a site
survey by ECI Telecom technical support team is
required, to verify rack accessibility and accessory
compatibility at that site. If you are working with standard
racks from other vendors, the site survey is also essential to
determine what changes are required to adapt the rack to
XDM platform installation requirements.
All ECI Telecom XDM equipment racks may be installed on wooden, concrete,
or suspended floors, or suspended from overhead mountings. Some of these
installation options are described in Installing Equipment Racks. If your facility
uses a different installation paradigm, contact the ECI Telecom Technical
Support team for additional information.
Preparing Cables and Fibers

NOTE: This section provides information for preparing
cables and optical fibers. The necessary cables can also be
ordered from ECI Telecom. For details, contact ECI
Telecoms Customer Support team or your ECI Telecom sales
representative.
The main cables required for installing the XDM-900 include:
Grounding cables, described in Grounding Cables (page 3-8)
DC power cables, described in DC Power Cables (page 3-10)
Alarm cables, described in Alarm Cables (page 3-11)
Management cables, described in Management Cables (page 3-12)
Timing (clock) cables, described in Timing (Clock) Cables (page 3-12)
Electric traffic cables, described in Electric Traffic Cables (page 3-13)
Optical fibers, described in Optical Fibers
Data cables for data modules, described in Data Cables for EISMBs,
DIOMs, and MCSMs (page 3-16) as applicable
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-7

Installation

Maintenance Manual
DC power and traffic cables should be prepared on site. AC power cables

suitable for connection to the power outlet types specified when placing the
order (according to the site specifications) and the control and alarm cables
used within XDM equipment racks, are included in the shipment with power
outlets provided according to the site specifications.
The following sections provide information to enable you to prepare cables on
site. Refer to Connector Pin Assignments (page A-1) for a description of the
equipment connector types and cable wiring.
WARNING: When preparing cables, in particular power and grounding
cables, use only UL-listed components of the specified types.
Components must also comply with any applicable national and local
safety codes and regulations.
Only qualified trained personnel may be involved in the preparation of
the various cable types. Personnel must use only approved procedures, in
accordance with the applicable workmanship practice.
Grounding Cables
Rack equipment is bonded through the screws that fasten the equipment chassis
to the frame of the rack. It is therefore necessary to provide a reliable
low-impedance connection between the rack frame and the site grounding bus
using copper conductors.
Make the connection between the rack grounding screw and the site grounding
bar by means of a copper lead with green/yellow insulation having the same
diameter as the RAP input power cable or thicker, in compliance with UL/ETSI
recommendations.
The end of the lead connected to a RAP, as used in the rack, must be
terminated in an M8 lug.
Route grounding conductors along the shortest possible route. Treat the bare
portion of the conductor with antioxidant and connect a listed two-hole
compression lug. If the lug is not plated, bring it to a bright finish and coat it
with antioxidant before connecting it to the frame of the rack.
WARNING:
3-8
The ground cable must be at least the same thickness as the RAP
power cable.
To prevent possible damage to XDM equipment, all racks and
equipment must be completely grounded before connecting any
external devices powered from an AC source (110/220 V) to the
platform. All grounding procedures described in Grounding the
XDM-900 Platform must be completed before, for example,
connecting an external PC to configure and initialize the NE
management system.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
WARNING: This equipment is designed to permit the connection of

the grounded conductor of the DC supply circuit to the grounding
conductor at the equipment. See installation instructions for more
details.
When this connection is made, all of the following conditions must be
met:
The equipment is connected directly to the DC supply system

grounding electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from the
grounding terminal bar or bus to which the DC supply system
earthing electrode is connected.
The equipment is located in the same immediate area (such as
adjacent cabinets) as any other equipment with a connection
between the grounded conductor of the same DC supply circuit and
the grounding conductor, as well as the point of grounding of the
DC system. The DC system must not be grounded elsewhere.
The DC supply source is located within the same premises as this
equipment.
Devices in the grounded circuit conductor are not switched or
disconnected between the DC source and the point of connection of
the grounding electrode conductor.
WARNING: Cet appareil est conu pour permettre le raccordement du

conducteur reli la terre du circuit dalimentation c.c. au conducteur
de terre de lappareil.
Pour ce raccordement, toutes les conditions suivantes doivent tre
respectes:
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Ce matriel doit tre raccord directement au conducteur de la prise

de terre du circuit dalimentation c.c. ou une tresse de mise la
masse relie une barre omnibus de terre laquelle est raccorde
llectrode de terre du circuit dalimentation c.c.
Les appareils dont les conducteurs de terre respectifs sont raccords
au conducteur de terre du mme circuit dalimentation c.c. doivent
tre installs proximit les uns des autres (p.ex., dans des armoires
adjacentes) et proximit de la prise de terre du circuit
dalimentation c.c. Le circuit dalimentation c.c. ne doit comporter
aucune autre prise de terre.
La source dalimentation du circuit c.c. doit tre situe dans la
mme pice que le matriel.
Il ne doit y avoir aucun dispositif de commutation ou de
sectionnement entre le point de raccordement au conducteur de la
source dalimentation c.c. et le point de raccordement la prise de
terre.
3-9

Installation

Maintenance Manual
DC Power Cables
NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for connecting DC
power, the positive lead (+48 V) should be connected with a red cable,
and the negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable. However, according
to the BS7671 (GB) and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive
lead (+48 V) should be connected with a blue cable and the negative
lead (-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that describe
DC power cable connections, use cables with appropriate colors to
comply with the standards in your area of residence.
DC power cables should be prepared on site. Two types of DC power cables

are needed:
RAP input power cables
Shelf power cables
RAP input power cables

The RAP input power cables are prepared on site. They connect input power
from the site power distribution subsystem to the DC input terminals of the
rack's RAP panel.
Two input power cables are required for each rack, one for each source. The
cables must use copper leads complying with UL/ETSI recommendations. Use
a red lead for the positive conductor and a black lead for the negative
conductor, or as required in your area of residence.
The RAP cable ends must be terminated in cable lugs matching the conductor
gauge with M8 lugs for all RAP types (xRAP-D, RAP-BG, xRAP-100, or
RAP-4B).
The recommended cable gauge is 0 AWG (50 mm2/.078 inch2) or thicker for the
xRAP-D, and 2 AWG (35 mm2/.054 in.2) or thicker for the xRAP-100,
RAP-BG, or RAP-4B. This gauge ensures that the voltage drop across the rack
power cable at full power consumption does not exceed 2 V, even for cable
runs up to 30 meters (99 feet) connected to a RAP providing power to two
XDM shelves.
When an xRAP is used to provide power to a single XDM shelf, lower lead
gauges may be used:
3-10
For cable runs not exceeding 20 meters (66 feet), it is sufficient to use 16
mm2 (.025 inch2) copper leads.
For cable runs not exceeding 30 meters (99 feet), it is sufficient to use 25
mm2 (.039 inch2) copper leads.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
NOTE:
If necessary, the gauge of the grounding lead can also be reduced to

the gauge of the power leads, that is, 16 mm2 (.025 in.2) for lengths
up to 20 meters (66 feet), and 25 mm2 (.039 in.2) for lengths up to
30 meters (99 feet).
The ground cable must be of at least the same thickness as the xRAP
power cable. Therefore, if the xRAP power cable is thick, the
grounding cable must match that thickness.
The thickness of the shelf grounding cable must match the thickness
of the power cable from the xRAP to the shelf.
Shelf power cables

Two 12 AWG (25 mm) cables supplied by ECI Telecom are used to connect
the two redundant input power sources from the RAP panel to the POWER
connectors on the MXC900-A and MXC900-B cards of each XDM-900 shelf
installed in the rack.
Alarm Cables
Alarm cables used are included in the shipment according to the site
specifications. Alarm indications are carried by the following cables:
Shelf alarm indication cable. One shelf alarm indication cable is required
for each XDM-900 shelf installed in the rack. One end of the cable is
always connected to the ALARMS connector on the ECU900/ ECU900-F
card. Connection of the other end depends on the cable type, as follows:
xRAP-100 alarm cable. Connects to one of the SHELF connectors on

the xRAP-100.
xRAP-B alarm cable. Connects to one of the SHELF connectors on the

xRAP-B.
xRAP-D alarm cable. Connects to one of the SHELF connectors on the

xRAP-D.
Client alarm cable. Connects to the client's alarm collecting facility.
Bay alarm cable. One bay alarm cable is required for each rack. This cable
carries the alarm indications and monitoring lines of the bay (rack). One
end of the cable is connected to the RAP, the other end is open and
connects to the client's alarm collecting facility. Two types of this cable are
available:
xRAP-100 bay alarm cable. Connects to the ALARM IN/OUT

connector on the xRAP-100.
xRAP-B bay alarm cable. Connects to the ALARMS connector on the

xRAP-B.
xRAP-D bay alarm cable. Connects to the ALARMS connector on the

xRAP-D.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-11

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Management Cables
Out-of-band management communication is connected to an XDM-900 by
means of a minihub with a pair of the RJ-45 Ethernet connectors located on the
ECU900/ ECU900-F cards.
If one XDM-900 is installed, the connection is made to the management MAIN
RJ-45 connector. If more than one XDM-900 is installed in the same site, it is
possible to save the use of an external hub. In this case, the first system is
connected as explained above, and the other systems are connected in an
Ethernet daisy chain. The management MAIN connector of each system is
connected to the management PROT/LCT connector of the previous system.
Suitable standard Ethernet station cables are available from many sources.
Cables of Category 3 or better must be used. The length of the cables must not
exceed the maximum recommended for the cable type and hub port in use (up
to a few dozen meters).
Timing (Clock) Cables

The ECU900/ ECU900-F on the XDM-900 shelf has two timing reference
connectors, T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2, which are used for 2.048 Mbps signals
and have balanced (120 ) G.703 interfaces.
The cables used to connect to these connectors are prepared on site, and they
comprise individually shielded twisted pairs (the same type of pairs needed for
connection to the balanced E1 tributary interfaces).
If the site timing reference distribution subsystem has unbalanced (75 ) G.703
interfaces, a 120 /75 adapter can be supplied for mounting on the
T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors. This permits using coaxial cables
(BT3002 or equivalent) of the same type used for connecting to balanced E1
tributary interfaces.
3-12
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Electric Traffic Cables

Some electric traffic cables can be prepared on site. The following table lists
the type of cables and mating connectors needed for each XDM-900 traffic
interface type.
NOTE: The connectors are identical regardless of whether the traffic
cables are connected directly to the I/O modules or to TPMs on the
TPU.
Traffic cables mating connector data

I/O module
Interface type
Cable type
Mating
connector
Qty/
Module
PIM2_21
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Twin multipair cable (2 x

25 shielded 120 twisted
pairs)
Twin 50-pin
SCSI male
PIM2_42
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)

pairs)
100-pin SCSI 2
male
PIM2_63/B
PIM2_63
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)

pairs)
Twin 50-pin
SCSI male
PIM2_63S
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
3 x twin multipair cable (2 2 x 136-pin

x 25 shielded 120 twisted VHDCI male
pairs)
PIM345_3
E3 and DS-3
(34/45 Mbps)
NCX coaxial cable
DIN1.0/2.3
male
SIM1_4/E
STM-1
electrical
NCX coaxial cable
DIN1.0/2.3
male
SIM1_8 1
STM-1
electrical
NCX coaxial cable
DIN1.0/2.3
low profile
male
16
When a TPU is used, additional patch traffic cables between PIMs and TPMs
are required, as described in the following table.
SIM1_8 configured as STM-1 electrical module with ETR-1 electrical SFP transceivers.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-13

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Patch traffic cables connecting I/O modules to the TPU

TPM
Interface type
Cable type
Mating connector
Qty/
Module
TPM2_1
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Twin multipair
cable (25 pairs
of shielded
120 twisted
pairs)
PIM: Twin 50-pin SCSI

female
TPM: 100-pin SCSI
female
TPM2_3
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Twin multipair
cable (25 pairs
of shielded
120 twisted
pairs)
PIM: Twin 50-pin SCSI

female
TPM: 100-pin SCSI
female
TPM2_42_2 E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Twin multipair
cable (25 pairs
of shielded 120
twisted pairs)
PIM2_42: 100-pin SCSI

male
TPM: Twin 136-pin
VHDCI male
TPM2_63_2 E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Triple multipair
cable (25 pairs
of shielded
120 twisted
pairs)
PIM2_63: Triple twins of 1

50-pin SCSI male
TPM: Twin 136-pin
VHDCI male
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Twin multipair
cable (25 pairs
of shielded 120
twisted pairs)
PIM2_42: 100-pin SCSI

male
TPM: Twin 136-pin
VHDCI male
E3 and DS-3
(34/45 Mbps)
STM-1
electrical
RG179x8
multicoaxial
cable
PIM: DIN1.0/2.3 male

TPM: 8W8 D-type
TPMH_1
Optical Fibers
Optical fibers can be prepared on site.
Use only 2 mm optical fibers to connect to optical interfaces. For each optical
interface, ECI Telecom supplies patch cords with mating optical connectors
already attached to the fiber. Therefore, only the optical termination on the
ODF side, which is installation-dependent, must be installed on site.
The optical fibers should enter the rack from the top, be threaded through cable
guides running along the rack side rails, and end at the FST. The tray must
contain enough fiber length for extracting modules from the XDM-900 and for
replacing fiber in case of damage (splicing repairs). When routing fibers, make
sure to observe the minimum bending radius (35 mm).
The following table lists the type of fibers and mating connectors needed to
prepare fibers for each XDM-900 module/card.
3-14
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Table 3-4:

Installation
Optical fibers and mating connector data
I/O
module/card
Interface type
Fiber type
Mating
connector
Qty/
Module/Card
SIM1_4/OB
SIM1_4/O
STM-1 optical
1 pair of fiber
patch cords per
interface
LC male
8 fibers
SIM1_8 2
STM-1 optical
1 pair of fiber
patch cords per
interface
LC male
16 fibers
SIM4_2
STM-4 optical
1 pair of fiber
patch cords per
interface
LC male
4 fibers
SIM4_4
STM-4 optical
1 pair of fiber
patch cords per
interface
LC male
8 fibers
SIM16_1
STM-16
1 pair of fiber
patch cords per
interface
LC male
2 fibers
SIM16_2
STM-16
1 pair of fiber
patch cords per
interface
LC male
4 fibers
SIM16_4
STM-16
1 pair of fiber
patch cords per
interface
LC male
8 fibers
SIM64_XFP
STM-64
1 pair of fiber
patch cords per
interface
LC male
2 fibers
SIM64_2
STM-64
1 pair of fiber
patch cords per
interface
LC male
4 fibers
SIM1_8 configured as STM-1 optical module with OTR-1 optical SFP transceivers.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-15

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Data Cables for EISMBs, DIOMs, and MCSMs

Data modules like EISMBs, DIOMs, and MCSMs are connected by electrical
cables or optical fibers according to the interface type being connected.
Ethernet electrical interfaces are connected by CAT5E SFTP 4-pair cables
terminated with RJ-45 connectors.
Table 3-5:
EISMB
module
EISM optical fibers and mating connector data

Port no. Interface
type
EISMB_840 1-2
GbE/FE
Fiber type
Mating
connector
1 pair of 50/62.5 m LC male

MM fiber, or 1 pair
of 9 m SM fiber
patch cords per
interface for GbE
Qty/
module
8 fibers
1 pair of 50/62.5 m
MM fiber patch
cords per interface
for FE
3-4
FE
1 pair of 50/62.5 m LC male

MM fiber patch
cords per interface
EISMB_840 can also be equipped as a mixed module including optical and

electrical interfaces by inserting an electrical SFP in the port. The cabling to
such port is made as a connection to an electrical interface listed in the
following table.
The following table lists the type of Ethernet electrical traffic cables and the
mating connectors needed for the EISMB_804 module.
Table 3-6:
EISMB
module
EISMB Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data

Port no. Interface type
EISMB_804 1-2
3-4
3-16
Cable type
Mating
connector
Qty/
module
10/100/1000BaseT
CAT5E SFTP RJ-45

4-pair
10/100BaseT
CAT5E SFTP RJ-45

4-pair
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Table 3-7:

Installation
DIOM optical fibers and mating connector data
DIOM
module
Fiber type
DIOM_40
1-4
1 pair of 50/62.5 LC male

m MM fiber, or
1 pair of 9 m
SM fiber patch
cords per
interface for GbE
GbE/FE
Mating
connector
Qty/
module
8 fibers
1 pair of 50/62.5
m MM fiber
patch cords per
interface for FE
DIOM_40 can also be equipped as a mixed module including optical and

electrical interfaces by inserting an electrical SFP in the port. The cabling to
such port is made as a connection to an electrical interface listed in the
following table.
mating connectors needed for the DIOM electrical modules.
Table 3-8:
DIOM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data
DIOM
module
Port
no.
Interface type
Cable type
Mating
connector
Qty/
module
DIOM_08
1-8
10/100BaseT
CAT5E SFTP
4-pair
RJ-45
Table 3-9:
MCSM optical fibers and mating connector data

Mating
connector
MCSM
module
Port
no.
Interface type
Fiber type
MCSM
1-8
GbE/FE
1 pair of 50/62.5 LC male

m MM fiber, or
1 pair of 9 m
SM fiber patch
cords per
interface for GbE
Qty/
module
16 fibers
1 pair of 50/62.5
m MM fiber
patch cords per
interface for FE
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-17

Installation

Maintenance Manual
mating connectors needed for the MCSM module.
Table 3-10: MCSM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data
MCSM
module
Cable type
Mating
connector
Qty/
module
MCSM
9-16
CAT5E SFTP
4-pair
RJ-45
10/100BaseT
XDM-900 Accessories
ECI Telecom offers accessories for efficient and optimal installation of
equipment in racks. This section describes the main types of accessories. For
custom modifications to standard items, contact ECI Telecoms Network
Solutions Division support team or your ECI Telecom sales representative.
xRAP-D
The xRAP-D is a power distribution and alarm panel for XDM platforms
installed in racks. The xRAP-D performs the following main functions:
3-18
Redundant power distribution for one or two XDM platforms. The

xRAP-D can support either one or two XDM platforms. Each platform can
work with either one or two power inputs, where one is the main power
input (A) and the second is an optional protective backup power input (B).
The xRAP-D can work with up to two redundant input power sources,
depending on the user's electric infrastructure.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
In the default configuration, the xRAP-D supplies independent streams of

power to two separate XDM platforms. Input power for one XDM platform
is kept completely separate from the input power for the second XDM
platform. Separate input power cables from the power sources feed into
independent circuit breakers on the xRAP-D unit. (There are a total of four
circuit breakers on the xRAP-D, supporting redundant power supplies for
up to two XDM platforms.) The power supply flow for two platforms is
illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-1: xRAP-D power supply flow
The xRAP-D has four 5-pin DC output connectors for supplying redundant
power to any platform in the XDM-1000 or XDM-100 family of products.
The maximum power supplied to each XDM platform is up to 2250 W, in
accordance with the platform type and version.
Note that with the default configuration, the power cables from the user's
power supply sources to the xRAP-D do not have to be more than 25 mm2
thick, and the circuit breakers do not have to be more than 55A, because the
maximum power consumption per cable is never more than 2250 W.
Previous xRAP units used a single heavy duty power cable to supply power
for up to two XDM platforms. The xRAP-D enables independent power
delivery to two shelves through separate cables, enabling use of thinner
cables and smaller circuit breakers. The xRAP-D was developed in
response to the needs of customers who are not able to support large
aggregate power feeding requirements when supporting two XDM
platforms.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-19

Installation

Maintenance Manual
NOTE: Users who prefer to work with a single power cable

from their main power supply (and optionally, a single power
cable from the protective power supply) can still work with a
single cable if they either:
Work with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support a single

XDM platform only, with a maximum of 2250 W for that
platform.
Work with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support two
XDM platforms, where each platform is limited to a
maximum of 1100 W for per platform. This configuration
option requires the use of an optional metal bridge
component designed by ECI Telecom for this purpose.
(Note that this configuration option is only available from
V7.2, when the management software enforces limitations
on maximum power consumption.)
Work with a single 50 mm2 power cable to support two
XDM platforms, with a maximum of 2250 W for each
platform. This configuration option requires the use of an
optional metal bridge component designed by ECI
Telecom for this purpose.
For more information about the bridge-component

configuration options, see Connecting DC Input Power Cable
to the xRAP-D with a Bridge Component.
The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC, ranging to -72 VDC. The
internal circuits of the xRAP-D are powered whenever at least one power
source is connected. The presence of DC power within the xRAP-D is
indicated by a POWER ON indicator.
Each DC power circuit of each platform is protected by a circuit breaker
that also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The
required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied
with the XDM-900 shelves, and therefore their current rating is in
accordance with the order requirements.
The circuit breakers are installed during the xRAP-D installation. To
prevent accidental changing of a circuit breakers state, the circuit breakers
can be reached easily after opening the front cover of the xRAP-D. The
circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.
Bay alarm indications. The xRAP-D includes four alarm indicators, one
for each alarm severity. When alarms of different severities are received
simultaneously, the corresponding alarm indications light simultaneously.
A buzzer is activated whenever a Critical alarm is present in XDM
platforms connected to the xRAP-D.
3-20
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Connecting external alarms from two XDM platforms, each platform

supporting up to four alarm inputs and four alarm outputs (via dry contacts)
to the customer's central alarm monitoring system. Customers who wish to
define external alarms should refer to the explanation of electrical capacity
requirements for external alarms in the XDM System Specification.
Note that the xRAP-D supports up to eight external alarms. These alarms
are by default allocated four to each platform. ECI Telecom offers the
option, when working with a single XDM-1000 platform, to define up to
eight external alarms for that XDM-1000 platform. A second XDM
platform cannot be used with the xRAP-D when working with this
configuration, and a special alarm connection cable must be used. Contact
ECI Telecom technical support for more information.
Exporting severity alarms. Two separate groups of severity alarms (a

group of four for each XDM platform) are provided via dry contacts for the
customer's central alarm monitoring system.
Exporting Critical buzzer signals. The Critical alarm signal is provided

via dry contacts to the customer's central alarm monitoring system for
activation of a Critical buzzer. A separate line is provided as well for
muting this buzzer, by connecting the line to a ground with a momentary
switch.
NOTE: Note that the xRAP-D supports the same alarm and
power functions as the xRAP-B and xRAP-HP. When
replacing an existing xRAP-HP with an xRAP-D you must
also use the appropriate xRAP-D accessory kit, including
cables.
The following figure shows the front panel of the xRAP-D, and the table lists
the functions of the front panel components corresponding to the figure callout
numbers.
Figure 3-2: xRAP-D front panel
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-21

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Table 3-11: xRAP-D front panel component functions
3-22
No.
Designation
Function
SOURCE A
Translucent cover for the two circuit breakers (designated

Shelf 1 and Shelf 2 one per XDM platform installed in
the rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF
power switches and overcurrent protection for the DC
power source A.
TEST
Pushbutton, pressing it activates the buzzer and turns the

indicators on for test purposes.
POWER ON
Green indicator, lights whenever at least one DC power

source is connected to the xRAP-D.
CRITICAL
Red indicator, lights when the severity of an

unacknowledged alarm in the platforms connected to the
xRAP-D is Critical.
MAJOR
Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an

xRAP-D is Major.
MINOR
Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an

xRAP-D is Minor.
WARNING
White indicator, lights when the severity of an

xRAP-D is Warning.
Buzzer
(concealed under
cover)
Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or

Critical alarm is present in the platforms connected to the
xRAP-D.
SOURCE B
Same as Item 1 for DC source B.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
The xRAP-D connectors are located on the circuit board, as shown in the
following figure. The table lists the connector functions. The index numbers in
the table correspond to those in the figures.
Figure 3-3: xRAP-D connectors

Table 3-12: xRAP-D connector functions
No.
Designation
Function
1, 2
Shelf 1 and Shelf 2

DC input power
Two 5-pin D-type connectors, designated Shelf 1 and

Shelf 2, used to connect DC power to the XDM
platforms.
ALARMS
68-pin SCSI connector, used to connect an alarm

cable to the customer alarm monitoring system. This
alarm cable transmits the received from the XDM
platforms by the SHELF 1 and SHELF 2 connectors,
including external alarm inputs, external alarm
outputs, and XDM severity alarms.
4, 5
SHELF 1 and
SHELF 2
Two 36-pin SCSI connectors, designated SHELF 1

and SHELF 2, used to connect alarm cables to the
XDM platforms installed in the rack. These cables
transmit alarms from the XDM platform to the xRAP
unit.
Alarm signals arrive at a SHELF connector on the xRAP unit from two
different connector sources on the XDM platform using a Y-Cable.
A 9-pin connector on the XDM platform labeled xRAP is used for the four
XDM severity alarms. (CRITICAL, MAJOR, MINOR, and WARNING)
A 50-pin connector on the XDM platform labeled ALARMS is used for

any external alarms defined by client request.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-23

Installation

Maintenance Manual
A Y-Cable is used to link these two connector sources to the single SHELF
connection point on the xRAP, as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-4: Y-cable connection
The xRAP-D supports up to eight input plus eight output external alarms.
These alarms are by default allocated four to each platform. ECI Telecom
offers the option, when working with a single XDM-1000 platform, to define
up to eight external input plus eight external output alarms for that XDM-1000
platform. When working with this configuration, a second XDM platform
cannot be connected to the xRAP-D and a special double-Y alarm
connection cable must be used, as illustrated in the following figure. Contact
ECI Telecom technical support for more information.
Figure 3-5: Double-Y cable connection
3-24
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
xRAP-100
The xRAP-100 is a power distribution and alarm panel for XDM and BG
shelves installed in racks. The xRAP-100 performs the following main
functions:
Power distribution for up to four XDM or BG shelves: The nominal DC

power voltage is -48 VDC or -60 VDC. Since XDM and BG shelves can
use redundant power sources, the xRAP-100 supports connection to two
separate DC power circuits. The internal circuits of the xRAP-100 are
powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The presence of
DC power within the xRAP-100 is indicated by a POWER ON indicator.
Each DC power circuit of each shelf is protected by a circuit breaker, which
also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The
required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied
with the XDM or BG shelves, and therefore their current rating is in
accordance with the order requirements.
The xRAP-100 is designed to support three XDM or BG regular shelves
and one high-power XDM shelf, or four regular XDM or BG shelves. It has
three 3-pin D-type connectors and one 5-pin D-type high-power connector
for feeding the shelves. Each 3-pin connector can supply power to one of
the following regular shelves:
XDM-50
XDM-100
XDM-500
XDM-40
Any BG shelf
The 5-pin high-power connector can supply power to one of the above
regular shelves, or to one of the following high-power shelves:
XDM-300
XDM-900
XDM-1000
XDM-2000
NOTE: When a regular XDM or BG shelf has to be
connected to the 5-pin connector, use a 5-pin D-type male to
3-pin D-type female adapter cable.
The circuit breakers are installed during the xRAP-100 installation. To

prevent accidental changing of a circuit breakers state, the circuit breakers
can be reached only after opening the front cover of the xRAP-100. The
circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through the cover.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-25

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Bay alarm indications: The xRAP-100 includes four alarm indicators, one
simultaneously, the different alarm indications light simultaneously.
NOTE: BG shelves support only two alarm indications:
Major and Minor.
A buzzer is activated whenever a Major or Critical alarm is present in
XDM shelves connected to the xRAP-100. In case of BG shelves connected
to the xRAP-100, the buzzer is activated whenever a Major alarm is present
in the BG shelves.
Connection of alarms from up to four XDM or BG shelves, each shelf

with maximum four alarm inputs and two alarm outputs.
The following figure shows the front panel of the xRAP-100, and the table lists
numbers.
Figure 3-6: xRAP-100 front panel

Table 3-13: xRAP-100 front panel component functions
3-26
No.
Designation
Function
SOURCE A
Four circuit breakers (designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2,

SHELF 3, and SHELF 4 one per XDM-900 shelf
installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as
ON/OFF power switches and overcurrent protection for
the DC power source A.
--
Buzzer
Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or
(Concealed under Critical alarm is present in the shelves connected to the
cover)
xRAP-100.
TEST
Pushbutton, pressing it activates the buzzer and turns the

POWER ON
Green indicator, lights whenever at least one DC power

source is connected to the xRAP-100.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
No.
Designation
Function
CRITICAL
Red indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the

shelves connected to the xRAP-100 is Critical.
MAJOR
Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in

the shelves connected to the xRAP-100 is Major.
MINOR
Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in

the shelves connected to the xRAP-100 is Minor.
WARNING
White indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in

the shelves connected to the xRAP-100 is Warning.
SOURCE B
The xRAP-100 connectors are located on its circuit board, as shown in the
the table correspond to those in the figure.
Figure 3-7: xRAP-100 connectors

Table 3-14: xRAP-100 connectors
No.
Designation
Function
1, 2, 3, 4
Shelf alarms
Four 36-pin SCSI connectors designated SHELF 1,

SHELF 2, SHELF 3, and SHELF 4, for connecting
alarm input and output lines to XDM or BG
shelves and other equipment installed in the rack
ALARM IN/OUT
68-pin SCSI connector, for connecting alarm input

and output lines to the customer alarm monitoring
facility
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-27

Installation

Maintenance Manual
No.
Designation
Function
6, 7, 8
Shelves DC input
power
Three 3-pin D-type connectors designated Shelf 1,

Shelf 2, and Shelf 3 for connecting DC power to
XDM or BG shelves
Shelf DC input,
high power
5-pin D-type connector designated Shelf 4 for

connecting a high-power XDM, or a regular XDM
or BG shelf
RAP-BG
The RAP-BG is a DC power distribution panel for BG platforms installed in
racks. It distributes power for up to four 9300 platforms installed on the same
rack. The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC, -60 VDC, or 24 VDC. Since
9200 series platforms can use redundant power sources, the RAP-BG supports
connection to two separate DC power circuits.
Each DC power circuit of each platform is protected by a circuit breaker, which
also serves as a power ON/OFF switch for the corresponding circuit. The
required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with
the 9300 platforms, and therefore their current rating is in accordance with the
order requirements. The maximum current that can be supplied to a platform
fed from the RAP-BG is 16A.
The circuit breakers are installed during the RAP-BG installation. To prevent
accidental changing of a circuit breaker state, the circuit breakers can be
reached only after opening the front cover of the RAP-BG. The circuit breaker
state (ON or OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.
The following figure shows the front panel of the RAP-BG, and the table lists
the functions of the front panel components as indicated by the figure callouts.
Figure 3-8: RAP-BG front panel
3-28
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Table 3-15: RAP-BG front panel component functions

No.
Designation
Function
SOURCE A
Translucent cover for the four circuit breakers (Shelf 1, Shelf

2, Shelf 3, Shelf 4 - one per BG/XDM platform installed in
the rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF power
switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power source
A.
SOURCE B
RAP-4B
The RAP-4B is a power distribution and alarm panel for ECI Telecom
platforms installed in racks.
NOTE: The RAP-4B supports operation with BG, XDM
(100, 300, 900), and 9600 series platforms.
The RAP-4B performs the following main functions:
Power distribution for up to four protected platforms installed on the

same rack. The nominal DC power voltage is 48 VDC or 60 VDC. Since
the supported platforms can use redundant power sources, the RAP-4B
supports connection to two separate DC power circuits.
Each DC power circuit of each platform is protected by a circuit breaker,
which also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit.
The required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit
supplied with the platforms, and therefore their current rating is in
accordance with the order requirements. The CB rating installed in the
RAP-4B for feeding a single platform is max. 35 A. The total power that
can be provided by the RAP-4B is max. 4 x 1.1 kW (4.4 kW).
NOTE: The maximum power that can be supplied by the
RAP-4B to a single platform is not more than 1.1 kW.
The circuit breakers are installed during the RAP-4B installation. To
prevent accidentally changing a circuit breaker state, the circuit breakers
can be reached only after removing the RAP-4B front cover. The circuit
breaker state (ON/OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-29

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Bay alarm indications: The RAP-4B includes three alarm indicators, one
simultaneously, the different alarm indications light simultaneously.
NOTE: BG platforms support only two alarm indications,
Major and Minor.
A buzzer is activated whenever a Major or Critical alarm is present in an
XDM platform or a Major alarm in a BG or 9600 series platform connected
to the RAP-4B.
Connection of alarms from up to four platforms, with max. four alarm

inputs and two alarm outputs.
The following figure shows the front panel of the RAP-4B, and the table lists
numbers.
Figure 3-9: RAP-4B front panel

Table 3-16: RAP-4B front panel component functions
3-30
No.
Designation
Function
SOURCE A
Four circuit breakers (designated PLATFORM 1,

PLATFORM 2, PLATFORM 3, and PLATFORM 4 one per
platform installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used
as ON/OFF power switches and overcurrent protection for the
DC power source A.
---
Buzzer
(concealed
under cover)
Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or Critical

alarm is present in the platform connected to the RAP-4B.
TEST
Pushbutton. Press to activate the buzzer and turn the

POWER
Green indicator; lights when at least one DC power source is

connected to the RAP-4B.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
No.
Designation
Function
CRITICAL
Red indicator; lights when the severity of at least one of the

alarms in the platform connected to the RAP-4B is Critical.
MAJOR
Orange indicator; lights when the severity of at least one of

the alarms in the platform connected to the RAP-4B is Major.
MINOR
Yellow indicator; lights when the severity of at least one of

the alarms in the platform connected to the RAP-4B is Minor.
SOURCE B
The RAP-4B alarm connectors are located on its circuit board, as shown in the
the table correspond to those in the figure.
Figure 3-10: RAP-4B alarm connectors
Table 3-17: RAP-4B connector functions

No.
Designation
Function
1, 2, 3, 4
Platform alarms
Four 36-pin SCSI connectors designated

PLATFORM 1, PLATFORM 2, PLATFORM 3,
and PLATFORM 4, for connecting alarm
input/output lines from the platforms to the
RAP-4B.
ALARM IN/OUT
68-pin SCSI connector, for connecting alarm

input lines from the customer's equipment to the
platforms, and alarm output lines from the
platforms to the customer alarm monitoring
facility.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-31

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Rack Alarm Panel Power and Alarm

Connection Options
The xRAP product family supports power supply and alarms connection to the
various types of XDM platforms. A mixture of big and small XDM platforms is
possible in accordance with the platforms power consumption and the xRAP
total power. All xRAPs support redundancy through connections to two
separate power sources for each protected platform (i.e., two independent
circuit breakers are provided on the xRAP for each connected platform).
NOTE: The generic name xRAP is used when the text is
applicable for any one of the ECI Telecom xRAP units
(PRAP, xRAP-D, xRAP-B, xRAP-HP, xRAP-100, or
miniRAP).
NOTE: Beginning with V7.2, platform power supply

limitations are enforced by the management software. Upper
bound limits for total platform power usage are defined
through the management configuration variables. The upper
bound limits are enforced through software protection. For
more information, see the EMS-XDM User Manual.
Equipment Installation
The following sections provide general instructions for the installation of the
XDM-900 and auxiliary equipment.
The procedures for equipment replacement and upgrades are similar to those
described for installation of the equipment, and when relevant, notes regarding
live replacement or upgrade are inserted in these procedures.
The information appearing in these sections should be used in conjunction with
specific site installation plans in the particular customer network. If you are
interested in obtaining design or installation assistance from ECI Telecom
Networks Solutions Divisions Customer Support team, or wish to prepare a
network installation plan, contact your ECI Telecom sales representative.
The XDM-900 shelf, cards, modules, and ancillary equipment are described in
the XDM-100 Product Line Reference Manual.
3-32
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Preliminary Preparations
The installation procedures provided in this chapter assume that:
The sites at which the installation procedures are carried out comply with
the requirements listed in Site Preparation (page 3-1).
The preliminary preparations specified in Installing XDM-900: Before You

Start Safety Guidelines (page 1-1) have been completed.
Before you start, determine what equipment is to be installed in the rack by

referring to the site installation plan, and note the exact position of each unit (to
avoid errors, it is recommended to mark the prescribed positions on the rack
rails using a soft pencil).
Equipment Installation Sequence

Each component of the XDM-900 system is supplied separately and must be
installed in the correct sequence, according to the site plan.
The XDM-900 shelf can be mounted in the rack in an horizontal or vertical
position. The main equipment used for both installations is similar, and differs
in the number of accessories, type of brackets used in each position, and one
accessory, used only for horizontal mountings.
NOTE:
If you are not installing an FST for a particular XDM-900

shelf, it is recommended that you leave empty space in the
rack in case optical modules are added to the shelf in the
future.
If you are not installing a TPU for a particular XDM-900
shelf, it is recommended that you leave empty space in the
rack so that the protection unit can be added in the future,
if required, without interrupting operation.
CAUTION:
If additional equipment is used in the rack, a heat buffer or

a buffer plate must be installed between any such
additional equipment and the XDM-900 shelf to minimize
the transfer of heat from shelf to shelf. This heat buffer
must be purchased from ECI Telecom.
During the installation of equipment in the rack, make
sure all the optical connectors are closed by protective
caps. Do not remove the cap until an optical fiber is
connected to the corresponding connector.
Several installation options are illustrated in Installation Options (page 4-1).

417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-33

Installation

Maintenance Manual
XDM-900 Horizontal Shelf and Accessories

Installation Sequence
A high-density installation of a horizontal XDM-900 shelf and corresponding
accessories might include the equipment illustrated in the following figure. The
different components are described alongside a number indicating the step in
which the component is installed, and corresponding to the steps in the table
that follows.
Figure 3-11: Components of XDM-900 horizontal installation
3-34
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Depending on the specific equipment being installed according to the site

installation plan, the installation of an XDM-900 system comprises the general
stages in the order of execution set out in the following table.
Table 3-18: Outline of XDM-900 horizontal installation sequence
Step
Procedure
Section
1.
Install a rack (if required).
Rack Installation (page 3-42)
2.
Unpack and perform a visual inspection.

Visual Inspection (page 3-5)
3.
Install ancillary equipment in the rack,

including:
xRAP-D, xRAP-100, RAP-BG, or
RAP-4B
Cable guides (two)
Cable slack tray
Fiber guides for ETSI A racks (two)
FST (optional)
ODF units (optional)
Optical Patch Panel (OPP)
Note: Installation of the optional xDDF-21
channel patch panel is implemented as part
of the traffic cable routing process.
Installing Ancillary Units in

Racks (page 3-48)
4.
Install the XDM-900 shelf in the rack.

Note: If your site installation plan includes
TPU protection, the XDM-900 is supplied
with the TPU already installed. If you need
to connect a TPU unit to an existing
XDM-900 shelf, see Attaching TPUs/OCU
to the XDM-900 Shelf (page 5-30).
Installing the XDM-900 Shelf in

Racks (page 4-7)
5.
Install the air filter.
Installing the Air Filter
6.
Install the common cards in the XDM-900

shelf, including:
FCU900
ECU900/ ECU900-F
MXC900 with NVM flash card
Installing XDM-900 Cards (page

5-1)
7.
Install the modules in the XDM-900 shelf,

including:
Optical and electrical I/O modules
(SIM, PIM)
EISMB/MCSM/DIOM data modules
Optical I/O cards
ACP900 control modules
SFP transceivers in optical XDM-900
modules
Installing XDM-900 Modules
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-35

Installation
3-36

Maintenance Manual
Step
Procedure
Section
8.
Install cards and modules in the optional

TPU, including:
TC/TCF module
Single-slot TPMs
Double-slot TPMs
Triple-slot TPMs
Installing TPU Modules (page 524)
9.
Install blank covers where I/O modules,

cards, and TPMs are not used.
10.
Route and connect all cables and fibers for Connecting Fibers and Cables in
ETSI A Racks (page 6-1)
ETSI A racks, including:
Power and alarm cables
Optical fibers to optical modules
transceivers
Electrical interface cables to electrical
modules (includes installation of the
optional xDDF-21 channel patch panel)
Electrical traffic through the TPU
Data cables to EISMB/MCSM/DIOM
modules
Timing cables
Management cables
11.
In some cases, it may be necessary to

connect a TPU unit to an existing
XDM-900 shelf.
Attaching TPUs/OCU to the

XDM-900 Shelf (page 5-30)
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
XDM-900 Vertical Shelf and Accessories

Installation Sequence
A high-density installation of a vertical XDM-900 shelf and corresponding
accessories might include the equipment illustrated in the following figure. The
different components are described alongside a number indicating the step in
which the component is installed, and corresponding to the steps in the table
that follows.
Figure 3-12: Components of XDM-900 vertical installation
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-37

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Table 3-19: Outline of XDM-900 vertical installation sequence
3-38
Step
Procedure
Section
1.
Install a rack (if required).
Rack Installation (page 3-42)
2.
Unpack and perform a visual inspection.

Visual Inspection (page 3-5)
3.
Install ancillary equipment in the rack, including: Installing Ancillary Units in

Racks (page 3-48)
xRAP-D, xRAP-100, RAP-BG, or RAP-4B
Cable guide
Fiber guide for ETSI A racks
FST (optional)
ODF units (optional)
OPP (optional)
Note: Installation of the optional xDDF-21
channel patch panel is implemented as part of the
traffic cable routing process.
4.
Prepare the XDM-900 shelf for vertical

installation:
Remove the horizontal installation brackets.
Install vertical installation brackets.
5.
Install the XDM-900 shelf in the rack.

Note: If your site installation plan includes TPU
protection, the XDM-900 is supplied with the
TPU already installed. If you need to connect a
TPU unit to an existing XDM-900 shelf, see
Installing a TPU on the XDM-900 Shelf.
Installing the XDM-900 Shelf

in Racks (page 4-7)
6.
Install the air filter.
Installing the Air Filter
7.
Install the common cards in the XDM-900 shelf,

including:
FCU900
ECU900/ ECU900-F
MXC900 with NVM flash card
Installing XDM-900 Cards

(page 5-1)
8.

Install the modules in the XDM-900 shelf,
(page 5-15)
including:
Optical and electrical I/O modules (SIM,
PIM)
EISMB/MCSM/DIOM data modules
Optical I/O cards (SIM16_4 or SIM64_XFP)
ACP900 control modules
SFP transceivers in optical XDM-900
modules
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Step
Procedure
Section
9.
Install cards and modules in the optional TPU,

including:
TC/TCF module
Single-slot TPMs
Double-slot TPMs
Triple-slot TPMs
Installing TPU Modules
10.
Install blank covers where I/O modules, cards,

and TPMs are not used.
11.
Route and connect all cables and fibers for ETSI Connecting Fibers and Cables
in ETSI A Racks (page 6-1)
A racks, including:
Power and alarm cables
Optical fibers to optical modules transceivers
Electrical interface cables to electrical modules
(includes installation of the optional xDDF-21
channel patch panel)
Electrical traffic through the TPU
Data cables to EISMB/MCSM/DIOM
modules
Timing cables
Management cables
12.
In some cases, it may be necessary to connect a

TPU unit to an existing XDM-900 shelf.
Installing a TPU on the

XDM-900 Shelf
Outline of Installation Procedure

The main steps involved in the installation of an XDM-900 shelf are listed
below. Consult your site installation plans for specific details.
1. Prepare the installation site (see "Site Preparation" page 3-1) and check
physical location, environmental compliance, and availability of power
sources.
2. Prepare power, alarm, and management cables at the installation site (see
"Platform Installation" page 4-1).
3. Prepare transmission cables at the installation site.
4. Route the required power, alarm, management, and transmission cables to
the intended XDM-900 equipment location (see "Platform Installation"
page 4-1).
5. If required, install the equipment racks (see "Rack Installation" page 3-42).
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-39

Installation

Maintenance Manual
6. Mark the location of each XDM-900 shelf and relevant accessories Fiber
Storage Tray (FST), patch panels, and Optical Distribution Frame (ODF)
on each rack, in accordance with the site installation plan.
NOTE: If you are currently installing an XDM-900 shelf
without TPU protection, you may want to leave sufficient
space above/under the shelf to enable the addition of the
TPU/TPUs at a later stage.
7. When applicable, install the EMS-XDM management station (see the
EMS-XDM User Manual).
8. Install the power distribution and alarm panels xRAP-D (page 3-18), or
xRAP-100 (page 3-25), and other equipment needed in each rack.
9. Install the XDM-900 shelves in the appropriate rack.
10. For each XDM-900 shelf where optical modules are used, install an FST
above the XDM-900 shelf and route the optical fibers to the FST (see
"Installing the FST" page 3-87).
NOTE: Even if you are not currently installing an FST, it is
recommended that you leave enough space above the
XDM-900 shelf to enable future installation, in case optical
modules are added to the shelf at a later stage.
11. Install the ECU900/ ECU900-F, FCU900, MXC900, and I/O cards in the
shelf (see "Installing XDM-900 Cards" page 5-1).
12. Install the prescribed I/O modules in the shelf.
13. If applicable, install the TC card and the prescribed TPMs in the TPU.
14. Depending on the modules in your XDM-900 shelf:
Route the optical fibers from the FST to the relevant module
connectors.
Route the E1 electrical cables to the patch panel location.
Route the data cables to the data modules (EISMB/DIOM/MCSM).
Install a patch panel for each XDM-900 shelf where electrical E1

modules are used and 120 /75 conversion is required. You will
need a separate patch panel for each PIM2_21 module in the shelf.
NOTE: The patch panel can be installed on the same rack
above the XDM-900 shelf or on a different rack.
3-40
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Connect coaxial and multipair traffic cables to the electrical I/O

modules if you are not using a TPU, or for modules which are not
protected.
Connect both the electrical I/O modules and the coaxial and multipair
traffic cables to the TPU if you are using a TPU.
Refer to the relevant section for the rack type in use (ETSI A).
15. Connect control cables between ACP900 modules, ECU900, and
management station.
16. Connect management cables between the equipment installed in the rack
and the management station.
17. Connect power and alarm monitoring cables from the RAP panels to each
XDM-900 installed in the rack, as described in Connecting Power Cables
(page 6-3) and Connecting Alarm Cables (page 6-4).
NOTE: In some cases, you may need to add a TPU after the
XDM-900 has already been installed. Instructions for this
procedure are provided in Attaching TPUs/OCU to the
XDM-900 shelf (page 5-30).
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-41

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Rack Installation
Installing Equipment Racks
NOTE: The instructions in this section are relevant to the
installation of all rack types. However, it is recommended that
XDM-900 shelves be installed in ETSI A racks.
Rack Floor Marking

You need to mark out the rack floor plan before installing the rack.
Before you start:
Before starting, find the prescribed location of each equipment rack.
If you have not yet unpacked the rack and the associated mounting kits, do so
now (see Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection (page 3-5)).
To mark out the rack floor plan:
1. For each rack, mark out the floor at the rack location(s) according to the
floor plan template corresponding to the type of rack being installed:
ETSI A racks: Use template of diagram a. of Mounting diagrams for

ETSI racks (page 3-44).
23 in. rack: Use template of diagram a. of Mounting diagrams for 19"

and 23" racks (page 3-45).
19 in. rack: Use template of diagram b. of Mounting diagrams for 19"

and 23" racks (page 3-45).
The marked locations are a helpful guide for positioning the racks.
2. If the installation is located at a site with a floating (suspended) floor, also
mark out all cable entry slots.
3. For concrete or wooden floors, mark out all the points designated for
equipment bolting.
3-42
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Rack Installation on Concrete Floors

This section describes how to install racks on concrete floors.
To mount the rack on a concrete floor:
1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate
template (diagram a. of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks (page 3-44)
diagram a. or b. of Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks (page 3-45)).
2. Insert expansion shields into the holes.
3. Position the rack over the mounting holes.
4. Secure the rack to the floor with the bolts supplied in the mounting kit, in
accordance with diagram b. of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks, or
diagram c. of Mounting diagrams for 19 in. and 23 in. racks.
Rack Installation on Wooden Floors

This section describes how to install racks on wooden floors.
To mount the rack on a wooden floor:
1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate
template (see the following figures), using a 5-mm drill bit.
3. Secure the rack to the floor using the appropriate wood screws (see the
following figures).
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-43

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-13: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks
3-44
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Figure 3-14: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks
Rack Installation on Floating (Suspended)

Floors
This section describes how to install racks on floating (suspended) floors.
To mount the rack on a floating (suspended) floor:
1. Drill the required mounting holes in the suspended floor in accordance with
the appropriate template.
3. Secure the rack to the floor in accordance with diagram c. of Mounting
diagrams for ETSI racks (page 3-44).
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-45

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Suspended Overhead Tray Assembly

This section describes how to install racks on a suspended overhead tray.
To mount the rack on a suspended overhead tray:
1. Refer to the suspended overhead tray diagram (see the following figure)
and position the overhead rack securing brackets.
2. Secure the rack to the overhead cabling trays, using the adjustable brackets.
2200 mm high racks may also be attached to the ceiling; 2600 mm racks
are generally attached only to the ceiling.
Figure 3-15: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead

tray (2200 mm rack)
Installing Extendable Rails

In high-density installations, it may be necessary to install the xRAP above the
rack using the extendable installation rails available from ECI Telecom.
In this case, attach the extendable installation rails to the top of the rack before
installing the equipment.
Rack Grounding
Immediately after installing the rack, connect its grounding stud to the
prescribed grounding point on the site grounding bar. Use a grounding lead that
meets the Rack grounding requirements listed in section Before You Start.
3-46
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
19 in. Rack Installation

The XDM-900 can also be installed in European 19 in. racks. This is accepted
under the limitations that the rack's general dimensions are according to the
following figure. Any other European 19 in. rack must first be examined and
approved by ECI Telecoms Network Solutions Division Mechanical
Department.
Figure 3-16: Example of an approved European 19" rack
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-47

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Installing Ancillary Units in

Racks
ECI Telecom offers various accessories for efficient installation of equipment
in racks. Contact ECI Telecoms Customer Support team or your ECI Telecom
sales representative if you need custom modifications to standard items or
additional items.
This section includes instructions for the installation of ancillary units. The
specific units you will need to install depend on your site installation plan, and
may include one or more of the following:
RAP power distribution frame, usually located at the top of the rack:
xRAP-D Installing the xRAP-D (page 3-49), for connection of up to

two XDM-900 shelves on the same rack
xRAP-100 Installing the xRAP-100 (page 3-63), for connection of up

to one XDM-900 shelf, and three XDM smaller shelves (like XDM-100
and XDM-50) on the same rack
RAP-BG Installing the RAP-BG (page 3-70), for connection of one

XDM-900 shelf on the same rack
RAP-4B Installing the RAP-4B (page 3-76), for connection of one

XDM-900 shelf on the same rack
Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI A Racks (page 3-85)
FST located above the XDM-900 shelf accessories, recommended for

installations with a large number of optical modules Installing the FST
(page 3-87)
ODF units Installing the ODF (page 3-89)
OPP Installing the OPP (page 3-92)
In addition, you may need to install an xDDF-21 patch panel where PIM2_21,
PIM2_63/B or PIM2_63S are used, and where conversion between balanced
120 and unbalanced 75 interfaces is required. The xDDF-21 patch panel
can be installed in the same rack above the XDM-900 shelf, or in a different
rack with a longer SCSI cable running from the PIM2_21 or PIM2_63/B (or
VHDCI cable for a PIM2_63S) in the XDM-900 shelf to the patch panel.
Installation of the xDDF-21 patch panel is implemented as part of the traffic
cable connection procedure described in Routing and Connecting Electrical
Interface Cables to Electrical Modules (page 6-6).
In general, ancillary units are attached to the rack side rails by four M6 Philips
screws. No preparation is required before installation. The following sections
provide mechanical installation instructions for units that require additional
procedures. Skip sections that are not relevant to your particular application.
3-48
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
CAUTION: If additional equipment other than XDM-900

shelves is used in the rack, a heat buffer must be installed
between any such additional equipment and the XDM-900
shelf to minimize the transfer of heat from shelf to shelf.
Consult your ECI Telecom representative regarding the exact
heat buffer required.
Installing the xRAP-D

NOTE: Skip this section if the xRAP-D is not used.
Before connecting DC power cables, refer to DC Power Cables (page 3-10).

The installation of an xRAP-D unit includes the following steps:
1. Prepare DC power cables.
2. Install the xRAP-D in the prescribed location, either at the top of the rack
or on the extendable installation rails.
3. Ground the xRAP-D to the rack grounding stud.
4. Connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-D. Depending on the site
power requirements, one of the following cable connections options should
be chosen:
a. In most configurations, either one or two standard (25mm2) input power
cables are connected to each side of the xRAP-D unit. This option is
described in Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D (page
3-53).
b. Alternatively, a single power input cable may be connected to the
xRAP-D using a bridge component. This option is described in
Connecting DC Input Power Cable to the xRAP-D with a Bridge
Component.
5. Attach protective covers to the sides and bottom of the xRAP-D unit.
(From V7.15 only, required for NEBS; optional for all others.)
6. Connect the DC power cables of the XDM-900 shelves to the xRAP-D.
7. Install circuit breakers.
8. Check DC voltage polarity.
9. Connect the alarm cables.
For a description of the xRAP-D, refer to the XDM-100 or XDM-1000 Product
Line Reference Manual.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-49

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Preparing DC Input Power Cables

The DC input power cables connect between the two DC power sources and
the xRAP-D source A and source B inputs. When working with the xRAP-D,
four sets of cables are typically required, two for each source.
NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for
connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) should be
connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with
a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and
HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V)
should be connected with a blue cable, and the negative lead
(-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that
describe DC power cable connections, use cables with
appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area
of residence.
Before you start:

In the xRAP-D, two 25 mm2 power cables are typically used for each power
source. When working in the recommended redundant mode with all power
cables connected, the xRAP-D works with a full set of input power cables and
backup power cables. This option, illustrated in the following figure, is
described in Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D (page 3-53).
3-50
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Another power configuration option supported by the xRAP-D enables use of a

single power input cable to support either one or two XDM platforms. The
single power cable is connected to the xRAP-D using a bridge component. Two
variations of this option are illustrated in the following figure. This option is
described in Connecting DC Input Power Cable to the xRAP-D with a Bridge
Component.
Figure 3-18: xRAP-D power supply with bridge, two variations
NOTE: When necessary, the xRAP-D is able to work with

only a single 25 mm2 power cable from each power source.
This supplies enough power to support a single XDM
platform with 2250 W, or two XDM platforms where each
platform is limited to a maximum of 1100 W for per platform.
In many cases, this configuration is sufficient.
However, it is recommended, if at all possible, to connect all
input power cables from all power sources to the xRAP-D
unit upon the initial system installation. Connecting all cables
from the beginning is an easy step that greatly simplifies any
later system upgrades, since the power cables are already in
place and ready to supply power to a second XDM platform,
if the network configuration is ever changed.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-51

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Each input power cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross
section of 25 (or 50) mm2, one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated
with a two-hole compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with
the equipment.
If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location,
make sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage source before
attaching the lugs.
To prepare a DC power cable:
1. Strip about 22 mm of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all the lead strands into the lug sleeve.
3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate
crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720
crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die,
or equivalent.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the black lead.
5. Repeat these steps for each DC power cable being used.
To install the xRAP-D:
Attach the xRAP-D to the rack side rails in the top position, and secure it
with the four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the xRAP-D:

1. The xRAP-D grounding stud is located on its bottom cover. Use the
following figure of the xRAP-D to identify the grounding stud.
2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements
described in Grounding Requirements (page 1-8).
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the xRAP-D grounding
stud using a spring washer and nut.
4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack
grounding stud.
Figure 3-19: Location of xRAP-D grounding stud
3-52
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the

xRAP-D
In the xRAP-D, two 25 mm2 power cables are typically used for each power
source. When working in the recommended redundant mode with all power
cables connected, the xRAP-D works with four sets of input power cables. This
typical configuration option is described in this section.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-53

Installation

Maintenance Manual
NOTE: When necessary, the xRAP-D is able to work with

only a single 25 mm2 power cable from each power source.
This supplies enough power to support a single XDM
platform with 2250 W, or two XDM platforms where each
platform is limited to a maximum of 1100 W for per platform.
In many cases, this configuration is sufficient. The
instructions in this section apply to this configuration option
also. (This configuration option is only available from V7.2,
when the management software enforces limitations on
maximum power consumption.)
However, it is recommended, if at all possible, to connect all
input power cables from the power sources to the xRAP-D
unit upon the initial system installation. Connecting all cables
from the beginning is an easy step that greatly simplifies any
later system upgrades, since the power cables are already in
place and ready to supply power to a second XDM platform,
if the network configuration is ever changed.
Alternatively, a single power input cable supporting two
XDM platforms may be connected to the xRAP-D using a
bridge component. This option is described in Connecting DC
Input Power Cable to the xRAP-D with a Bridge Component.
To connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-D:

1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the
xRAP-D by referring to the following figure.
Figure 3-21: Identification of xRAP-D cable routes
3-54
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-D front cover and remove
the cover.
Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board in
accordance with the following figure. This figure shows the terminals at the
source A side (main); the same board is used at the source B side
(protection).
Note that there are two complete sets of power terminals and circuit
breakers on each side. Separate input power cables from the user's input
power supply feed through the two sets of input power terminals into the
two circuit breakers on the source A side, supplying independent power
sources for up to two XDM shelves. Each circuit breaker feeds into a
separate power output connection for the power cable that connects to the
XDM platform.
Similarly, separate input power cables from the user's input power supply
feed through separate input terminals into the two circuit breakers on the
source B side, and from the circuit breakers feed into the additional power
output connections that provide an optional protective backup power
supply for up to two XDM shelves.
Figure 3-22: Connecting DC power cables
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-55

Installation

Maintenance Manual
The preceding figure portrays the electrical connections on the left side of
the xRAP-D, the side that connects to the user's main power supply for the
XDM shelves being powered. The right side of the xRAP-D contains a
mirror image of the connections illustrated in the preceding figure. The
right side connects to the user's (optional) backup protective power supply
for the shelves.
CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to
identify the terminal polarity on the xRAP-D power terminal
board.
3. Bring the two leads of one DC source input power cable to the appropriate
xRAP-D opening.
4. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminals, marked (+) on
the power terminal board. Note that the xRAP-D works with two sets of
positive terminals, used with two 25 mm2 power cables.
5. Secure the lug using a flat washer, a spring washer, and a nut. Tighten the
nut with a torque of 450 N cm to 550 N cm.
6. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on
the power terminal board. Note that the xRAP-D works with two sets of
negative terminals, used with two 25 mm2 power cables.
7. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug.
8. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for
source B.
9. Route the DC input power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of
the xRAP-D (see To ground the xRAP-D (page 3-52)), and attach them to
the retainers with cable ties.
3-56
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Attaching Protective Covers

From V7.15 only, as required for NEBS. Optional for all others.
To attach protective covers on the xRAP-D:
1. From the open back end, look at the inside panel of the xRAP-D unit. Find
the four screws in the left and right sides of the power panel. The two
screws on the left side are highlighted in the following figure.
Figure 3-23: Side screws highlighted on left side of xRAP-D unit
2. Find the replacement spacer screws included in the protective cover kit.
Note that four replacement spacer screws are included with the xRAP-D. A
replacement spacer screw is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-24: Replacement spacer screw
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-57

Installation

Maintenance Manual
3. Replace the side screws with the replacement spacer screws. The following
figure illustrates the inside of the xRAP-D unit, highlighting the left side
replacement spacer screws in place.
Figure 3-25: Replacement spacer screws in place in xRAP-D unit
4. Find the small L-shaped protective covers included in the kit. Four
protective covers are included for the xRAP-D. The protective covers are
illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-26: Protection cover for xRAP-D
3-58
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
5. Place the protective covers into the xRAP-D, two covers on each side. For
each protective cover, the smaller hole fits onto the top of the spacer screw
on one side and the two larger holes are anchored on top of the two
terminals above the spacer screw. The jutting-out edge of the protective
cover fits into the opening on the edge of the xRAP next to the terminals.
The following figure illustrates protective covers inserted into the xRAP-D
unit.
Figure 3-27: xRAP-D protective covers in place
6. Secure the protective covers in place by screwing on the wing nuts supplied
in the kit onto the tops of the spacer screws on each side.
7. Find the protective bottom panel in the kit. The bottom panel for the
xRAP-D is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-28: Bottom panel for xRAP-D
8. Secure the bottom panel into place with the four screws supplied in the kit.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-59

Installation

Maintenance Manual
To connect the DC power cable for an XDM-900 platform:

1. Before starting, identify the platform power connectors on the xRAP-D
board in accordance with the following figure.
Figure 3-29: xRAP-D connectors
2. Insert the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 5-pin D-type male
connector near the SOURCE A power connectors and connect it to
connector Shelf 1 (see preceding figure).
3. Fasten the screws of the D-type connector.
4. If you are connecting an additional platform to the xRAP-D, repeat the
above steps for the second platform. Note that a maximum of 55A is
supplied from the power sources to each XDM platform. Power is supplied
independently to each XDM platform connected to the xRAP unit. Power is
not shared between XDM platforms.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat the above steps to connect the
shelves to source B.
6. Route the DC power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the
xRAP-D and attach them to the retainers with cable ties (see To ground the
xRAP-D (page 3-52)).
7. Route each platform power cable along the rack side rails down to the
corresponding platform position, and securely attach the power cable to the
rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in
accordance with its function.
NOTE: Connect the cables to the shelves only after
completing the installation of the shelves and all other
components.
3-60
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
To install the xRAP-D circuit breakers:

1. If the xRAP-D front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening the xRAP-D front cover to its chassis and remove the
cover (see the following figure).
Figure 3-30: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1

(the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
equipment); its rating is in accordance with the ordered platform
configuration.
3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the
xRAP-D source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.
4. If an additional platform is powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to
insert the other circuit breaker into the corresponding platform position of
the power terminal board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2, 3, and 4 for source B
circuit breakers.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-61

Installation

Maintenance Manual
To check the DC voltage polarity:

1. Connect the DC input power to the xRAP-D.
2. Set all xRAP-D circuit breakers to ON.
3. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive
and negative pins of each power cable.
CAUTION: Pay attention not to short-circuit the multimeter
leads when checking the voltage.
NOTE: The power cable terminates with a 3-pin (3W3), or a

5-pin (5W5) connector in accordance with the connected
XDM shelf. For a 3W3 connector the positive pin is A3 and
the negative pin A2; for a 5W5 connector the positive pins are
A4, A5, and the negative pins A2, A3.
4. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -72 VDC)
and that it has the correct polarity.
5. Return all xRAP-D circuit breakers to OFF.
6. Disconnect the xRAP-D input power sources.
7. Reinstall the xRAP-D front cover and fasten it using the two captive
screws.
During the following procedure, refer to the figures illustrating the connectors
in Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D (page 3-53).
To connect the alarm cables to the xRAP-D:
1. Before starting, make sure you have all the necessary cables.
2. Connect the 68-pin SCSI connector of the facility alarm monitoring cable
to the ALARMS connector, and then securely attach the cable to the rack
inner wall using cable ties.
3. Connect the 36-pin SCSI connector of the alarm monitoring cable intended
for Shelf 1 to the Shelf 1 connector on the xRAP-D.
4. Route the alarm cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the
xRAP-D (see the figure in To ground the xRAP-D (page 3-52)), and attach
them to the bracket with cable ties.
5. Route the alarm cables along the side of the rack down to the corresponding
platform position. Attach a tag to each connector in accordance with its
function.
6. If an additional platform is installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2, 3, 4, and 5
for the cables serving the additional platform. Make sure to attach
identification tags to each cable end.
3-62
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Installing the xRAP-100

Before connecting DC power cables, refer to DC Power Cables (page 3-10).
The installation of an xRAP-100 unit includes the following steps:
2. Install the xRAP-100 in the prescribed location, either at the top of the rack
or on the extendable installation rails.
3. Ground the xRAP-100 to the rack grounding stud.
4. Connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-100.
5. Connect the DC power cables of the XDM-900 shelves to the xRAP-100.
7. Check DC voltage polarity.
8. Connect the alarm cables.
For a description of the xRAP-100, refer to the XDM-100 Product Line
Reference Manual.
The DC input power cables connect between the two DC power sources and
the xRAP-100 source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for
each source.
connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) should be
HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V)
should be connected with a blue cable and the negative lead
(-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that
describe DC power cable connections, use cables with
appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area
of residence.
Before you start:

Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of 35
mm2, one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a two-hole
compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.
If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location,
make sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage source before
attaching the lugs.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-63

Installation

Maintenance Manual

1. Strip about 22 mm of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all the lead strands into the lug sleeve.
or equivalent.
To install the xRAP-100:
Attach the xRAP-100 to the rack side rails in the top position, and secure it
with the four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the xRAP-100:

1. The xRAP-100 grounding stud is located on its bottom cover. Use the
following figure to identify it.
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the xRAP-100
grounding stud using a spring washer and nut.
grounding stud.
Figure 3-31: Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud
3-64
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
To connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-100:

xRAP-100 by referring to the following figure.
Figure 3-32: Identification of xRAP-100 cable routes
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover and
remove the cover.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-65

Installation

Maintenance Manual
3. Identify the various terminals located on the xRAP-100 board in

accordance with the following figure. This figure shows the terminals at the
source A side; the same terminals are used at the source B side.
Figure 3-33: Connecting DC power cables to the xRAP-100

identify the terminal polarity on the xRAP-100 board.
4. Bring the two leads of one DC source input power cable to the appropriate
xRAP-100 opening.
5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on
6. Secure the lug using a flat washer, a spring washer, and a nut. Tighten the
nut with a torque of 450 N cm to 550 N cm.
source B.
10. Route the DC input power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of
the xRAP-100 (see Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud (page 3-64)),
and attach them to the retainers with cable ties.
3-66
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
To connect the DC power cable for an XDM-900 shelf:

1. Before starting, identify the shelf power connectors on the xRAP-100 board
in accordance with the following figure.
Figure 3-34: Identification of xRAP-100 connectors
2. Insert the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 3-pin D-type male
connector near the SOURCE A power connectors and connect it to
connector Shelf 1 (see the above figure).
NOTE: The cables leading to connectors Shelf 1, Shelf 2, and
Shelf 3 can only be connected with a 3-pin D-type connector
(for regular shelves :XDM-50, XDM-100, XDM-500, or
XDM-40). If a regular shelf has to be connected to the 5-pin,
D-type connector, use an adapter cable with a 5-pin D-type
connector on the xRAP-100 side and a 3-pin D-type
connector on the shelf side.
NOTE: If a high power shelf (XDM-300, XDM-1000, or

XDM-2000) has to be connected to the xRAP-100 it can be
connected only to the 5-pin D-type connector (Shelf 4), using
a 5-pin D-type to 5-pin D-type adapter cable.
3. Fasten the screws of the D-type connector.

4. If you are connecting additional shelves to the xRAP-100, repeat the above
steps for each shelf.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat the above steps to connect the
shelves to source B.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-67

Installation

Maintenance Manual
6. Route the DC power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the
xRAP-100, and attach them to the retainers with cable ties (see Location of
xRAP-100 grounding stud (page 3-64)).
7. Route each shelf power cable along the rack side rails down to the
corresponding shelf position, and then securely attach the power cable to
the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in
NOTE: Connect the cables to the shelves only after
completing the installation of the shelves and all other
components.
Installing the xRAP-100 circuit breakers

To install the xRAP-100 circuit breakers:
1. If the xRAP-100 front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover to its chassis and remove the
cover (see the following figure).
Figure 3-35: Installation of xRAP-100 circuit breakers
3-68
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1

equipment); its rating is in accordance with the ordered shelf configuration.
The recommended circuit breakers according to the XDM-900 shelf
configuration are listed in the following table.
xRAP-100 board corresponding to source A, as shown in the previous
figure.
4. If more than one shelf is powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to
insert the other circuit breaker into the corresponding sockets on the board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2, 3, and 4 for source B
circuit breakers.
To check the DC voltage polarity:
1. Connect the DC input power to the xRAP-100.
2. Set all xRAP-100 circuit breakers to ON.
(pin A3) and negative (pin A2) pins of each power cable.
4. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -72 VDC),
5. Return all xRAP-100 circuit breakers to OFF.
6. Disconnect the xRAP-100 input power sources.
7. Reinstall the xRAP-100 front cover and fasten it using the two captive
screws.
To connect the alarm cables to the xRAP-100:
Use Identification of xRAP-100 connectors (page 3-67) to identify the
xRAP-100 connector functions.
1. Before starting, make sure you have all the necessary cables.
2. Connect the 68-pin SCSI connector of the facility alarm monitoring cable
to the ALARMS connector, and then securely attach the cable to the rack
inner wall using cable ties.
3. Connect the 36-pin SCSI connector of the alarm monitoring cable intended
for shelf 1 to the Shelf 1 connector on the xRAP-100.
4. Route the alarm cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the
xRAP-100 (see Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud (page 3-64)), and
attach them to the retainers with cable ties.
5. Route the alarm cables along the side of the rack down to the corresponding
shelf position. Attach a tag to each connector in accordance with its
function.
6. If an additional shelf is installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2, 3, 4, and 5 for
the cables serving the additional shelf. Make sure to attach identification
tags to each cable end.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-69

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Installing the RAP-BG

Before You Start:
Before connecting DC power cables, see DC Power Cables.
For a description of the RAP-BG, see the XDM Product Line Reference
Manual.
To install the RAP-BG:
2. Install the RAP-BG in the prescribed location.
3. Ground the RAP-BG to the rack grounding stud.
4. Connect input DC power cables to the RAP-BG.
5. Connect the DC power cables of the XDM platforms to the RAP-BG.
7. Check power wiring.

connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) must be
connected with a red cable and the negative lead (-48 V) with
HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead must be
connected with a blue cable and the negative lead with a gray
cable. In the following sections that describe DC power cable
connections, use cables of appropriate colors to comply with
the standards in your area of residence.
The DC input power cables connect the two DC power sources and the
RAP-BG source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each
source. Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of
50 mm2 (.078 in.2), one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a
NOTE: When the RAP-BG provides power to a single XDM
platform, lower gauge cables can be used. See DC Power
Cables for DC power cable requirements.
CAUTION: If appropriate leads have already been prepared

at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are
not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the
lugs.
3-70
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation

1. Strip about 22 mm (1 in.) of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all lead strands into the lug sleeve.
or equivalent.
It is recommended to use insulation tape (of the same color as the lead
jacket) between the cable lug and the cable itself.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 above for the black lead.
Installing the RAP-BG

The RAP-BG is attached to the rack side rails at the top position of the rack.
To install the RAP-BG:
Attach the RAP-BG to the side rails and secure it with the four screws,
washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the RAP-BG:

1. The RAP-BG grounding stud is located on its rear cover, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3-36: Location of RAP-BG grounding stud

described in Grounding Requirements.
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-BG grounding
stud, using a spring washer and nut.
grounding stud.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-71

Installation

Maintenance Manual
To connect DC input power cables to the RAP-BG:

RAP-BG by referring to the following figure.
Figure 3-37: Identification of RAP-BG cable routes
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-BG front cover and remove
the cover.
3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board
by referring to the following figure (showing the terminals at source A side;
a similar board is used at source B side).
Figure 3-38: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG

identify the terminal polarity on the RAP-BG power terminal
board.
3-72
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
4. Bring the two leads of DC source A input power cable to the appropriate
RAP-BG opening.
the power terminal board (see the previous figure).
6. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and nut. Tighten the nut
with a torque of 1450 N cm to 1600 N cm.
source B.
10. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using
cable ties.
During the following procedure, refer to the figures in Connecting DC power
cables to the RAP-BG (page 3-72).
To connect the DC power cables to a platform:
RAP-BG.
2. Insert the DC power cable end, terminated with lugs, of the XDM-900
platform through the opening for platform power cables connecting to
source A. If more platforms are installed in the rack, start by connecting the
Platform 1 cable.
3. Attach the red lead lug of the platform power cable to the positive stud
terminal of Platform 1 on the power terminal board.
5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of
Platform 1 on the power terminal board.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-73

Installation

Maintenance Manual

7. Identify the platform's grounding terminals located on the inner side panel
of the RAP-BG as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-39: RAP-BG platform power cable grounding screws
8. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the platform power cable to the
ground stud terminal located on the RAP-BG side panel.
9. Repeat Step 4 for the grounding lead lug.
10. If additional XDM-900 platforms are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to
9 for each platform power cable.
11. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 10 to connect the
platforms to source B.
12. Route each platform power cable along the rack side rails down to the
corresponding platform position, and then securely attach the power cable
to the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector
in accordance with its function.
3-74
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
To install the RAP-BG circuit breakers:

1. If the RAP-BG front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening it to the RAP-BG chassis and remove the cover.
Figure 3-40: RAP-BG front cover removal
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of Shelf 1

equipment; its rating is in accordance with the ordered platform
configuration).
Figure 3-41: RAP-BG circuit breaker installation
RAP-BG source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.
4. If more platforms are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert
the circuit breakers into the corresponding platform positions of the power
terminal board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 4 for source B
circuit breakers.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-75

Installation

Maintenance Manual
To check DC voltage polarity:

1. Make sure the correct site grounding test has been passed successfully (see
Grounding Requirements).
2. Connect the DC input power to the RAP-BG.
3. Set all the RAP-BG circuit breakers to ON.
and negative contacts of each power cable.
The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector
contacts assembled on the cable end connected to the XDM-900 platform,
as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure 3-42: Platform DC input power connector pin functions
6. Return all the RAP-BG circuit breakers to OFF.
7. Disconnect the RAP-BG input power sources.
8. Reinstall the RAP-BG front cover and fasten it using the two captive
screws.
Installing the RAP-4B

Before You Start:
Before connecting DC power cables, see DC Power Cables.
For a description of the RAP-4B, see 9200 series Reference Manual.
To install the RAP-4B:
2. Install the RAP-4B in the prescribed location.
3. Ground the RAP-4B to the rack grounding stud.
4. Connect input DC power cables to the RAP-4B.
5. Connect the DC power cables of the XDM platforms to the RAP-4B.
7. Check power wiring.
3-76
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation

connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) must be
HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead must be
connected with a blue cable and the negative lead with a gray
cable. In the following sections use cables of the colors to
comply with the standards in your area of residence.
The DC input power cables connect the two DC power sources and the
RAP-4B source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each
source. Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of
50 mm2 (0.078 in.2), one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a
NOTE: When the RAP-4B provides power to a single
BroadGate platform, lower gauge cables may be used. See
DC Power Cables for DC power cable requirements.
CAUTION: If appropriate leads have already been prepared

at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are
not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the
lugs.

1. Strip about 22 mm (1 in.) of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all lead strands into the lug sleeve.
or equivalent.
It is recommended to use insulation tape (of the same color as the lead
jacket) between the cable lug and the cable itself.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-77

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Installing the RAP-4B

The RAP-4B is attached to the rack side rails at the top of the rack.
To install the RAP-4B:
Attach the RAP-4B to the side rails and secure it with the four screws,
washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the RAP-4B:

NOTE: The RAP-4B is supplied, by default, with a grounding
cable connected to the rear of the unit. Use this cable to
connect ground to the RAP-4B.
1. The RAP-4B grounding studs are located on its rear cover as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3-43: Locating RAP-4B grounding stud
If a grounding cable is already attached to the RAP-4B, skip Steps 2 and 3.

2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead (with a two-hole lug) as details
3-78
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-4B grounding
studs, using spring washers and nuts.
Figure 3-44: RAP-4B with grounding cable
4. Connect the two-hole lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the
rack's grounding bar.
To connect DC input power cables to the RAP-4B:
RAP-4B, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-45: Identifying RAP-4B cable routes
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-4B front cover and remove
it.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-79

Installation

Maintenance Manual
3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board,
as shown in the following figure (showing source A side; a similar board is
used at source B side).
Figure 3-46: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B

identify the terminal polarity on the RAP-4B power terminal
board.
4. Bring the two leads of one DC source A input power cable to the
appropriate RAP-4B opening.
source B.
10. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using
cable ties.
During the following procedure, refer to the figure Connecting DC power
cables to the RAP-4B (page 3-80).
3-80
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
To connect the DC power cable to a platform:

RAP-4B.
2. Insert the DC power cable end terminated in lugs of the XDM-900 platform
through the opening for power cables connecting to source A. If more
platforms are installed in the rack, start by connecting the Platform 1 cable.
3. Attach the red lead lug of the platform power cable to the positive stud
terminal of Platform 1 on the power terminal board.
4. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and M6 screw. Tighten
the M6 screw with a torque of 320 N cm to 350 N cm.
5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of
Platform 1 on the power terminal board.
7. Identify the platforms grounding terminals located on the inner side panel
of the RAP-4B according to the following figure.
Figure 3-47: RAP-4B platform power cable grounding screws
8. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the platform power cable to the
ground stud terminal located on the RAP-4B side panel.
9. Repeat Step 4 for the grounding lead lug.
10. If more XDM-900 platforms are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to 9 for
each platform power cable.
11. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 10 to connect the
platforms to source B.
12. Route each platform power cable along the rack side rails down to its
corresponding platform, and then securely attach the power cable to the
rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-81

Installation

Maintenance Manual
To install the RAP-4B circuit breakers:

1. If the RAP-4B front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening it to the chassis and remove the cover.
Figure 3-48: RAP-4B front cover removal
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to power circuit A of Platform 1

equipment platform; its rating is in accordance with the ordered platform
configuration).
Figure 3-49: RAP-4B circuit breaker installation
RAP-4B source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.
4. If more platforms are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert
the circuit breakers into the corresponding platform positions of the power
terminal board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 4 above for source
B circuit breakers.
3-82
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Checking DC Voltage Polarity

To check DC voltage polarity:
1. Make sure the correct site grounding test has been passed successfully (see
Grounding Requirements (page 1-8)).
2. Connect the DC input power to the RAP-4B.
3. Set all the RAP-4B circuit breakers to ON.
4. Use a DMM to test the voltage between the positive and negative contacts
of each power cable.
The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector
contacts assembled on the cable end connected to the XDM-900 platform,
as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure 3-50: Platform DC input power connector pin functions
6. Return all the RAP-4B circuit breakers to OFF.
7. Disconnect the RAP-4B input power sources.
8. Reinstall the RAP-4B front cover and fasten it with the two captive screws.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-83

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Cable Guide

The number of cable guides required for horizontal XDM-900 shelf
installations depends on whether electrical traffic modules are used in the upper
module cage. One cable guide should be installed one hole under the
XDM-900, to help neatly route control, timing, and management cables
connected to the ECU900/ ECU900-F card and traffic cables connected to
electrical traffic modules in the lower module cage. If electrical traffic modules
are installed in the upper module cage, an additional cable guide should be
installed one installation hole above the shelf.
One cable guide should be installed above the XDM-900 shelf in vertical
installations.
The cable guide is supplied with two sets of rack mount brackets: one for 19
racks and the other for ETSI racks.
To attach the rack mount brackets to the cable guide:
Attach each bracket to the corresponding cable guide sidewall with the four
screws supplied in the installation kit.
Figure 3-51: Cable guide
To install the cable guide in the rack:
3-84
Install the cable guide in the prescribed location in the rack, and fasten it to
the side rails of the rack with four screws.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI A Racks

The fiber guide for ETSI A racks should be installed one mounting hole above
the cable guide in the rack.
To attach the rack mount brackets to the fiber guide:
Attach each bracket to the corresponding fiber guide sidewall with the four
screws supplied in the installation kit.
Figure 3-52: Fiber guide
To install the fiber guide in the rack:
Install the cable guide in the rack one mounting hole above the cable guide
and fasten it to the rack side rails with four screws.
Installing the Cable Slack Tray

The cable slack tray is installed only in horizontal XDM-900 shelf installations
that also have a lower cable guide installed; these usually also include a fiber
guide.
Figure 3-53: Cable slack tray
To install the cable slack tray in the rack:
Install the cable slack tray in the rack one mounting hole under the cable
guide and fasten it to the rack side rails with two M6 screws, washers, and
nuts.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-85

Installation

Maintenance Manual
Installing the PIM2_63S Traffic Cable Box

Tray
The PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray is available in two options for installation
above or below the XDM-900 shelf. In installations in which the PIM2_63S are
installed in both the upper and lower I/O module cage the two types must be
installed. The tray is supplied by default with reversible brackets for
installation in ETSI or 19" racks. If installation in 23" racks is required make
sure to order the appropriate bracket kit.
Figure 3-54: PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray for above shelf installations
Figure 3-55: PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray for under shelf installations
3-86
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
To install the PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray:
Install the PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray in the rack one mounting hole
above/under the XDM-900 shelf (according to the location of the
PIM2-63S) and fasten it to the rack side rails with four M6 screws,
washers, and nuts.
Installing the FST

The FST must be installed 50 mm above the fiber guide. If additional
equipment is installed above the FST (like another XDM-900 platform), an
additional 50 mm must be left free between the FST and such equipment.
To install the FST in the rack:
1. Attach the FST to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied
screws, washers, and nuts.
2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the
detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each platform. When preparing the
fibers, refer to the safety information in Installing XDM-900: Before You
Start Safety Guidelines (page 1-1).
3. Label the cables in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.
4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports
of the ETSI A rack.
5. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to release the latch, and pull
the FST towards you to open it.
NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. Pull it again to open fully
so you can thread the fibers.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-87

Installation

Maintenance Manual
6. Thread the fibers into the FST, as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-56: Threading optical fibers in the FST
NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside

the FST and fastened with Velcro strips.
7. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.

8. Return the FST to the rack until it latches in place with a click.
CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are
closed at all times with the appropriate protective caps or with
the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective cap
until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding
connector, and immediately install a protective cap after a
cable is disconnected.
The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 35 mm.
Sharp bending of fibers may degrade the optical transmission
characteristics.
3-88
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
Installing the ODF

Identify the prescribed ODF locations in the rack before performing the
following procedures.
The ODF is supplied with two sets of rack mount brackets: one for 19 in. and
ETSI racks, and the other for 23 in. 7 ft. racks. The 19 in./ETSI rack mount
brackets can be used for both ETSI and 19 in. racks.
To attach the rack mount brackets to the ODF:
1. Refer to the following figure to identify the required set of rack mount
brackets.
2. Attach each bracket with three screws to the corresponding ODF side
panel, as shown in the figure.
Figure 3-57: Attaching rack mount brackets to the ODF
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-89

Installation

Maintenance Manual
To connect optical fibers to the ODF:

1. Push the release button on the ODF front panel to the left to release the
latch and pull it towards you. The cover opens downwards.
Figure 3-58: ODF front panel
Figure 3-59: ODF open view
2. Hold the end of the swing-out tray and pull it out to gain access to the ODF
components.
3. Open the two cover thumb nuts and remove the protective cover from the
ODF splice support.
3-90
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation
4. Insert the external fibers cable through the protective tube.
Figure 3-60: ODF fiber routes
5. Route the fiber ends through the cable guides to the splice support area.
6. Identify the adapter panel pigtail to be spliced to each user fiber.
7. Insert splicing sleeves over the pigtail, splice the user fiber to the pigtail,
and slide the splicing sleeve over the splice.
8. Place the splicing sleeve in one of the slots in the splice support.
NOTE: When more than 12 fibers are connected to the ODF,
first start filling the slots of the lower splice support. After the
slots are occupied, reinstall the top splice support and
continue filling the support slots.
9. After splicing all the fibers, reinstall the protective cover removed in Step
3.
10. Push the swing-out tray back into the unit.
11. Close the ODF front cover by pushing it up till it clicks to the unit.
12. Refer to Attaching rack mount brackets (page 3-89) and secure the user
fibers with cable ties to the fiber-fastening bracket at the rear of the ODF.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to fibers, do not tighten the
cable ties.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-91

Installation

Maintenance Manual
To install ODF units in a rack:
Install each ODF in the prescribed rack position and fasten it to the rack
side rails with four screws.
Installing the OPP

The OPP can be installed in the same rack as the XDM-900 or in other racks
according to the site installation requirements.
To mount the OPP in the rack:
1. Attach the OPP to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied
screws, washers, and nuts.
2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the
detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each platform. When preparing the
fiber, follow the safety information appearing in Work and Equipment
Safety.
3. Label the fibers in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.
4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports
of the ETSI A rack or the rack sidewalls of the ETSI B rack.
5. Push the button on the front panel of the OPP to release the latch, and pull
the OPP towards you to open it.
NOTE: The OPP has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. Pull it again to open it
fully so that you can thread the fibers.
6. Thread the fibers into the OPP, as illustrated in Threading and connecting
optical fibers in the OPP (page 3-93).
NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside
the OPP, and fastened with Velcro strips.
7. Identify the duplex connector position on the duplex connector panel (page
3-93).
8. Connect each equipment fiber to the corresponding network fiber according
to the site cabling diagram and the detailed cabling diagrams or tables of
each platform.
9. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.
10. Return the OPP to the rack until it latches in place with a click.
3-92
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Installation

connector and immediately install a protective cap after a
The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 1.4 in. (35
mm). Sharp bending of fibers may degrade the optical
transmission characteristics.
Figure 3-61: Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP
417006-2318-0H3-A02
3-93

Installation
3-94

Maintenance Manual
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4
Platform Installation
In this chapter:
Installation Options.......................................................................................... 4-1
Installing the XDM-900 Shelf in Racks .......................................................... 4-7
Grounding the XDM-900 Shelf ..................................................................... 4-26
Installation Options
XDM-900 shelves can be installed in ETSI A racks, 19" 600 mm deep racks (in
consultation with and approved by ECI Telecom's Mechanical Department),
and in ANSI 19" racks. These racks can be installed on wooden, concrete, or
suspended floors, or suspended from overhead mountings.
The XDM-900 can be installed in the racks in an horizontal or vertical position.
In addition, the XDM-900 can be expanded with one or two TPUs and an
OCU. Different brackets and mechanical adapters are available for attaching
the XDM-900 to the rack in each of these positions.
NOTE: By default the XDM-900 comes with brackets for
horizontal installation in ETSI A racks. For vertical
installation you must remove these brackets, and attach
vertical brackets, supplied with the installation kit.
If necessary, contact ECI Telecom's Customer Support team or your ECI

Telecom sales representative for help in meeting your specific installation
requirements.
The following sections describe the installation options of the XDM-900.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4-1

Maintenance Manual
Layout of XDM-900 Horizontal Installation in

ETSI A Racks
The XDM-900 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack may include, in
addition to the shelf itself, ancillary equipment such as RAP, cable guides for
low-order and high-order traffic cables, fiber guides, cable slack tray for cables
in the lower section of the XDM-900, FST, and xDDF-21 patch panel,
according to the rack installation plan. Typical installations of the XDM-900 in
a horizontal position are shown in the following figures.
Figure 4-1: Typical XDM-900 horizontal installation in an ETSI A
4-2
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Figure 4-2: Typical horizontal installation of two XDM-900 shelves in an ETSI A

rack
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4-3

Maintenance Manual
Figure 4-3: Typical horizontal installation of three basic XDM-900 shelves in 2200
mm ETSI A rack
4-4
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Figure 4-4: Typical horizontal installation of three XDM-900 shelves with TPUs in
2600 mm ETSI A rack
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4-5

Maintenance Manual
Layout of XDM-900 Vertical Installation in

ETSI A Racks
The XDM-900 vertical installation in an ETSI A rack may include, in addition
to the shelf itself, ancillary equipment such as RAP, a cable guides for
low-order and high-order traffic cables, a fiber guide, FST, and xDDF-21 patch
panel, according to the rack installation plan. A typical installation of the
XDM-900 in a vertical position is shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-5: Typical XDM-900 vertical installation in an ETSI A rack
4-6
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Installing the XDM-900 Shelf in

Racks
The XDM-900 can be installed in the following rack types:
ECI Telecom's recommended ETSI rack (2200 mm or 2600 mm - hereafter

referred to as ETSI A), which provides the following benefits:
Removable rear and side panels for tidy routing and efficient
maintenance of all rack cables, including:
E1 cables
Control cables
Power cables
Data cables
Timing cables
Two ducts on the racks front rails for routing up to 200 optical fibers
Open frame top and bottom for easy routing of cables from suspension
floors and/or ceiling ladders
Perforated door for free air flow to the installed equipment (see
Environmental Requirements (page 3-2))
Front door for left or right opening mounting
19" 600 mm deep rack (in consultation with and approved by ECI
Telecom's Mechanical Department)
19" ANSI rack (in consultation with and approved by ECI Telecom's
Mechanical Department)
XDM-900 equipment racks may be installed on wooden, concrete, or floating

floors, or suspended from overhead mountings. For information on the various
mounting options, see Rack Installation (page 3-42).
By default, XDM-900 shelves are supplied with brackets for horizontal
installation in ETSI A racks. The shelves come empty with no cards or modules
installed. Therefore, the installation activities covered in this section include:
Attaching the XDM-900 shelf to a rack. The shelf can be installed in a

horizontal or vertical position.
Grounding the XDM-900 shelf.
The installation of the XDM-900 shelf in the vertical position requires a

workaround which is described in Installing the XDM-900 Shelf in the Vertical
Position (page 4-14).
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4-7

Maintenance Manual
After these procedures have been completed, the XDM-900 shelf is ready for
the installation of:
ECU900, MXC900, and FCU900 cards, as described in Installing

XDM-900 Cards (page 5-1).
I/O modules, as described in Installing XDM-900 Modules.
TPMs in the optional TPU, as described in Installing TPU Modules.
Environmental Considerations
Observe the following guidelines when installing the XDM-900 in racks:
1. Free airflow through the rack must be guaranteed at all times.
2. XDM-900 shelves can be installed in open or closed (with door) racks.
When installed in a closed rack, the door must be perforated. An example
of a rack with a perforated door is the ETSI A rack shown in the following
figure.
3. Always install the first XDM-900 platform in the lower part of the rack,
leaving a space of at least 1U from the bottom of the rack.
4. In mixed (horizontal and vertical airflow) equipment installations, always
install the equipment with the horizontal airflow in the lower part of the
rack, and the equipment with the vertical airflow above it.
5. Leave a space of at least 1U between the upper accessory of the XDM-900
and the next platform.
6. Leave as much space as possible between the racks cable supports and the
XDM-900 sidewalls.
7. Always consider the platform airflow requirements when organizing the
cable and fiber routes near the XDM-900 sidewalls.
4-8
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Figure 4-6: ETSI A rack closed view
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4-9

Maintenance Manual
Typical XDM-900 Installation

In addition to the XDM-900 shelf itself, the equipment installed in the rack
includes:
One Rack Alarm Panel (RAP) installed at the top of the rack, used to
connect external power and alarm monitoring lines to the XDM-900
shelves installed in the rack. One of the following is suitable:
xRAP-D - fully supports up to two XDM-900 shelves
xRAP-100 - fully supports one XDM-900 shelf and three XDM smaller
shelves (like XDM-100 and XDM-50)
RAP-BG - supports one XDM-900 shelf
RAP-4B - supports one XDM-900 shelf
In addition to the space needed for installing the RAP, you must leave at
least 50 mm free space under it for routing cables.
Fiber Storage Tray (FST). A separate FST can be installed above each
XDM-900 with optical modules. Each FST contains two storage reels,
enabling the fiber to be stored on the right or left side of the tray. Leave at
least 50 mm free space between the XDM-900 cabling accessories and its
FST, and another 50 mm free between the FST and the next XDM-900
shelf.
Cable guide. Two units should be installed, one just above the XDM-900
and one under it, to help neatly route the cables connected to the shelf.
Two fiber guides, installed one above the upper cable guide and one under
the lower cable guide. Helps to neatly route fibers, while keeping the
minimum allowed bend radius.
Cable slack tray. One unit should be installed under the lower fiber guide,
to help organize the slacks of cables connected to the lower module cage
and lower TPU.
xDDF-21 (optional). A separate xDDF-21 panel can be used when

unbalanced 75 interfaces need to be connected and converted to balanced
120 interfaces of PIM2_21, PIM2_63/B, and PIM2_63S modules. Leave
at least 100 mm free space above the XDM-900 shelf and below the
xDDF-21.
NOTE: If not otherwise specified XDM-900 shelf
installations in racks shown in this manual refer to 2200 mm
ETSI A racks.
4-10
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Figure 4-7: Typical XDM-900 horizontal installation in an ETSI A
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4-11

Maintenance Manual
Integrating XDM-900 Shelves and Other

Equipment in One Rack
XDM-900 shelves and associated accessories may not occupy the entire rack.
Additional equipment may be installed in the remaining rack space, provided
that any heat generated by additional equipment can efficiently be dissipated,
and that thermal isolation is provided between the various equipment units
installed in the same rack.
In the event of additional equipment being installed on the rack, contact ECI
Telecoms Customer Support team for assistance.
Figure 4-8: Typical installation of XDM-900 and XDM-100 shelves in an ETSI A

rack
4-12
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Figure 4-9: Typical installation of XDM-900 and XDM-1000 shelves in an ETSI A

rack
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4-13

Maintenance Manual
Installing the XDM-900 Shelf in the

Horizontal Position
The XDM-900 shelf comes with brackets ready for installation in ETSI A racks
in the horizontal position.
To install an XDM-900 shelf in the horizontal position in an
ETSI A rack:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the XDM-900 shelf in the rack in
accordance with the rack installation plan.
2. Place the XDM-900 shelf in the prescribed position using the two
stabilizing pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the shelf to
the rack side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
3. If required, based on the site installation plan, see Installing the FST (page
3-87) for instructions on installing an FST above the XDM-900
accessories.
Installing the XDM-900 Shelf in the Vertical

Position
Before installing the XDM-900 shelf (in the vertical position), in an ETSI A
rack, you must prepare it by performing the following steps:
Remove the horizontal installation brackets.
Install the lower vertical bracket.
Attach the vertical filter housing.
Install the upper vertical bracket.
Insert the vertical air filter.
The components required for the vertical installation are supplied in the
installation kit. The procedures required for preparing the XDM-900 for
vertical installation follow.
CAUTION: When installing an XDM-900 shelf vertically,
pay attention to position the shelf with the FCU900 facing
downwards. This is important to ensure proper ventilation of
the XDM-900 shelf.
4-14
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
To remove the XDM-900 shelf horizontal brackets:

1. Place the XDM-900 shelf on a flat clean surface.
2. Remove the four screws fastening the horizontal bracket to the right side of
the shelf.
3. Repeat step 2 for the bracket on the left side of the shelf.
NOTE: The sides of the XDM-900 shelf described hereafter
refer to the product installed in the vertical position. For
example, the lower (or bottom) side of the shelf is the side
near the FCU900.
To install the vertical lower bracket:
1. Orient the XDM-900 shelf on a flat clean surface upside down.
2. Place the vertical lower bracket on the shelf, and fit the holes in the bracket
with the corresponding holes in the shelf.
3. Identify the two long screws and nine short screws according to the
following figure.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4-15

Maintenance Manual
Figure 4-10: Installing the vertical lower bracket
4. Fasten the lower bracket to the shelf with two long screws and nine short
screws from the installation kit.
4-16
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
To prepare the filter frame assembly:

1. Identify the filter frame assembly parts according to the following figure.
Figure 4-11: Preparing the filter frame assembly
2. Insert the filter frame pin guides into the corresponding holes in the frame
support.
3. Attach the frame support to the filter frame.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4-17

Maintenance Manual
To install the filter frame assembly:

1. Place the filter frame assembly at the rear of the lower bracket.
2. Insert the two front screws of the filter frame into the corresponding
latch-shaped holes in the bracket.
3. Identify the four long screws according to the following figure.
Figure 4-12: Installing the filter frame assembly
4. Attach the filter frame to the shelf and fasten it with four long screws from
the installation kit.
4-18
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
To install the vertical upper bracket:

1. Return the XDM-900 shelf to normal position.
2. Place the shelf near the edge of the surface to enable the lower bracket to
protrude out.
3. Place the vertical upper bracket on the shelf, and fit the holes in the bracket
with the corresponding holes in the shelf.
Figure 4-13: Installing the vertical upper bracket
4. Fasten the upper bracket to the shelf with seven screws and washers from
the installation kit.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4-19

Maintenance Manual
To attach the thumbnuts:

1. Lift both filter frame front screws to their upmost position.
2. Take two thumbnuts from the installation kit and fasten them on the
screws.
Figure 4-14: Installing the thumbnuts
4-20
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
To attach an XDM-900 shelf to a rack in the vertical

position:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the XDM-900 shelf in the rack in
accordance with the rack installation plan.
WARNING: To perform this procedure safely, for both
personnel and equipment, get help from an additional person.
2. Place the XDM-900 shelf in the prescribed position in the rack.

3. Align the holes on the XDM-900's brackets with the holes at the rack's side
rails.
4. Attach the shelf to the rack on the upmost hole of the left bracket, and
lowest hole of the right bracket, with two screws and washers.
5. Secure the shelf to the rack with additional three screws and washers in
each bracket.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4-21

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Vertical Air Filter

Normally, the filter frame is attached in its upmost position by two thumbnuts.
The frame must be lowered in order to gain access to the filter guides and to
install the filter.
To lower the filter frame:
1. Open the two thumbnuts until the filter frame screws are free to move.
Figure 4-15: Releasing the thumbnuts
4-22
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
2. Lower the filter frame screws to their very lowest position, to bring the
filter guides in front of the opening in the lower bracket.
Figure 4-16: Lowering the filter frame
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4-23

Maintenance Manual
The following figure shows the filter frame in the lower position.
Figure 4-17: Filter frame in lower position
4-24
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
To insert the vertical filter:

1. Identify the filter's air intake side indicated by two coding tabs.
2. Place the filter in front of the slot with the coding tabs facing downward.
Figure 4-18: Inserting the air filter
3. Insert the filter into the filter frame guides.

4. Push the filter in until it stops.
5. Lift the thumbnuts up and fasten them in place.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4-25

Maintenance Manual
Grounding the XDM-900 Shelf

Before you start:
Review the grounding requirements specified in Grounding Requirements
(page 1-8) and Preparing Cables and Fibers (page 3-7). Obtain the required
materials and make sure to perform the grounding connections in accordance
with these requirements.
To ground the XDM-900

WARNING:
4-26
The ground cable must be of at least the same thickness as

the xRAP power cable. Therefore, if the xRAP power
cable is thick, the grounding cable must match that
thickness.
The thickness of the shelf grounding cable must match the
thickness of the power cable from the xRAP to the shelf.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
To ground the XDM-900:

1. Connect the rack grounding stud to the site grounding bar, as illustrated in
the following figure.
Figure 4-19: XDM-900 shelf and rack grounding
417006-2318-0H3-A02
4-27

Maintenance Manual
2. Connect the RAP grounding post to the rack grounding stud.

3. When NEBS compliance is required, for each XDM-900 shelf installed in
the rack, connect a grounding strap from the two shelf grounding posts to
the RAP grounding post. Note that the grounding strap lug must be inserted
over both grounding posts.
WARNING: To prevent possible damage to XDM
equipment, all racks and equipment must be completely
grounded before connecting to the platform any external
devices powered from an AC source (110/220 V). All
grounding procedures described here must be completed
before, for example, connecting an external PC to configure
and initialize the NE management system.
4-28
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5
Card and Module Installation
In this chapter:
Installing XDM-900 Cards .............................................................................. 5-1
Installing XDM-900 Modules ....................................................................... 5-15
Installing TPU Modules................................................................................. 5-24
Installing XDM-900 Cards

After the shelf has been installed and grounded, you can install the cards.
Before you start:
When installing cards, make sure to carefully align the card with the shelf
guide rails. Hold the card straight during insertion and removal, and pull or
push it slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent
cards/modules.
CAUTION:
417006-2318-0H3-A02
If you feel resistance when inserting cards, immediately

retract the card and repeat the process.
Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening
card screws.
5-1

Maintenance Manual
FCU900 Card
The FCU900 card is installed in the rightmost vertical slot of the XDM-900.
Figure 5-1: Installing the FCU900
To install the FCU900 card:

1. Check that the FCU900 has not been physically damaged during shipment,
and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the FCU900 from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Record the hardware version indicated on the units identification label.
4. Insert the rear end of the FCU900 into the card guides.
5. Push the FCU900 in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of
the card is flush with the front of the XDM-900 shelf. If you feel resistance
before the connectors are mated, pull the fan unit out and repeat the
procedure.
6. Secure the FCU900 in place by tightening the two captive screws.
5-2
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
ECU900 Card
The ECU900 card is installed in the bottom horizontal slot of the card cage.
Installation is identical for the ECU900 cards.
Figure 5-2: Installing the ECU900/ ECU900-F
CAUTION: Take care not to change the position of the

ECU900 switches when inserting or removing a card. Always
hold the ECU900 by grasping the sides of the card without
touching any of the internal electronics or front panel
switches and connectors.
To install the ECU900 card:

1. Check that the card has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the card from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the cards
identification labels.
4. Insert the rear end of the ECU900 into the card guides.
5. Push the ECU900 in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of
the card is flush with the front of the XDM-900 shelf. If you feel resistance
before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.
6. Secure the ECU900 in place by tightening the two captive screws.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-3

Maintenance Manual
MXC900 Card
The XDM-900 shelf always operates as redundant platforms, therefore each
shelf must be equipped with two MXC900 cards installed, one in slot MXC-A
(main card) and one in slot MXC-B (protection card).
Figure 5-3: Installing the MXC900
NOTE: If an ACP900 is not installed in the MXC900, for

your safety, to comply with electro-magnetic compatibility
(EMC) requirements and to prevent escape of ventilation
from the fans through the ACP900 slot opening, protect it
with a blank panel.
CAUTION: Before extracting or inserting an MXC900 into

the shelf, release the extractor handles by pressing the brown
locks outward first, then pull/push both handles
simultaneously. Failure to do so may damage the card.
5-4
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
To install the MXC900 card:

4. Press both brown levers located on the card's extractor handles to release
the handles.
5. Simultaneously push both handles forward.
6. Insert the rear end of the MXC900 card into the card guides.
7. If the NVM card was not installed in the MXC900, install it as follows:
a. Check that the NVM card has not been physically damaged during
shipment.
b. Remove the NVM from its antistatic protection packaging and perform
a visual inspection to detect damage during shipment. Report any
problems.
Figure 5-4: Installing the NVM in the MXC900
c. Orient the NVM card against the dedicated slot on the MXC900, and
then insert its rear end (the end with the connector) in the card guides.
Push the card in until it is locked in place.
NOTE: If the NVM lock is not properly fastened, there is no
access to read/write and the system emits an NVM Cardout
alarm.
d. Place the NVM cover on the slot, and fasten it with its two captive
screws.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-5

Maintenance Manual
8. Push the front panel of the MXC900 in until the extractor handles start to
move inside, the card mates the chassis connectors, and the front of the card
is flush with the front of the shelf. If you feel resistance before the
connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.
9. Turn the two extractor handles simultaneously to the horizontal position to
lock the card in place.
10. Secure the MXC900 in place by tightening the two captive screws.
NOTE: Make sure that card is properly locked in place.
Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the shelf.
If the FAIL (red), MAIN (blue), and TMU (orange) LEDs
blink simultaneously, the MXC900 is not mounted correctly
or the extractor handles are not properly locked.
CAUTION: When replacing any MXC900 card:

The brown levers on the extractor handles operate
microswitches that indicate to the XDM-900 platform that the
MXC900 card is installed. These levers must be pressed first
when replacing an MXC900.
WARNING:
5-6
To reset the system using the RESET button, you must

first remove the NVM cover.
To extract the NVM, press the release pushbutton using
the cover as a tool.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
ACP900 Module
The ACP900 module can be installed in slot A1 of the main MXC900 card and
in slot B1 of the protection MXC900 card.
Before you start:
Make sure that the ACP900 modules required for installation in the XDM-900
shelf are available.
When inserting a module, make sure to carefully align it with the cards guide
rails. Hold the module straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it
slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located in the MXC900.
CAUTION:
If you feel resistance during insertion, immediately retract

the module and repeat the process.
Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening
screws of the module.
NOTE: If an ACP900 is not installed in the MXC900, for

your safety, to comply with electro-magnetic compatibility
(EMC) requirements and to prevent escape of ventilation
from the fans through the ACP900 slot opening, protect it
with a blank panel.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-7

Maintenance Manual
Figure 5-5: Installing the ACP900 or a blank panel
The ACP900 includes a reset control that has a rotatable wing, locking the
module captive fastening screws. To prevent accidental movement, the control
can be moved only after pushing it in, for example, with a screwdriver. This
arrangement ensures that the module is reset before it can be removed, and that
the reset command is released only after the module is fully inserted in its slot.
The reset control operates as follows:
5-8
To insert the module, first turn the reset control clockwise to enable free
movement of the fastening screws. After inserting the module and securing
it in its slot with the two captive screws, push and turn the reset control
counterclockwise to lock the screws and enable the module to start
operating.
To remove the module, first push and turn the reset control clockwise. This
resets the module, and thus forces switching the module to the standby
mode. After the control is turned clockwise, fully open the two captive
screws and pull the handle to release the module from the slot.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
To install an ACP900 module in the MXC900 card:

1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment,
2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the modules
4. Remove the dust cover from the appropriate slot (A1 on MXC-A or B1 on
MXC-B).
5. Turn the reset control clockwise to enable free movement of the module
captive screws.
6. Push the module into the guides of the appropriate slot. Push slowly
backwards to mate the connectors until the front of the module is flush with
the front of the MXC900. If you feel resistance before the connectors are
fully mated, retract the module and repeat the procedure.
7. Fasten the module with the two captive screws.
8. Push and turn the reset control counterclockwise to lock the screws and
enable the module to start operating.
CAUTION: Never remove or insert an MXC900 card with an
ACP900 module engaged. Proceed as follows:
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Disconnect the module cables/fibers and remove the

aACP900.
Remove the MXC900 (including the NVM).
Insert the new MXC900, as described in Installing
XDM-900 Cards (page 5-1).
Insert the ACP900 module.
5-9

Maintenance Manual
Quad I/O Cards

Quad I/O cards can be installed in two dedicated slots (QA, QB) called quad
slots (as they occupy the space of four I/O module slots) in the XDM-900.
When quad I/O cards are not needed, these slots can be utilized to install
SIM16_1 modules by adding a mechanical adapter.
Figure 5-6: Installing a quad I/O card
NOTE: When quad I/O cards or SIM16_1 modules are not

installed in slots QA, QB, the openings must be covered with
blank panels to avoid cooling air escape and comply with
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
5-10
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
To install a quad I/O card:

CAUTION: Before extracting or inserting a quad I/O card
into the shelf, release the extractor handles by pressing the
brown locks outward first and then pull/push both handles
4. Push both brown levers located on the card's extractor handles to release
the handles.
5. Insert the rear end of the quad I/O card into the card guides.
6. Push the card in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the
card is flush with the front of the XDM-900 shelf. If you feel resistance
7. Press both handles simultaneously to lock the card in place.
8. Secure the quad I/O card in place by tightening the two captive screws.
9. Install the SFP/XFP transceivers according to Installing SFP/XFP
transceivers in optical/CWDM modules and cards (page 5-20).
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-11

Maintenance Manual
Installing Quad I/O Cards in Quad I/O Slots

Quad I/O cards (like SIM64_XFP, SIM 16_4 etc) can also be installed in a
quad of I/O slots (I1 to I4, I5 to I8, I9 to I12, and I13 to I16). To do so you
must prepare the quad I/O slots to accommodate the card by removing the three
I/O module guides between the slots and attaching an adapter on both sides.
To prepare quad I/O slots for a quad I/O card installation:
1. Identify the quad I/O slots to be adapted for quad I/O card installation.
2. Identify the module guide to be removed, and remove the screw in front of
the guide.
3. Gently pull the module guide out.
Figure 5-7: Removing a module guide
5-12
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the two other module guides.

5. Identify the quad I/O card right adapter according to the following figure.
Figure 5-8: Installing the quad I/O card right adapter
6. Attach the adapter to the right side of the quad I/O slots with two screws
from the installation kit as shown in the figure above.
7. Identify the left card adapter according to the following figure.
Figure 5-9: Installing the SIM64_XFP left adapter
8. Attach the adapter to the left side of the quad I/O slots with two screws
from the installation kit as shown in the figure above.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-13

Maintenance Manual
To install a quad I/O card in quad I/O slots:

4. Check that the quad I/O slots have been prepared to accommodate the quad
I/O card, as described in To prepare quad I/O slots for a quad I/O card
installation (page 5-12).
CAUTION: Before extracting or inserting a quad I/O card
into the shelf, release the extractor handles by pressing the
brown locks outward first and then pull/push both handles
5. Push both brown levers located on the card's extractor handles to release
the handles.
6. Insert the rear end of the card into the card guides.
Figure 5-10: Installing a quad I/O card in quad I/O slots
7. Push the card in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the
card is flush with the front of the XDM-900 shelf. If you feel resistance
8. Press both handles simultaneously to lock the card in place.
9. Secure the card in place by tightening the two captive screws.
10. Install the SFP/XFP transceiver according to Installing SFP/XFP
transceivers in optical/CWDM modules and cards (page 5-20).
5-14
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

This section describes the installation process for all XDM-900 modules. For a
list and technical description of all available modules, refer to the XDM-100
Product Line Reference Manual, General Description, and XDM Technical
Specifications.
The installation procedure for each type of module is as follows:
Install I/O modules, including:
Optical and electrical modules (see Installing, Optical, CWDM and

Electrical I/O Modules (page 5-15))
OHU module (see Installing the OHU Module (page 5-22))
Double-slot modules (see Installing Double-Slot Modules (page 5-22))
The optical I/O and optical aggregate modules use Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) transceivers. The insertion of SFPs in the module slots is
described in Installing, Optical, CWDM and Electrical I/O Modules (page 515).
NOTE: You can install any combination of the different types
of I/O modules in the I/O modules cages.
Installing, Optical, CWDM, and Electrical I/O

Modules
The following procedure can also be used to replace cards and modules in an
operating shelf, provided the general safety precautions listed in Work and
Equipment Safety and the module-specific warnings listed in the XDM-100
Product Line Reference Manual for each module are strictly followed. Before
starting, make sure that all the I/O modules specified for installation in the
XDM-900 shelf in accordance with the shelf installation plan are available.
All I/O modules are installed in slots I1 through I16, as shown in the following
figure. In addition, if I/O cards are not installed in the wide slots (QA, QB), a
SIM16_1 module can be installed in each of these positions, by adding a
mechanical adapter. This section describes the installation of the electrical,
optical, and CWDM I/O modules, which are single-slot modules. The
installation of PIM2_63/B and MCSMs, which are double-slot modules, is
described in Installing Double-Slot Modules (page 5-22).
In general, to facilitate easy cable routing, it is preferable to install all electrical
modules on the one side of the XDM-900 shelf (left or right), and all optical
and CWDM modules on the other side.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-15

Maintenance Manual
If you are employing a TPU 1:1 protection scheme, electrical modules that
have TPU protection should be arranged in pairs, one below the other. For 1:2
and 1:3 protection schemes, it is recommended that all electrical I/O modules
be installed on one side of the XDM-900 shelf, in slots I1, I2, I5, and I6, or in
slots I3, I4, I7, and I8 in the upper module cage, and I9, I10, I13, and I14, or in
slots I11, I12, I15, and I16 in the lower module cage.
CAUTION:
When installing optical modules, make sure all SFP

transceiver slots are closed by protective caps. Do not
remove the cover until an SFP is inserted.
For your safety, to comply with electro-magnetic
compatibility (EMC) requirements and to prevent escape
of ventilation from the fans through these openings,
protect all unused slots with blank panels.
Figure 5-11: Inserting an I/O module in the I/O slots
To install an I/O electrical, optical, or CWDM module in the

module cages:
5-16
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
4. Identify the assigned slot, and insert the rear end of the module into the
corresponding module guides.
the front of the XDM-900 shelf. Make sure the two fastening screws are
free to move backward as the module slides in. If you feel resistance before
the connectors are fully mated, retract the module and repeat the procedure.
CAUTION: When inserting a module, make sure to carefully
align it with the cage guide rails. If you feel resistance during
insertion, immediately retract the module and repeat the
process.
Hold the module straight during insertion and removal. Pull
or push it slowly and carefully to avoid touching components
on adjacent modules.
6. Fasten the module to the chassis by tightening the two fastening screws. Do
not use excessive torque when tightening the screws.
7. If you are installing an optical, CWDM, or mixed module with SFP
transceivers, proceed to Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical/CWDM
modules and cards (page 5-20).
After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the
module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over all free slots.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-17

Maintenance Manual
Installing SIM16_1 modules in quad slots

The quad slots QA and QB can be adapted to accommodate one SIM16_1 each
by installing a mechanical adapter.
Figure 5-12: Installing the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter
To install the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter:

1. Check that the adapter has not been physically damaged during shipment,
and that the packaging bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the adapter from its protection packaging and perform a visual
inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Insert the rear end of the adapter into the card guides.
4. Push the adapter in until the front of it is flush with the front of the
XDM-900 shelf. If you feel resistance before the adapter is in place, pull it
out and repeat the procedure.
5. Secure the adapter in place by tightening the two captive screws.
5-18
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
To install a SIM16_1 module in a quad slot:

1. Check that the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter is properly installed in the
corresponding quad slot.
2. Check that the SIM16_1 module has not been physically damaged during
shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is
sealed.
5. Insert the rear end of the SIM16_1 into the module guides in the
mechanical adapter.
the front of the adapter. Make sure the two fastening screws are free to
move backward as the module slides in. If you feel resistance before the
connectors are fully mated, retract the module and repeat the procedure.
CAUTION: When inserting a module, make sure to carefully
align it with the adapter guide rails. If you feel resistance
during insertion, immediately retract the module and repeat
the process.
Hold the module straight during insertion and removal. Pull
or push it slowly and carefully until it is in the correct
position.
7. Fasten the module to the adapter by tightening the two fastening screws.
Do not use excessive torque when tightening the screws.
8. Install the SFP transceiver according to Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in
optical/CWDM modules and cards (page 5-20).
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-19

Maintenance Manual
Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in

optical/CWDM modules and cards
CAUTION: During the installation of SFP/XFP transceivers
in optical or CWDM modules and cards, make sure that all
optical LC connectors are closed by protective caps. Do not
remove the covers until an optical fiber is connected to the
corresponding connector.
To install SFP/XFP transceivers in optical or CWDM I/O

modules and cards:
1. Identify the prescribed position on the module according to the site
installation plan.
2. Check that the SFP/XFP has not been physically damaged during shipment,
3. Remove the SFP/XFP from its antistatic protection packaging and perform
a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
4. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the SFP/XFP
5. Remove the protective covers from the slot and from the SFP/XFP
transceiver.
6. Insert the rear end of the transceiver into the slot guides, and push slowly
backwards to mate the connectors until the transceiver clicks into place. If
you feel resistance before the connectors are fully mated, retract the
transceiver and repeat the procedure.
Figure 5-13: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module
5-20
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
CAUTION: All slots that are not in use must remain covered.
If you have to replace a module or card, remove the SFP/XFP
first.
Expanding a PIM2_21 I/O Slot to 42 E1s

An I/O slot that accommodates a PIM2_21 can be expanded to 42 E1s by
replacing it with a PIM2_42 and reassigning the slot as PIM2_42 through
management.
Before you start:
Check that the items required for the expansion are available, including:
PIM2_42 module
Adapter cable between traffic cable connected to the PIM2_21 (that is

disconnected) and the connector on the PIM2_42
Traffic cable for connecting the additional 21 E1s from the PIM2_42 and
the customer's DDF
To expand a PIM2_21 to 42 E1s:

1. Identify the PIM2_21 I/O slot to be expanded.
2. Disconnect the double SCSI connector from the PIM2_21.
3. Open the two captive screws, fastening the PIM2_21 to the XDM-900, and
pull the module out.
4. Install the PIM2_42 in the slot of the removed module, as described in To
install an I/O electrical or optical module in the modules cage.
5. Connect the end of the adapter with the double SCSI connector to the
traffic cable removed from the PIM2_21 in step 2.
6. Connected the other end of the adapter cable with the 100-pin SCSI
connector to the upper connector on the PIM2_42 (marked 1-21).
7. Connect the traffic cable for the additional 21 E1s to the lower connector
on the PIM2_42 (marked 22-42). The other end of this cable is open, and
should be connected to the customer's DDF.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-21

Maintenance Manual
Installing the OHU module

The OHU installation is identical to the installation of I/O modules described in
To install an I/O electrical or optical module in the modules cage.
Installing Double-Slot Modules

Before you start:
Make sure that all the double-slot modules (PIM2_63S or MCSMs) specified
for installation in the XDM-900 shelf in accordance with the shelf installation
plan, are available.
Figure 5-14: Installation of typical double-slot modules in the XDM-900
Because the PIM 2_63s and MCSMs occupy a pair of slots each, before you
can install them you must first remove the guide between the pair of slots.
5-22
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
To remove a module guide from the lower row of slots:

1. Identify the module guide you are removing and remove the screw from the
front of the guide.
2. Gently pull the module guide out.
Figure 5-15: Removing the module guide
CAUTION: Do not allow the metal part you are removing to

touch any modules or other parts of the XDM-900 cage. This
may cause a short-circuit and damage the modules.
To install a double-slot module in the modules cage:

4. Identify the assigned slot and insert the rear end of the module into the
5. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the
module is flush with the front of the XDM-900 shelf. Make sure the two
fastening screws are free to move backward as the module slides in. If you
feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and
repeat the procedure.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-23

Maintenance Manual
6. Fasten the module to the chassis by tightening the two fastening screws.
7. If you are installing MCSMs with SFP transceivers, proceed to Installing,
Optical, CWDM and Electrical I/O Modules (page 5-15).
NOTE: Only FE SFP transceivers can be inserted into FE
ports; you can insert either GbE SFP or FE SFP transceivers
into GbE/FE ports.
8. After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the
module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over all free slots.
Installing TPU Modules

This section provides instructions for:
Installing the TC/TCF Module in the TPU Shelf (page 5-25)
Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU (page 5-26)
Installing Optical Amplifiers in the TPU (page 5-27)
Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (page 5-27)
Installing Triple-Slot TPMs in the TPU (page 5-29)
Before you start:
5-24
Make sure that the TC/TCF module and all the TPMs specified for
installation in the XDM-900 shelf in accordance with the shelf installation
plan are available.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Installing the TC/TCF Module in the TPU

Shelf
The TC/TCF module is installed in the right slot of the TPU.
Figure 5-16: Inserting the TC module (XDM-900)
To install a TC/TCF module in the TPU:

corresponding TC/TCF module guides.
fastening screws are free to move backward as the TC/TCF module slides
in. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module
out and repeat the procedure.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-25

Maintenance Manual
Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU

This section describes the installation of single-slot (1:1 protection) modules.
The installation of double-slot (1:3 protection) modules is described in
Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (page 5-27).
Figure 5-17: Inserting a single-slot TPM in the TPU (XDM-900)
To install a single-slot TPM in the TPU:

7. After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the
module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over any free slots.
5-26
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Installing Optical Amplifiers in the TPU

NOTE: When optical amplifiers are installed in the TPU, you
must install a TCF to allow sufficient cooling air flow
through the amplifiers. The management system will block
the configuration of optical amplifiers, if a TCF is not
installed.
The installation of optical amplifiers in the TPU is identical to the installation

of a single-slot TPM in the TPU, as described in Installing Single-Slot TPMs in
the TPU (page 5-26).
Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU

This section describes the installation of double-slot (1:3 protection) modules.
Double-slot modules can be placed in slot pairs TPM1 and TPM2 or TPM3 and
TPM4. Before you can install a double-slot TPM, you must first remove the
module guide between the two slots.
Figure 5-18: Inserting a double-slot TPM in the TPU (XDM-900)
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-27

Maintenance Manual
To remove a TPM guide:

1. Identify the module guide you are removing.
2. Remove the two uppermost screws and the two lowest screws from the
front of the TPM guide.
3. Gently pull the TPM guide out.
Figure 5-19: Removing a TPM guide
To install a double-slot TPM in the TPU:

7. After inserting all modules, check for correct installation against the
5-28
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Installing Triple-Slot TPMs in the TPU

This section describes the installation of triple-slot (1:2 protection) modules,
which are accommodated in slots TPM1, TPM2, and TPM3 (slot TPM4
remains free).
Before you start:
1. Before installing a triple-slot TPM, remove the two module guides between
the three slots. See To remove a TPM guide (page 5-28).
2. Make sure that all the TPMs specified for installation in the XDM-900 in
accordance with the shelf installation plan are available.
Figure 5-20: Inserting a triple-slot TPM in the TPU (XDM-900)
To install a triple-slot TPM in the TPU:

417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-29

Maintenance Manual
7. After inserting the modules, check for correct installation against the
Attaching TPUs/OCU to the XDM-900 Shelf

The XDM-900 shelf can be expanded with one or two TPU expansion shelves.
The TPU can be attached on top of the XDM-900 and/or directly under it.
Alternatively, a single OCU expansion shelf can be attached directly on top of
the XDM-900 or on top of a TPU that is installed on the XDM-900.
NOTE: The OCU cannot be installed under the XDM-900
shelf.
When you order an XDM-900 system with one or two TPUs, the shelf is
supplied with the TPUs installed and their fastening brackets attached to each
one. The same applies to OCU shelves.
If your XDM-900 shelf does not include TPU protection, it is possible to
upgrade your system and add one or two TPUs and an OCU at a later stage,
provided you have left space on the rack for this possibility. You need at least
150 mm space above/under the XDM-900 for each TPU/OCU.
The TPUs can be installed without disconnecting any of the XDM-900 cables
and fibers and without affecting traffic not going via a TPU.
CAUTION: This procedure should be carried out only by an
ECI Telecom trained field engineer.
5-30
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Installing a TPU/OCU on the XDM-900 shelf

The following section describes the procedure for installing a TPU/OCU on top
of an XDM-900 shelf.
To install a TPU on top of the XDM-900 shelf:
1. Check that the TPU has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
2. Remove the shelf from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the shelfs
4. Arrange all cables and fibers leading to the XDM-900 so that they will not
unintentionally be disconnected when the TPU is inserted on the rack.
5. Open the two screws securing the protective cover of the TPU connector in
place (located at the back right corner, on the top of the XDM-900 shelf).
Remove the cover.
Figure 5-21: Removing the TPU connector from the XDM-900
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-31

Maintenance Manual
6. Remove the H-connector from its protective packaging and install it on the
XDM-900 shelf.
Figure 5-22: Inserting the TPU connector onto the XDM-900
7. Orient the TPU upside down, on a clean flat surface.

8. Identify the two threaded holes for the pin guides on the bottom of the
TPU.
9. Take two pin guides from the installation kit and screw them securely into
the TPU.
Figure 5-23: Installing the pin guides in the TPU
5-32
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
10. Turn the TPU back to normal position.

11. Carefully lower the TPU onto the XDM-900 shelf, taking care that the pin
guides are inserted into the slots as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 5-24: Lowering the TPU onto the XDM-900
12. Insert the three long screws, supplied with the installation kit, into the
appropriate holes, as illustrated in the following figure, and secure the TPU
in place.
Figure 5-25: Securing the TPU onto the XDM-900
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-33

Maintenance Manual
13. Insert the TC module in the TPU, as described in Installing the TC/TCF
Module in the TPU Shelf (page 5-25).
14. Insert the TPMs in the TPU, as described in Installing Single-Slot TPMs in
the TPU (page 5-26) and Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (page
5-27).
15. If the I/O modules to be protected by the TPU are already connected to
traffic cables, disconnect them.
16. Connect the TPMs to the relevant I/O modules, as described in Installing
TPU Modules (page 5-24).
CAUTION: Insert/extract the TPU in/from an XDM-900 only
when it is empty (no TC/TCF or TPMs are assembled in it).
5-34
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Installing a TPU under the XDM-900 Shelf

The following section describes the procedure for installing a TPU under an
XDM-900 shelf.
To install a TPU under the XDM-900 shelf:
1. Check that the TPU has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the shelfs
4. Turn the XDM-900 shelf so that its rear faces the front.
5. Lift the XDM-900 on its far lower edge to gain access to the bottom
surface, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-26: Installing the XDM-900 pin guides and removing the lower
connector cover
6. Open the two captive screws fastening the lower TPU connector cover to
the shelf. Remove the cover.
7. Identify the two threaded holes for the pin guides at the bottom of the shelf
(see the figure above).
8. Take two pin guides from the installation kit and screw them securely in
place.
XDM-900 shelf (see installation of the H-connector in Inserting the TPU
connector onto the XDM-900 (page 5-32)). Note that the connector should
be installed with the angled corner facing backwards.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-35

Maintenance Manual
10. Open the two screws securing the TPU connector cover (located at the back
right corner, on top of the TPU). Remove the cover.
11. Open the six screws securing the fastening bracket to the TPU shelf (keep
the screws handy). Remove the bracket.
12. Orient the TPU on a clean flat surface, upside down.
13. Place the TPU's fastening bracket (removed in step 12) on the TPU and
attach it with the six screws.
Figure 5-27: Assembling the TPU bracket and jumper connector
14. Open the two captive screws fastening the second connector cover to the
TPU. Remove the cover.
15. Take the jumper connector from the installation kit and insert it into the
connector house.
16. Fasten the jumper connector in place with three screws from the installation
kit.
17. Turn the TPU back to regular position.
5-36
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
18. Carefully lower the XDM-900 shelf onto the TPU, taking care that the pin
guides are inserted into the slots, as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 5-28: Lowering the XDM-900 onto the TPU
19. Insert the three long screws supplied in the installation kit into the
appropriate holes, as illustrated in the following figure, and secure the TPU
in place.
Figure 5-29: Securing the lower TPU to the shelf
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-37

Maintenance Manual
Adding a Second TPU/OCU

If your XDM-900 already has a TPU/OCU, it is possible to upgrade your
system and add an additional TPU/OCU cage on top of the first, provided you
have left space on the rack for this possibility. There should be a space of at
least 150 mm above the expanded XDM-900 for installing the TPU/OCU.
The second TPU/OCU cage can be installed without disconnecting any of the
expanded XDM-900 system cables and fibers, and without affecting traffic that
is not going via the TPU/OCU.
CAUTION: This procedure should be carried out only by an
ECI Telecom trained field engineer.
To install an additional TPU/OCU on the expanded XDM-900

shelf:
1. Check that the additional TPU/OCU has not been physically damaged
during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original
packaging is sealed.
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the shelf
4. Arrange all cables and fibers leading to the expanded XDM-900 so that
they will not unintentionally be disconnected when the additional
TPU/OCU is inserted on the rack.
5-38
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
5. Open the two screws securing the protective cover of the TPU/OCU
connector in place (located at the back right corner on the top of the first
TPU/OCU shelf, as shown in the following figure). Remove the cover.
Figure 5-30: Removing the connector cover and fastening bracket from the
first TPU/OCU
6. Open the six screws securing the fastening bracket to the first TPU/OCU
shelf installed on the expanded XDM-900 (see the previous figure).
7. Open the two screws fastening the bracket to the rack. Remove the bracket.
8. Orient the second TPU upside down, on a clean flat surface.
9. Identify the two threaded holes for the pin guides at the bottom of the
second TPU.
10. Take two pin guides from the installation kit and screw them securely into
the TPU.
Figure 5-31: Installing the pin guides in the TPU
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-39

Maintenance Manual
first TPU/OCU shelf, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-32: Inserting the TPU/OCU connector onto the first TPU/OCU in the
XDM-900
5-40
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
12. Carefully lower the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded XDM-900 (on the
first TPU/OCU shelf), taking care that the pin guides are inserted into the
slots as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 5-33: Lowering the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded XDM-900
13. Insert the three long screws supplied in the installation kit into the
appropriate holes, as illustrated in the following figure, and secure the
second TPU/OCU in place.
Figure 5-34: Securing the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded XDM-900
417006-2318-0H3-A02
5-41
5-42

Maintenance Manual
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6
Optical Fiber and Cable
Installation and Routing
In this chapter:
Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks ............................................. 6-1
Connecting Power Cables ................................................................................ 6-3
Connecting Alarm Cables ................................................................................ 6-4
Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical Modules and Cards .............................. 6-5
Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface Cables to Electrical Modules.... 6-6
Connecting Fibers and Cables in

ETSI A Racks
In general, all electrical traffic cables, power cables, alarm cables, and data
cables should be routed along the sides of the rack. All optical fibers should be
routed through the conduits running along the front supports of the ETSI A
rack. Traffic cables from the lower part of the XDM-900 shelf (lower module
cage and lower TPU) should be routed through the cable guide, and the surplus
folded on the cable slack tray.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-1
Optical Fiber and Cable Installation

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
Figure 6-1: Routing cables and fibers in an ETSI A rack
6-2
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
Connecting Power Cables

The power cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the
MXC900 cards.
To connect power cables:
NOTE: To facilitate power cables routing, it is recommended
to start from the XDM-900 shelf towards the RAP.
1. Connect the connector at the end of the power cable to the POWER
connector of the MXC900 in slot MXC-A, and fasten it with its two
screws.
2. Grasp the connector at the other end of the power cable, and thread it
through the opening in the left bracket of the XDM-900 shelf.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second power cable to be connected to the
corresponding MXC900 in slot MXC-B.
4. Bend the cables and thread them through the side cable guides of the rack.
Pull the cables until the cable connectors are positioned against the
appropriate connectors on the RAP.
5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
NOTE: The xRAP-100 installation procedure is described in
Installing the xRAP-100 (page 3-63), and the xRAP-D
installation is described in Installing the xRAP-D (page 3-49).
6. Connect the free ends of the power cables in accordance with the rack
installation plan and the cable tags to the DC power connectors on the
RAP.
CAUTION: Do not extract/insert an MXC900 card while the
DC cables are connected to it.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-3

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Alarm Cables

The alarm cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the
ECU900 front panel.
To connect alarm cables:
1. Route the alarm cables leading from the RAP along the side of the rack to
the appropriate XDM-900 shelf (see "Connecting Fibers and Cables in
ETSI A Racks" page 6-1).
NOTE: The xRAP-100 installation procedure is described in
Installing the xRAP-100 (page 3-63), and the xRAP-D
installation is described in Installing the xRAP-D (page 3-49).
2. Pull each cable down to level of the corresponding ECU900 and bend it
until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate alarm
connector on the ECU900.
3. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the rack side rails.
4. Connect the free ends of the cables in accordance with the rack installation
plan and the cable tags, to the ALARMS connector on the ECU900 front
panel.
6-4
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
Connecting Optical Fibers to

Optical Modules and Cards
All optical fibers in the XDM-900 shelf are connected to the LC connectors on
the SFP/XFP transceivers.
Before you start:
Before installing the XDM-900 shelf and modules, all optical fibers should be
routed through the conduits running along the front supports of ECI Telecoms
recommended rack. From the conduits, the fibers should be routed into the
FSTs installed above and under (in horizontal installations) the XDM-900 shelf
you are installing and threaded into the FST, as described in Installing the FST
(page 3-87).
characteristics.
To connect an optical fiber to an XDM-900 module/card:

1. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to open the latch, and pull the
FST out towards you.
2. Slowly pull the end of the appropriate fiber to release enough fiber from the
tray.
NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. If you cannot release the
fiber in the halfway position, pull the tray again to open it
fully.
3. Insert the end of the fiber in the appropriate slot of the conduit running
along the front support of the rack, and route it to the appropriate level.
4. At the desired level lead the end through the appropriate slot of the conduit,
and pass the fiber through one of the slots in the fiber guide.
5. Bring the end of the fiber to the LC connector on the designated
module/card. Leave some slack to prevent stress.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-5

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
6. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved

cleaning kit.
7. Remove the cover from the module/card connector, and connect the fiber
connector to the module/card connector.
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 for all optical modules/cards in the XDM-900
shelf.
9. When you have finished connecting all the optical modules/cards, gently
push the FST back into the rack until it clicks into place.
Routing and Connecting

Electrical Interface Cables to
Electrical Modules
NOTE: The procedures in this section describe the
connection of traffic cables directly to I/O modules in the
XDM-900 shelf. If your installation includes a TPU
protection scheme, some of the cables will be connected to
the relevant TPM in the TPU instead of to the I/O module,
according to the site installation plan.
Connection of the I/O modules to the TPMs is described in
Connecting Electrical Interfaces through the TPU (page 621).
Routing and connecting multipair cables

Multipair cables are used to connect to the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces
located on the PIM2_21, PIM2_63, and PIM2_63S electrical connection
modules. One or three pairs of cables are connected to the module,
respectively.
Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs per cable (transmit or
receive). The cable end connecting to the XDM-900 shelf is terminated in 2 x
50-pin SCSI male connectors, or 2 x 136-pin VHDCI male connectors (for
PIM2_63S).
If you are using an xDDF-21 patch panel, suitable cables should be routed from
the relevant xDDF-21 patch panel to the XDM-900 shelf location. Sufficient
length should be available to permit routing. Note that the cable must be
connected to the rear of the patch panel before it is secured in place.
6-6
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
To connect multipair cables:

1. Arrange the multipair traffic cables and route them through the cable guides
attached to the rack side rails.
2. Pull each multipair cable down to the level of the corresponding electrical
connection module.
3. Leave a spare length of 20 cm to 30 cm of cable folded on top of the shelf
(for modules in the upper module cage) or on the cable slack tray (for
modules in the lower module cage) for future maintenance purposes.
4. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and
through the appropriate opening of the cable guide serving the shelf, until
the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate slot. Use cable ties
as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
5. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate module connectors with the
appropriate DDF connections. Cut excess cable length if necessary.
6. Connect the cable connector to the corresponding module.
CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to
secure the cable connector, as this may damage the module.
7. Secure the cable connector to the module connector with the two cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually; if the screws cannot be
reached with your bare hand, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver
(maximum blade size 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N
cm.
Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S

The PIM2_63S has a special 272-pin VHDCI female connector for connecting
to its 63 x E1 interfaces. A special cable offered by ECI Telecom is used to
make the connection.
The cable is constructed of three main parts:
Double 136-pin VHDCI male connector with six 30AWG cable tails
Conversion cable-size box
Three pairs of 26AWG cables
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-7

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
The following figure shows the PIM2_63S traffic cable.
Figure 6-2: PIM2_63S traffic cable
The six 30AWG cables connect on one side to the double 136-pin VHDCI
connector and on the other side to the conversion box. The conversion box
connects between the six 30AWG wires and three pairs of 26AWG wires,
making the wire-size conversion. The 26AWG cables are connected at the
other end to the customer's DDF. Each cable in a pair is bonded to the other,
shaping a figure-eight pattern.
Each pair of the 26AWG cables carries 21 E1s totaling 63 E1s; to facilitate
identification of the E1 groups each cable pair is marked with color strips along
its jacket, according to the following key:
6-8
First pair, E1s No. 1 to 21 - Red strips
Second pair, E1s No. 22 to 42 - Blue strips
Third pair, E1s No. 43 to 63 - Yellow strips
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
Routing and Connecting the Traffic Cable for

PIM2_63S
The PIM2_63S has a 272-pin VHDCI female connector for connecting to its 63
x E1 interfaces. A special cable offered by ECI Telecom is used to make the
connection. For a detailed description of the cable refer to Traffic Cable for
PIM2_63S (page 6-7). The connector on the cable has a pin guide that must be
inserted into the corresponding hole, to the upper right side of PIM2_63S
connector.
Special box trays installed above and below the XDM-900 shelf help neatly
route of the PIM2_63S cables. These units enable to keep the path of the cables
in the short rout between the module on the shelf and the conversion box (on
the cable). In addition, the organized installation and route of the cables ensure
smooth closure of the rack's door.
To connect the PIM2_63S traffic cable:
1. Identify the pin guide on the traffic cable connector and the corresponding
hole on the PIM2_63S.
2. Insert the pin guide into the corresponding hole near the PIM2_63S
connector.
3. Gently push the cable connector into the corresponding PIM2_63S
connector. If resistance is felt before the connectors are mate, pull the
connector out and repeat the procedure.
4. Secure the connector in place by tightening its four captive screws.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-9

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
Figure 6-3: PIM2_63S traffic cable installation
To route the PIM2_63S traffic cable:

1. Bend the cables from the connector installed in the previous procedure
towards the cable guide on the box tray (see the preceding figure).
2. Insert a cable tie into the corresponding holes in the cable guide; route the
cables through the cable tie and tighten it on the cables.
3. Route the cables inside the tray and insert the box grooves into the
corresponding guides in the tray (see the preceding figure).
4. Route the long part of the cables coming from the box towards the rack side
rails.
5. Fasten the cables to the rack side rails with cable ties as necessary.
6-10
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
Installing an xDDF-21 patch panel

The xDDF-21 is installed above the XDM-900 shelf accessories.
To install an xDDF-21 patch panel:
1. Route the 2 x 50-pin SCSI cables leading from the PIM2_21 or PIM2_63/B
along the side of the rack to the location where the xDDF-21 patch panel
will be installed.
2. Before you install the patch panel, connect the SCSI cables leading to the
rear of the xDDF-21 patch panel. The cables are marked J1 and J2 and
should be connected to their respective connectors.
3. Leaving at least 100 mm free space above the XDM-900 shelf accessories
and below the xDDF-21, attach the patch panel to the rack rails and secure,
using the four supplied screws, washers, and nuts.
4. Connect the traffic cables to the front of the xDDF-21 patch panel, and
make a note of the appropriate channels on the identification label on the
inside of the panel door.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-11

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
Routing and connecting coaxial cables

Individual coaxial cables are used to connect to the interfaces located on
PIM345_3, and SIM1_4/E modules. Depending on the module type, a
maximum of eight cables can be connected to each module.
As part of site preparations, suitable cables should be routed from the relevant
High Rate DDF (if used) to the intended rack location, and connected to the
coaxial cables with DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors supplied with the XDM-900 shelf.
Sufficient length should be available to permit routing the cables to the
appropriate level in the rack.
To connect coaxial traffic cables to an XDM-900 module:
1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in groups
according to the designated module, and route them along the guides at the
side of the rack to the appropriate XDM-900 unit.
2. Pull each coaxial cable up or down to the level of the corresponding
electrical connection module.
the cable guide serving the shelf, so that the cable connector is positioned at
the level of the appropriate module. Use cable ties as required to fasten the
cable to the rack side rails.
5. Cut excess cable length if necessary.
6. Connect the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector on the cable to the corresponding
electrical connection connector on the module.
6-12
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
Connecting I/O Protection Cables in the

XDM-900
The optional TPU shelf can be mounted on top and/or under the XDM-900
shelf to add I/O protection capability to the platform.
Each Tributary Protection Module (TPM) is connected to both operating and
protection I/O modules in the XDM-900 shelf.
If a failure is detected in one of the operating I/O modules, the TC module in
the TPU switches the traffic from the operating I/O module to the protection
module.
The TPU has four slots for TPMs. The modules are connected to the main and
protection I/O modules by traffic cables, and the client's traffic is connected
directly to the TPMs.
TPMs support the electrical PIMs and SIMs with the following protection
schemes:
TPMs for a 1:1 protection scheme, where one protection module is

connected to a single I/O module

connected to one or two I/O modules

connected to two or three I/O modules
The TPU connects to a connector on top of the XDM-900 shelf. Similarly the
lower TPU connects to a connector at the bottom of the shelf. These connectors
provide the power and control buses required for the TPU operation.
The modules in the TPU are distributed as follows:
The rightmost TPU slot is allocated for the TC module. The TC module is
described in the XDM-100 Product Line Reference Manual.
The other four slots are used for any combination of TPMs (single slot,
double-slot, or triple-slot modules are supported).
The TPMs available for the I/O protection are:
TPM2_1
TPM2_3
TPM2_42_2
TPM2_63_2
TPM2_63_3
TPMH_1
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-13

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
Each TPM is dedicated for protection of a specific traffic rate and protection
scheme. The TPM name designates the protected traffic rate and the protection
scheme, as follows:
The first digit after the name designates the traffic rate.
The last digit after the underscore designates the protection scheme.
For example, the TPM2_3 is a module for 2 Mbps traffic, and supports a
protection scheme of 1:3.
Similarly TPMH_1 is a module for High rate traffic (including 34/45 Mbps and
155 Mbps), and a protection scheme of 1:1.
The following table summarizes the available TPMs, the type of I/O modules
they protect, the traffic rate, and the protection scheme.
Table 6-1:
XDM-900 protection schemes
TPM Type
Protected I/O
module
Traffic rate
Protection
scheme
TPM2_1
PIM2_21
2 Mbps
1:1
TPM2_3
PIM2_21
2 Mbps
1:3
TPM2_42_2
PIM2_42
2 Mbps
1:2
TPM2_63_2
PIM2_63/B,
PIM2_42,
PIM2_63S
2 Mbps
1:2
TPM2_63_3
PIM2_63S
2 Mbps
1:3
TPMH_1
PIM345,
SIM1_4/E
34/45 Mbps, 155

Mbps
1:1
In the specific XDM-900 protection schemes, the location of the protection

module (P) and the protected module (M) is allocated by the system's
management software. Therefore the I/O modules must be installed in the
allocated slots, and connected to the corresponding TPMs.
The following sections provide schematic diagrams and tables for the
connections of the XDM-900 shelf in the various protection schemes.
6-14
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
XDM-900 1:1 protection scheme

connections
The following figure shows an example of a typical 1:1 protection scheme for
an XDM-900 populated with PIM2_21 modules in the upper and lower module
cages and TPM2_1 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The marking P in
the XDM-900 shelf designates the Protection module, and M the Main
(working) module.
Figure 6-4: XDM-900 1:1 protection scheme example
The following table shows the slot association for 1:1 protection scheme in the
XDM-900.
Table 6-2:
TPU slots
XDM-900 slots allocation for protection schemes

I/O slot allocation
Protection
Main
M1-1
I1
I5
M1-2
I2
I6
M1-3
I3
I7
M1-4
I4
I8
M3-1
I9
I13
M3-2
I10
I14
M3-3
I11
I15
M3-4
I12
I16
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-15

and Routing

Maintenance Manual

connections (PIM2_63)
cages and TPM2_63_2 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The marking P
in the XDM-900 shelf designates the Protection module, and M the Main
(working) module.
XDM-900.
Table 6-3:
XDM-900 1:2 I/O protection (PIM2_63)
TPU slots
6-16
I/O slot allocation

Protection
Main
M1-1, M1-2, and M1-3
I1 and I2
I5 and I6
I7 and I8
M3-1, M3-2, and M3-3
I9 and I10
I13 and I14

I15 and I16
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing

connections (PIM2_63S)
an XDM-900 populated with PIM2_63S modules in the upper and lower
module cages and TPM2_63_2 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The
marking P in the XDM-900 shelf designates the Protection module, and M the
Main (working) module.
Figure 6-6: XDM-300 1_2 protection scheme example (PIM2_63S)
XDM-900.
Table 6-4:
XDM-900 1:2 I/O protection (PIM2_63S)
TPU slots
I/O slot allocation

Protection
Main
M1-1, M1-2, and M1-3
I1
I5 and I6
M3-1, M3-2, and M3-3
I9
I13 and I14
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-17

and Routing

Maintenance Manual

connections
cages and TPM2_3 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The marking P in
the XDM-900 shelf designates the Protection module, and M the Main
(working) module.
XDM-900.
Table 6-5:
XDM-900 1:3 I/O protection
TPU slots
6-18
I/O slot allocation

Protection
Main
M1-1 and M1-2
I1
I2, I5, I6
M1-3 and M1-4
I3
I4, I7, I8
M3-1 and M3-2
I9
I10, I13, I14
M3-3 and M3-4
I11
I12, I15, I16
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing

connections for TPM2_63_3
an XDM-900 populated with PIM2_63S modules in the upper and lower
module cages and TPM2_63_3 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The
marking P in the XDM-900 shelf designates the Protection module, and M the
Main (working) module.
Figure 6-8: TPM2_63_3 protection connections in XDM-300/XDM-900
XDM-900.
Table 6-6:
XDM-900 1:3 I/O protection
TPU slots
I/O slot allocation

Protection
Main
M1-1 and M1-2
I1
I2, I5, I6
M1-3 and M1-4
I3
I4, I7, I8
M3-1 and M3-2
I9
I10, I13, I14
M3-3 and M3-4
I11
I12, I15, I16
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-19

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
TPM2_42_2 Protection Assignment for the

XDM-900
The TPM2_42_2 supports four protection groups of two PIM2_42 cards
protected in each.
Figure 6-9: TPM2_42_2 protection slot allocation in XDM-900
The following table describes the slot assignment of the TPM2_42_2 in the
TPU and the PIM2_42 in the XDM-900 shelf.
Table 6-7:
TPM2_42_2 and PIM2_42 slot assignment in the XDM-900
TPU slots
6-20
I/O Slot Allocation

Protection
Main
M1-1 and M1-2
I1
I5 and I6
M1-3 and M1-4
I3
I7 and I8
M3-1 and M3-2
I9
I13 and I14
M3-3 and M3-4
I11
I15 and I16
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
Connecting Electrical Interfaces through the

TPU
The type of cable used to connect the I/O modules to the TPMs depends on the
type of I/O module being protected, as follows:
For PIM2_21s, 2 x 50 to 1 x 100 SCSI cables are supplied, to be connected

from four different PIM2_21s to connectors PIM2_21 #1, PIM2_21 #2,
PIM2_21 #3, and PIM2_21 PROTECT at the bottom of the TPM2_3.
Multipair traffic cables are connected to the DDF#1, DDF#2, and DDF#3
connectors at the top of the TPM2_3.
The connection between TPM2_3s and PIM2_21s is shown in the
following figure.
Connections are between a connector in the TPM and the corresponding
module in the shelf, where P denotes protection and 1, 2, and 3 are for
reference purposes.
For PIM345_3 or SIM1_4/E modules, the supplied cables enable

connection from the DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors on the I/O module to the 8W8
MAIN and PROTECT connectors at the bottom of the TPM-H_1. The
traffic coaxial cables are connected to the OUT/IN connectors at the top of
the TPM-H_1. These connections are shown in the following figure.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-21

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
NOTE: The cable used to connect the PIM345_3 or

SIM1_4/E to the TPM-H_1 ends with eight coaxial cables:
When protecting a PIM345_3, six coaxial cables are

connected and two remain unused.
When protecting a SIM1_4/E, all eight coaxial cables are
connected.
Figure 6-11: Connecting to a TPMH_1 protection with an XDM-900
6-22
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
The following figure shows connection to 252 E1s with 1:2 protection. Six
PIM2_63 modules are connected in the XDM-900 shelf protected by two
TPM2_63_2 modules in the TPUs.
Figure 6-12: XDM-900 with 252 E1s in 1:2 protection connections
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-23

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting Cables to Data

Modules (EISMBs/DIOMs/MCSMs)
Depending on the data module in your XDM-900 shelf, data cables with RJ45
connectors or optical fibers with LC connectors are used to connect to the
module, as described in the following procedures.
To connect Ethernet cables to a data module:
NOTE: To support the Autonegotiation feature on electrical
ports, use CAT5E SFTP 2-pair or 4-pair straight cable to
connect 10/100BaseT ports, or CAT5E SFTP 4-pair straight
cable to connect 1000BaseT ports.
1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the data cables in groups
according to the designated data module, and route them along the guides at
the side of the rack to the appropriate XDM-900 unit.
2. Pull each data cable up or down to the level of the corresponding data
module.
through the cable guide serving the shelf, so that the cable connector is
positioned at the level of the appropriate module. Use cable ties as required
to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
5. Connect the RJ-45 connector on the cable to the corresponding connector
on the data module.
6-24
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
Connecting an optical fiber to a data module

The following procedure describes how to connect an optical fiber to a data
module.
Before you start:
Prior to installing the XDM-900 shelf and modules, route all optical fibers
through the conduits running along the front supports of the XDM-900s
recommended rack. From the conduits, route the fibers into the FST above the
XDM-900 shelf you are installing and thread them into the FST, as described in
Installing the FST (page 3-87).
characteristics.
To connect an optical fiber to a data module:

1. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to open the latch, and pull the
FST out towards you.
2. Slowly pull the end of the appropriate fiber to release enough fiber from the
tray.
3. Insert the end of the fiber in the appropriate slot of the conduit running
along the front support of the rack, and route it to the appropriate level.
4. At the desired level, lead the end through the appropriate slot of the
conduit, and pass the fiber through one of the slots in the fiber guide.
5. Thread the end of the fiber through the rack slots to the SFP transceiver LC
connector on the designated data module. Leave some slack to prevent
stress.
6. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved
cleaning kit.
7. Remove the cover from the SFP transceiver, and connect the fiber
connector to the SFP connector.
8. Repeat Steps 2 to 7 for all optical data modules in the XDM-900 shelf.
9. When you have finished connecting all the optical modules, gently push the
FST back into the rack until it clicks into place.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-25

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Timing (Clock) Cables

Timing cables are connected to the T3 and T4 connectors of the ECU900. Each
cable is terminated in a 9-pin D-type female connector.
To connect a timing cable to the XDM-900 shelf:
1. Route the timing cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate
XDM-900 shelf.
2. Pull each cable down to the level of the corresponding ECU900 and bend it
until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate timing
3. Connect the free ends of the cables in accordance with the rack installation
plan and the cable tags, to connectors T3 and T4 on the ECU900.
secure the cable connector, as this may damage the ECU900.
4. Secure each cable connector using its two screws.

5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the rack side rails.
Connecting Management Cables

The management cables are connected to the RJ-45 connectors designated
MANAGEMENT MAIN and PROT/LCT on the ECU900. Each cable is
terminated in an RJ-45 plug.
The cable from the management station must be plugged into the
MANAGMENT MAIN connector in the ECU900 card.
If more than one shelf has to be connected to the management, a daisy chain
interconnection is used to distribute management to the shelves for either
ECU900 cards. In this configuration, the cable from the management station is
connected to the MANAGEMENT MAIN connector of the first shelf, the
PROT/LCT connector of the first shelf is connected to the MANAGEMENT
MAIN connector of the second shelf, and so on.
6-26
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
To connect management cables to the XDM-900 shelf

equipped with an ECU900:
1. Route the management cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate
XDM-900 shelf.
2. Pull each cable down to the level of the corresponding ECU900 and bend it
until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate management
3. Connect the management station cable to the MANAGEMENT MAIN
connector of the first shelf, in accordance with the rack installation plan and
the cable tags.
4. If more than one shelf is installed, connect a management cable from the
PROT/LCT connector of the first shelf to the MANAGEMENT MAIN
connector of the second shelf, and so on.
5. Secure each cable connector using its two screws.
secure the cable connector, as this may damage the ECU900.
6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the shelves.
Tool Kit
ECI Telecom offers a tool kit to facilitate extraction/insertion of connectors and
optical SFP transceivers connected to ports in very high density cabling
environments.
The tool kit is packed in a compact box and enables the technical staff to
handle installation and maintenance activities in a quick and efficient fashion,
without affecting traffic of a neighboring connector that should not be
removed.
The kit includes the following tools:
RJ-45 extractor
LC connector extraction/insertion and optical SFP extractor (all in the same

tool)
DIN 1.0/2.3 (regular and small profile) connector extractor
Pincers
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-27

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
Extracting RJ-45 connectors

The RJ-45 extractor tool enables easy extraction of RJ-45 connectors located in
very high density cabling environments. The extractor is designed to remove
connectors connected to modules that include one or two rows of data ports
(for example, DIOM_08 and MCSM modules).
The general view of the tool is shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-13: RJ-45 extractor
To extract an RJ-45 connector from an upper port row:

1. Insert the cables (or cable) into the extractor as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 6-14: Inserting the cables (upper row)
6-28
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
2. Move extractor forward to attach the far groove to the module's handle.
Figure 6-15: Attaching the extractor to the handle (upper row)
3. Press the extractor's bent edge on the connector's protrusion.

4. Hold the cable near the connector to be extracted and pull the connector
out.
Figure 6-16: Extracting the connector (upper row)
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-29

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
To extract an RJ-45 connector from a lower port row:

1. Insert the cables (or cable) into the extractor as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 6-17: Inserting the cables (lower row)
2. Move extractor forward to attach the near groove to the module's handle.
Figure 6-18: Attaching the extractor to the handle (lower row)
3. Press the extractor's bent edge on the connector's protrusion.
6-30
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
4. Hold the cable near the connector to be extracted and pull the connector
out.
Figure 6-19: Extracting the connector (lower row)
Extracting/Inserting LC connectors and

SFPs
The LC/SFP extractor is a multipurpose tool enabling the extraction/insertion
of LC connectors connected in very high density cabling environments (for
example, LC connectors cabled near multiple adjacent SFPs). The tool is also
designed to extract SFP transceivers.
The following figure shows the LC/SFP extractor.
Figure 6-20: LC/SFP extractor
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-31

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
Before you start:

Identify the LC/SFP extractor according to LC/SFP extractor (page 6-31).
Fold the SFP extractor lever into the tool's narrow end. Use the tool's wide end
to perform the following procedure.
To extract an LC connector:
1. Insert the fiber near the boot under the extractor's wide end tab.
Figure 6-21: Inserting the fiber into the extractor
2. Push the extractor straight forward and press its release tab onto the SFP's
clip, until it clicks over top of the clip.
Figure 6-22: Pressing extractor's release tab onto SFP's clip
6-32
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
3. Pull out the extractor with the fiber.
Figure 6-23: Extracting the LC connector
4. Move the fiber backward till its connector is beyond the extractor's tab.
Figure 6-24: Moving the connector beyond the tab
5. Remove the fiber from the extractor.
Figure 6-25: Removing the fiber
Before you start:

Fold the SFP extractor lever into tool's wide end. Use the tool's narrow end to
perform the following procedure.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-33

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
To insert an LC connector:
1. Insert the fiber near its boot, under the extractor's narrow end tab. Orient
connector's clip in front of the tool's teeth.
Figure 6-26: Inserting the fiber into extractor's narrow end
2. Push the extractor forward until stopped by the connector's clip.
Figure 6-27: Moving extractor's end to the connector
3. Insert the connector into the SFP until it locks.
Figure 6-28: Inserting the connector into the SFP
4. Gently pull the extractor back until its edge is beyond the boot.
Figure 6-29: Moving the extractor backward
6-34
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
5. Remove the extractor from the fiber near the boot.
Figure 6-30: Removing the extractor from the fiber
Before you start:

Fold the SFP extractor lever into the tool's narrow end. Use the tool's narrow
side to perform the following procedure.
To extract an SFP transceiver:
1. Orient the extractor in front of the SFP.
Figure 6-31: Orienting the extractor in front of the SFP
2. Push the extractor forward until stopped by the SFP.
Figure 6-32: Moving the extractor forward
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-35

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
3. Push the extractor forward to fit SFP's middle partition into extractor's edge
slot.
Figure 6-33: Fitting SFP's partition into extractor's slot
4. Move the extractor's teeth to the right (toward the SFP clip).
Figure 6-34: Moving extractor toward SFP clip
5. Pull the extractor slightly backward. Make sure that the clip is grasped and
moves with the tool.
Figure 6-35: Pulling the extractor backward with grasped clip
6-36
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
6. Slide the lever forward to lock the SFP's clip, and press slightly.
Figure 6-36: Locking the clip between lever and extractor's teeth
7. With the clip locked, pull the extractor backward to rotate the clip by` 90,
and release the SFP from its housing.
Figure 6-37: Releasing the SFP from housing
8. Gently pull the SFP and extract it from the housing.
Figure 6-38: Extracting the SFP
NOTE: It is very important to keep the SFPs locked during

the last three steps of the procedure.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-37

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
Extracting/Inserting DIN 1.0/2.3 coaxial

connectors
The DIN 1.0/2.3 connector extractor tool enables the extraction/insertion of
coaxial connectors connected in very high density cabling environments (for
example, coaxial connectors cabled near multiple adjacent electrical SFPs).
The following figure identifies the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector extractor.
Figure 6-39: DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor
Before you start:

Identify the coaxial extractor according to DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor (page 6-38).
Use the tool's narrow end to perform the following procedure.
6-38
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
To extract a DIN1.0/2.3 connector:

1. Place the extractor on the coaxial cable in front of the connector.
Figure 6-40: Placing the extractor in front of the connector
2. Push the extractor forward and attach the end tabs on the connector's step.
Figure 6-41: Attaching the extractor to the connector's step
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-39

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
3. Pull the extractor with the connector backward and release the connector.
Figure 6-42: Extracting the connector
Before you start:

Identify the coaxial extractor according to DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor (page 6-38).
Use the tool's wide end to perform the following procedure.
To insert a DIN 1.0/2.3 connector:
1. Insert the coaxial cable near its boot, under the extractor's wide end tab.
Figure 6-43: Inserting the coaxial cable into the extractor
6-40
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

and Routing
2. Pull the cable backward until the connector's edge is stopped by the tab.
Figure 6-44: Positioning the connector in the extractor
3. Push the extractor with the connector forward until it clicks into the SFP.
Figure 6-45: Inserting the connector
417006-2318-0H3-A02
6-41

and Routing

Maintenance Manual
4. Gently pull the extractor backward and release it from the cable.
Figure 6-46: Removing the extractor
6-42
417006-2318-0H3-A02
7
Commissioning Tests
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 7-1
Test Equipment ................................................................................................ 7-2
Site Commissioning Tests ............................................................................... 7-3
Network Commissioning Tests ....................................................................... 7-7
Overview
The commissioning tests are performed after completing the installation and
preliminary configuration of a new network. These procedures confirm that the
network has been properly installed and is operating in accordance with the
design specifications.
This chapter provides general commissioning procedures for the XDM-900,
and provides a basis for preparing tests in specific networks.
The commissioning procedures include:
Site commissioning tests, performed at the site level to ensure proper

functionality of the site.
Network commissioning tests, performed at the network level. These

include:
SDH commissioning tests, to ensure proper SDH functionality of the

integrated network
Data network commissioning tests, to ensure proper data functionality

of the integrated network
Optical network commissioning tests, to ensure proper optical

functionality of the integrated network
417006-2318-0H3-A02
7-1
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
The commissioning procedures presented in this chapter include:
Test Equipment
Site Commissioning Tests (page 7-3)
Network Commissioning Tests (page 7-7)
SDH Commissioning Tests (page 7-7)
Data Network Commissioning Tests (page 7-18)
Optical Network Commissioning Tests (page 7-22)

NOTES: Personnel involved in the execution and supervision
of commissioning tests must be familiar with the applicable
safety precautions and requirements.
Unless otherwise indicated, the tests described in these
sections apply to all XDM shelves and to both SDH and
SONET.
Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning procedures:
Optical power meter (OPM)
Optical spectrum analyzer (recommended for measurements at points

carrying multiple wavelengths, for example, inputs and outputs of optical
amplifiers)
Optical BER tester
Set of optical attenuators with various values
Variable optical attenuator
FC-to-LC and FC-to-SC adapters
FC/FC optical patch cords
Multimeter
Suitable equipment is available from a wide range of manufacturers, and

therefore no specific test equipment models are listed. You can use any
equipment that meets the applicable international standards and has satisfactory
measurement accuracy over the range of operating parameters and
environmental conditions that apply to the specific network. If necessary,
contact ECI Telecom's Field Engineering Department for specific
recommendations.
7-2
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Site Commissioning Tests

The site commissioning tests verify the normal operation of XDM-900 network
elements. Perform the following procedures on each network element at each
site:
Verification of cards and modules installed in each shelf
Visual inspection and mechanical checks
Optical level measurements (see reference data in the XDM-900 System

Specifications manual)
Checking Cards and Modules Installed in

Each Shelf
This check is performed to confirm that the required cards and modules have
been installed in each site, and to record their firmware versions and serial
numbers.
The following table provides a typical form for recording the cards and
modules installed in an XDM-900 shelf.
Table 7-1:
Card and module inventory
Card/Module
type
Slot
Boot version
Serial number
NOTES: Make sure that the boot version of each card and
module matches the embedded version.
If the equipment is already connected to a management
station, use the Inventory window to collect the information
and print the relevant data. Refer to the ECI Telecom
management system user manual for detailed instructions.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
7-3
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Visual Inspection and Mechanical Checks

The visual inspection checks for proper equipment installation, correct routing
and connection of cables, and other tasks related to equipment installation.
Refer to:
Equipment Installation (page 4-1) criteria for proper equipment

installation
Site cabling diagram criteria for proper cabling routing
After completing the visual inspection tasks (items 1 to 9 in table Visual

inspection and mechanical checks), power on the XDM-900 shelves to perform
an additional set of acceptance tests (items 10 to 13 in table Visual inspection
and mechanical checks). These tests check the functions needed for continuing
the execution of the network commissioning tests. Refer to the XDM-100
Product Line Reference Manual for a description of the various card indicators
and their functions.
The following table provides a typical list for recording the results of a visual
inspection and mechanical check.
Table 7-2:
7-4
Visual inspection and mechanical checks
No.
Description of inspection/check
1.
Check mechanical mounting of the rack.
2.
Install the DC power cable (main fuse to RAP; RAP fuse

to shelf).
3.
Ground the cable connections.
4.
Install the DDF and connect the cables.
5.
Install the ODF and connect the cables.
6.
Install the network manager station (if applicable).
7.
Unpack the cards and insert them into the shelves.
8.
Provide DC supply voltage via the first DC source to the ___V

RAP (-40 V to -75 V).
9.
Provide DC supply voltage via the second DC source to

the RAP (-40 V to -75 V).
10.
Power on the shelves.
11.
Check the proper operation of both RAP power sources

by disconnecting one source at a time.
12.
Check the communication between the shelf and the

Craft terminal via the shelf SLIP interface.
13.
Check the proper operation of all FCU900s.
14.
Check LED operation by pressing the LED TEST

pushbutton on the ECU900.
Results
___V
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
No.
Description of inspection/check
Results
15.
Check the installation of Cisco ATA-186/Cisco

2600/Call Manager (if applicable).
16.
Check slot assignment for all relevant cards.
17.
Check that there are no abnormal alarms.
Measuring Optical Levels

These measurements check optical signal levels at the various equipment ports.
Before performing any other commissioning test, proper optical levels, within
the limits specified in the XDM-900 System Specifications, must be achieved
for each optical component.
Perform these measurements using an Optical Power Meter (OPM) configured
according to the wavelength at the measurement port. For reliable
measurement, do not connect the OPM directly to a port but use a 6.6 foot /
2-meter cable. When measuring high optical power levels, use attenuators to
ensure that the power does not exceed the maximum OPM input level.
The following table provides a typical data form for recording the results of the
optical level measurements.
Table 7-3:
Slot
Measured optical levels
Module
type
Port
Wavelength
Optical transmit
level (dBm)
Receive level
(dBm)
The measured power levels are evaluated as follows:
The measured power must be within the range of minimum and maximum
levels specified in the XDM-900 System Specifications for the transceiver
plug-in type installed on the corresponding port.
The measured power must be within the expected range according to the
optical network plan.
If necessary, contact ECI Telecom's Field Engineering Department for relevant

port and optical transceiver plug-in specifications and network planning data.
An OK result means that the port meets both criteria.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
7-5
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
It is usually sufficient to measure only the optical levels at the transmit and
receive ports of I/O cards, transponders, and optical amplifiers installed in each
shelf. A good port receive level indicates that the components in the optical
path up to that port are properly connected and operating normally. If the result
is not satisfactory, perform additional measurements at all the other ports along
the optical signal paths.
Shelf Power-On Test Procedure

This procedure checks the equipment recovery capability after a power fault.
To power on the NE:
1. Perform slot assignments for all the relevant cards and modules in the shelf.
2. Turn the shelf circuit breaker off.
3. After 30 seconds, turn the shelf circuit breaker on.
The equipment should automatically return to normal operation, without user
intervention and without any abnormal alarms in the system.
7-6
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Network Commissioning Tests

SDH Commissioning Tests
These commissioning tests check that SDH functionality is in accordance with
the system specifications.
Test equipment setup

The SDH tests are performed using an PDH analyzer, optical power meter, and
variable attenuators. Configure the optical power meter according to the
measured wavelength.
The test conditions for the various interfaces are described in the following
sections.
2 Mbps tests
For 2 Mbps tributaries, configure the test equipment as follows:
Framing
Unframed
Coding
HDB3
Pattern
2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate
2 Mbps
Timing
Received clock
Inject error
Code error
34 Mbps tests
Framing
Unframed
Coding
HDB3
Pattern
2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate
34 Mbps
Timing
Received clock
Inject error
Code error
417006-2318-0H3-A02
7-7
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
45 Mbps tests
Framing
Unframed
Coding
45 frame = C-bit
X-bit = 11
Pattern
2*10-15 PRBS
Signal rate
45 Mbps
Timing
Received clock
Inject error
Code error
SDH tests
For SDH tests, configure the test equipment according to the interface type
being tested, as follows:
Signal rate
STM-1, STM-4, or STM-16
Mapping
Any mapping (preferably bulk)
Framing
Off
Pattern
2 * 10-15 PRBS
Timing
Received clock
Inject error
Code error
Network timing synchronization test

This test checks that the XDM-900 NEs synchronize properly and switch to the
next priority clock source when a failure occurs.
7-8
No.
Test procedure
1.
Define one NE as the internal

clock to which all other NEs are
synchronized (an external source
may also be used).
2.
Define several priorities for the

timing source.
3.
Disconnect the Rx fiber

connected to the NE serving as
the main timing source.
Expected results
If the NE has a single timing source:

An alarm is generated for the main
timing source.
NE timing is set in holdover mode.
If the NE has several timing sources:
NE timing is synchronized to the
second priority timing source.
An alarm is generated for the loss of
the main timing source.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Loss of Signal (LOS) detection test

This test verifies that the NEs recognize alarms and send the alarm notification
to the management system for viewing.
No.
Test procedure
1.
Create the NEs and links using

the management station.
2.
Disconnect the Rx optical fiber

from one of the modules.
Expected results
A LOS and other alarms generated by

the disconnection appear at the SPI
level of this module port.
Input sensitivity test

This test verifies that the input sensitivity of the XDM-900 optical modules is
according to specification.
No.
Test procedure
1.
Create one unprotected trail of

any rate between two NEs.
2.
Connect test equipment to one

NE and perform a loopback at the
other NE (in the relevant
endpoint ports).
3.
Connect a variable optical

attenuator to one of the fibers of
the relevant trail, and set the
attenuator to 0 dB.
4.
Increase the attenuation gradually

until the test equipment displays
a burst of errors.
5.
Connect an optical power meter

to the first Rx point after the
variable optical attenuator and
measure the total power; the
measured optical power level is
the input sensitivity of the
module.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Expected results
Verify that the results are in accordance

with the XDM-900 System
Specifications.
7-9
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Equipment power-on test

This test verifies that the XDM-900 NEs continue operating properly after a
power break, without operator involvement.
No.
Test procedure
1.
Create an unprotected trail at any

rate between two NEs.
2.

endpoint ports).
3.
Shut off the power to one of the

non-gateway NEs within the
relevant trail.
4.
Power on the NE and wait for it

to perform initial download to all
cards/modules in the shelf. (This
can take 20 minutes.) Verify that
the NE is connected to the
management station and that
there are no relevant alarms in
the test equipment or at the
management station.
Expected results
Errors and an Alarm Indication Signal

(AIS) alarm appear in the test
equipment. After approximately 7
minutes, an "NE disconnected" alarm
appears in the management current
alarm list, and the NE icon turns gray
(no communication).
Traffic stability test

This test verifies that traffic operates according to ITU-T standards.
7-10
No.
Test procedure
Expected results
1.
Create an unprotected trail at any rate

between two NEs.
2.
Connect test equipment to one NE and

perform a loopback at the other NE (in
the relevant endpoint ports).
3.
Run this test for the appropriate time

interval according to the table below.
4.
Verify that no alarms appear in the test You should achieve an error free
equipment or at the management station. rate of 1 x 10-11 for 2 Mbps and 1
x 10-12 for all other rates.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Table 7-4:
Traffic stability test time intervals
2 Mbps
34/45 Mbps
STM-1/
VC-3
STM-4/VC-12
STM-16/VC-48
14 hours
7 hours
120 min
30 min
8 min
Path protection and nonretrieval test

This test verifies that SNCP traffic operates properly when a failure occurs.
No.
Test procedure
1.
Create one protected trail at any

2.

endpoint ports).
3.
Disconnect one of the fibers in

the active path of the trail.
4.
Verify that the trail carries traffic

properly on the protection path.
5.
Reconnect the optical fiber.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Expected results
Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec

appear in the test equipment, and the
management station reports an alarm in
The trail continues using the protection

path (non-retrieve mode), and the test
equipment indicates no alarm.
7-11
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
MSP test
This test verifies that MSP traffic in the XDM-900 network operates properly
when a failure occurs.
MSP can be applied in a point-to-point configuration.
7-12
No.
Test procedure
1.
Create one unprotected trail at

2.

endpoint ports).
3.

4.
Verify that the trail works

properly on the protection path.
5.
Expected results

management station reports an alarm in
The trail remains on the protection path.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
MS-SPRing test
This test verifies that the MS-SPRing traffic operates properly when a failure
occurs.
This procedure uses a SAM-16 and an MXC card.
No.
Test procedure
1.
Define the ring as MS-SPRing

Node Links - east and west
clockwise.
2.
Create one unprotected trail of

3.

endpoint ports).
4.

the path of the trail.

trail switches to the protection path and
operates properly.
Management station reports an alarm in
the active path of the trail and LOS
alarms related to the disconnected fibers.
5.
The alarms related to the disconnected

fibers clear.
After the retrieve time (user-definable),
the trail switches back to the main path,
and short alarm bursts of less than 50
msec appear in the test equipment.
6.
Switch back to the main path.
The trail operates properly.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Expected results
7-13
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
IOP hardware protection test

This test verifies that the traffic defined on a card with hardware protection
operates properly when a failure occurs.
7-14
No.
Test procedure
Expected results
1.
Using at least one module that has

hardware protection, create one
unprotected trail of any rate
between two NEs. You can use a
module that has the trail passing
through it (for example, SIM) or
ending on it (for example, PIM).
2.
Connect test equipment to one NE

and perform a loopback at the
other NE (in the relevant endpoint
ports).
3.
Extract the protected (working)

module.

management station reports an alarm on
the trail.
4.
Verify that the trail works

properly via the protection
(standby) module.
The orange protection LED on the

relevant TPM lights.
5.
Reinsert the protected (working)

module.
After 5 minutes (system default - can be

changed), the traffic reverts back to the
protected module. Short alarm bursts of
less than 50 msec appear in the test
equipment, and the management station
reports no alarm on the trail.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Severity assignment test

This test, which is performed on one XDM-900 NE, determines the level of
urgency accorded to each alarm and creates an alarm-handling protocol.
When a fault is detected or removed, the NE updates the status of the LEDs and
reports the alarm activation or clearing to the management station.
No.
Test procedure
Expected results
1.
Extract an NVM card from the

MXC card.
The management station displays an

NVM Card Out alarm of Major severity.
2.
Reinsert the NVM card.
The Card Out alarm on the management

station clears.
3.
Change the severity of the Card

out alarm for the NVM card to
Minor.
4.
Extract the NVM card.
The management station displays an

NVM Card Out alarm of Minor severity.
5.
Reinsert the NVM card.
The Card Out alarm on the management

station clears.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
7-15
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Transmission alarm handling tests

This test verifies that the XDM-900 NEs can recognize an alarm and send an
alarm notification to the management system, and that the management system
displays it properly.
This procedure tests the following alarms: PDH-LOS, PDH-AIS, and SPI-LOS.
7-16
No.
Test procedure
Expected results
1.

2.

endpoint ports).
3.
Disconnect the Tx cable of the

test equipment.
The management station reports a LOS

alarm for the relevant PDH port.
4.
Set the test equipment to send an

AIS (AIS = on).
The management station reports an AIS

alarm for the corresponding port.
5.
Disconnect the Rx fiber of an

optical port.
The management station reports a LOS

(SPI-LOS) alarm for the corresponding
port.
If ALS is off, the management station
reports a far-end optical port MS-RDI
or Line-RDI alarm.
If ALS is on, the management station
reports a far-end optical port LOS
alarm.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Maintenance actions tests

This test verifies that maintenance actions can be performed in the XDM-900
NEs using the management system.
This procedure tests a near-end loopback, forced PDH AIS, forced low-rate
RDI, forced high-rate RDI, and forced MS-RDI.
No.
Test procedure
1.
Create one unprotected trail at any

2.

other NE (in the relevant endpoint
ports).
3.
Perform a near-end loopback at

the other trail endpoint.
4.
Using the management station,

execute a forced AIS on the PDH
port that connects to the test
equipment.
Expected results
The PDH test equipment detects an AIS

alarm.
MXC redundancy test

This test verifies that the backup MXC operates properly and that the database
is not lost when a failure occurs.
No.
Test procedure
1.

2.

endpoint ports).
3.
Select an NE that passes the trail, Neither the test equipment nor the
and extract the MXC on slot A
management station detects a traffic
(upper).
alarm, but a Card Out alarm for the MXC
appears in the management.
After several minutes, the NE
disconnects from the management station
(turns gray), and then reconnects to the
management with the same database
(switches to the redundant MXC). The
Info windows of both MXCs display the
correct status.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Expected results
7-17
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Data Network Commissioning Tests

The data network commissioning tests check that data functionality is in
accordance with system specifications.
Throughput and latency tests

These tests determine the time it takes to transmit frames through the network
and the maximum amount of data that can pass through the network before
frames are lost.
No.
Test procedure
Expected results
1.
Create two unprotected trails at any rate

between two NEs in the network.
2.
Connect the test equipment to both ports of

one NE.
3.
Connect a cross cable on both ports of the

other NE.
4.
Configure the test equipment for measurement

of throughput and latency in accordance with
RFC-2544.
5.
Measure throughput and latency for frame

sizes 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 1280, and 1518
bytes, and record the results in the appropriate
table.
NOTE:
Table 7-5:
Measured latency is for both the forward and return paths.

For a single path, the latency will be 50% of the measured
value.
The latency test is dependent on the throughput results.
For example, if 10 Mbps is tested and the throughput is
4%, the latency test should be for 4 Mbps (2 * VC-12 = 4
Mbps).
Inject traffic according to the assigned bandwidth
(VC-12 = 2.048 Mbps).
Throughput and latency test results
LAN port & speed
64 bytes/
frame
128
bytes/
frame
256 bytes/ 512

frame
bytes/
frame
1024
bytes/
frame
1280
bytes/
frame
Throughput
Latency
7-18
417006-2318-0H3-A02
1518
bytes/
frame

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Frame loss rate test

This test determines the number of frames that are lost when the system is
overloaded.
Table 7-6:
Frame loss rate test procedure
No.
Test procedure
1.
Create two unprotected trails at

any rate (for example, 10/100
Mbps or 1 Gbps) between two
NEs.
2.
Connect the test equipment to

both ports of one NE.
3.
Connect a cross cable on both

ports of the other NE (in the
relevant endpoint ports).
4.
Configure the test equipment for

measurement of frame loss in
accordance with RFC-2544. Set
for 100%.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Expected results
The frame loss rate in % is defined

according to the following formula:
[(Input fps) (Output fps)] x 100/(Input
fps)
Where fps stands for frames per second.
Example: At 100 Mbps with 5 VC-12s
(10 Mbps), the Input fps is 148810.
When the Output fps is 14881, the
frame loss is 148810 14881 = 133929,
which represents 90% loss.
7-19
Commissioning Tests
Table 7-7:

Maintenance Manual
Frame loss rate test results
Frame size 64 bytes/ 128

frame
bytes/
frame
256 bytes/ 512

frame
bytes/
frame
1024
bytes/
frame
1280
bytes/
frame
1518
bytes/
frame
Frame rate
(% MFR)
100%
System recovery and reset tests

These tests determine the speed at which a device recovers from a buffer
overflow condition and from a power failure.
7-20
No.
Test procedure
Expected results
1.

NEs.
2.

3.

4.

manual testing according to the
port rate, and for any frame size.
5.
Power off one of the NEs.
Verify packet loss in the test equipment.
6.
Turn on the NE and wait for 2

minutes.
Verify that the errors in the test

equipment have cleared.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Stability test
This test determines the stability of the network by checking that it can
function with no errors for a defined period of time.
No.
Test procedure
1.

NEs.
2.

3.

4.

manual testing according to the
port rate, and for any frame size.
5.
Run this test for 2 hours.
Expected results
Verify that no errors appear in the test

equipment.
Alarm handling test

This test checks the alarm conditions forced on the NE and the subsequent
action carried out by the NE. It tests signal loss to both the data LAN port and
to the optical interfaces.
No.
Test procedure
1.
Create two trails at any rate (for

example, 10/100 Mbps) between
two NEs.
2.

3.

4.
Disconnect the test equipment to

create a signal loss to the data
LAN port.
A 10/100 Mbps - Link Down alarm is

generated (only if VLAN is created).
5.
Disconnect the optical cable to

create a signal loss to the optical
interface.
An SPI LOS alarm on the optical

interface is generated.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Expected results
7-21
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Optical Network Commissioning Tests

The optical network commissioning tests verify normal network operation.
Perform these tests only after the entire network is complete.
Test setup and required test equipment

Optical network commissioning tests check the performance of transmission
paths within the network. To perform these tests, use an optical spectrum
analyzer, optical power meter, variable attenuator, and optical BER tester.
Configure the BER tester to operate at the transponder transmission rate (for
example, STM-16 when connected to a CTRP25).
The following figure shows the test setup for the optical commissioning tests.
Figure 7-1: Optical commissioning tests setup
7-22
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Optical power measurement test

This test verifies that all optical cards/modules and all optical links are
operating according to the optical power budget plan and XDM-900
specifications.
No.
Test procedure
Expected results
1.
Using an optical power meter, measure

the input and output optical levels of
each optical component (card, module,
and so on). Record the results of all the
measurements (Excel file); these results
provide the information needed to
evaluate the optical budget of the
network.
The measurement results are

within the range of minimum and
maximum levels specified for
each type of optical component
(see XDM System
Specifications).
2.
Using an optical spectrum analyzer,

measure the following parameters for
each link:
Spectrum of the composite line
signal
Power per channel
OSNR (Optical Signal to Noise
Ratio)
Gain tilt
For this purpose, measure the optical
signals at the input and output of each
active and passive optical component
(optical booster, preamplifier, OADM,
MUX, DEMUX, supervisory channel
interfaces, and so on).
The measured levels are within

the range expected in accordance
with the planned optical network
power budget.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
7-23
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Equipment power-on test

This test verifies that the XDM-900 NEs continue operating normally after a
power break, without operator involvement.
No.
Test procedure
Expected results
1.
Select one of the optical paths in

the network.
2.

NE and perform a loopback at
the other NE (in the relevant
TRPs).
3.
Shut off the power to one of the

non-gateway NEs within the
relevant optical path.
4.
Power on the NE and wait for it Can take up to 20 minutes.

to perform initial download to all
cards in the shelf.
5.
Verify that the NE is connected

to the management station and
that there are no alarms related
to the relevant optic path in the
test equipment or at the
management station.
An alarm appears in the test equipment

and the management station.
After approximately seven minutes, an
"NE disconnected" alarm appears in the
management current alarm list, and the
NE icon turns gray (no communication).
LOS detection test

This test verifies that the XDM-900 NEs recognize alarms and send the alarm
notification to the management system for viewing.
7-24
No.
Test procedure
Expected results
1.
Disconnect the Rx optical fiber

from one of the optical modules.
A LOS alarm at the SPI level of this

module post appears, together with other
alarms caused by the disconnection.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Input sensitivity test

This test verifies that the input sensitivity of the XDM-900 optical
cards/modules is according to their technical specification.
No.
Test procedure
1.
Select one of the optical

transmission paths in the
network.
2.

one NE and perform a loopback
at the other NE (in the relevant
TRPs).
3.
Connect a variable optical

attenuator to one of the fibers of
the relevant path.
4.
Set the attenuator to 0 dB.
5.
Slowly increase the attenuation

until the test equipment displays
a burst of errors.
6.
Connect an optical power meter

to the first Rx point after the
variable optical attenuator and
measure the total power.
Expected results
The measured optical power level is the

input sensitivity of the card.
Path protection test

This test verifies that the protected traffic operates properly when a failure
occurs.
No.
Test procedure
1.
Select one of the protected

optical paths in the network.
2.

other NE (in the relevant TRPs).
3.
Disconnect one of the optical

fibers in the active path of the
optical channel.
4.
Verify that the optical channel

works properly on the protection
path.
5.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Expected results

appear in the test equipment and
management station.
The optical channel remains on the

protection path (non-retrieve mode), and
no alarm appears in the test equipment.
7-25
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance action handling test

This test verifies that maintenance actions can be performed in the XDM-900
NEs using the management system. This procedure tests a manual switch,
forced switch, and switch lockout.
7-26
No.
Test procedure
1.
Select one of the protected optical

transmission paths in the network.
2.

3.
From the management system,

perform a manual switch.
4.

works properly on the protection
path.
5.
Disconnect the line input of the

nonactive TRP from its MUX.
6.

7.

works properly on the main path.
8.

nonactive TRP from its DEMUX.
9.
From the management station,

10.

perform a switch lockout on the
nonactive TRP.
11.

active TRP from its DEMUX.
Expected results

appear in the test equipment.

appear in the test equipment.
The optical channel switches to the

protected path, and a LOS alarm
appears in the test equipment.
The optical channel does not switch to

the protected path, and a LOS alarm
appears in the test equipment.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
BER and stability test

This test verifies that the optical channels in the XDM-900 optical network
operate without errors (according to ITU-T standards).
No.
Test procedure
1.
Select one of the protected

optical paths in the network.
2.

3.
Run this test for the appropriate

time interval according to the
following table.
4.
Verify that no alarms appear in

the test equipment or at the
management station.
Table 7-8:
Expected results
You should achieve an error free rate of

1 x 10-12.
BER and Stability Test time intervals
Rate
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
Time period
120 min
30 min
8 min
417006-2318-0H3-A02
7-27
Commissioning Tests
7-28

Maintenance Manual
417006-2318-0H3-A02
8
Maintenance
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 8-1
Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials ............................................. 8-1
Preventive Maintenance .................................................................................. 8-2
Traffic Monitoring System .............................................................................. 8-7
Onsite Troubleshooting ................................................................................. 8-12
Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 8-20
Replacing RAP Components ......................................................................... 8-28
Overview
This chapter provides maintenance procedures for XDM-900 equipment.
Required Test Equipment, Tools,

and Materials
For most maintenance activities described in this chapter, only a Craft terminal
and a multimeter are required. If you need to make measurements, it is
recommended to use equipment of the same type and models used for
commissioning tests (page 7-1). The tools and materials necessary for
equipment installation must also be available during maintenance.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
8-1
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Preventive Maintenance
The purpose of the preventive maintenance activities is to keep the XDM-900
hardware in good condition, and detect and correct as soon as possible any
condition that may lead to deterioration and equipment malfunction.
Record the execution of the various activities and their results according to the
procedures used in your organization.
Table 8-1:
Item
Preventive maintenance inspection and checks
Inspection/Check
Intervals*
W
8-2
1.
Visually inspect the condition of cables and fibers. Check for

correct routing (no sharp bends) and proper support to avoid
stress. Avoid touching fibers during the inspection, except as
required to correct problems.
2.
Inspect equipment racks and cases, connection terminals,

grounding, and so on, and pay special attention to any signs of
corrosion.
3.
Check condition of rack front doors and RFI fingers. Clean as

necessary with approved cleaning agents.
4.
Whenever applicable, inspect ancillary equipment (air

conditioners, lighting, distribution panels, and so on) and their
power sources.
5.
Check that all unused optical connectors are covered by

protective covers. Add covers as necessary.
6.
Check that cards and modules are securely attached: all

extractor handles must be in the storage position (parallel to the
card edge), and all module fastening screws must be tight
(tighten only manually).
7.
Check for proper operation of the FCU900 (no abnormal noise

and vibrations) in all NEs.
8.
Check that the FCU900 is fully inserted in its chassis position

and that its screws are tight.
9.
Clean the FCU900 and inspect the air filters. Clean or replace
the air filters if necessary.
10.
Clean all areas around the shelf in the rack and the rack's front
door (if applicable), using a vacuum cleaner.
11.
Check that the cables connecting the DC power sources (main

and backup) to the RAP are properly connected.
12.
Check that the external alarm cables are properly connected to

the RAP.
13.
Check that there are no alarm indications on the cards and

modules.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Item
Maintenance
Inspection/Check
Intervals*
W
14.
Check that all RAP LEDs turn on and that the buzzer sounds
X
when the POWER ON pushbutton on the RAP panel is pressed.
Note: The buzzer will not sound if the ACO is active.
15.
Check that all card and module LEDs turn on when the LED
TEST pushbutton on the ECU900 panel is pressed.
16.
Perform a visual check of LED indications.
17.
Check the proper operation of the OW system (if applicable to

the NE).
*Legend:
W weekly
M monthly
Q quarterly
Air Filter Preventive Maintenance

Air particles trapped by the air filter increase the resistance to airflow, and can
eventually decrease the airflow below the minimum required for proper cooling
of internal components. The resulting increase in the internal temperature of the
equipment reduces the equipment reliability and performance. Therefore,
whenever an air filter is installed, it must periodically be cleaned or replaced
with a clean filter.
It is accepted throughout the electronics equipment industry to recommend
cleaning or replacing air filters approximately every 90 days. However, the
cleaning intervals depend on the specific environmental conditions. In dusty
environments more frequent cleaning is required. Note that foam filters, which
are the type used in XDM platforms, efficiently trap particles without showing
face loading of contaminants, and therefore visual inspection cannot be used to
determine cleaning intervals.
CAUTION: Filter cleaning intervals must strictly be
observed, as clogging by trapped particles can severely impair
equipment reliability and performance.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
8-3
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Recommended Cleaning Methods

Use the following methods (listed in order of ascending efficiency) to clean air
filters:
1. Vacuum clean: A few passes of a vacuum cleaner remove accumulated
dust and dirt in seconds. Point the air nozzle in the direction of operating
airflow (vacuum from intake side toward exhaust side).
2. Blow with compressed air: Point a compressed air nozzle in the opposite
direction of the operating airflow (blow from the exhaust side toward the
intake side).
NOTE: Oily residues and moisture reduce cleaning efficiency
of the above methods; in such cases, clean the filter using
method No. 4, or replace the filter.
3. Cold water rinse: Under normal service conditions, the foam media used
in the filters require no oily adhesives. Therefore, collected dust and dirt
can be washed away using a standard hose nozzle with plain water. Stand
the filter until completely dry and free of moisture, and return to service.
4. Immersion in warm soapy water: Where stubborn airborne dirt is present,
the filter may be dipped in a solution of warm water and mild detergent.
Then simply rinse in clear water, stand until completely dry and free of
moisture, and return to service.
The recommended method is No. 4, as it ensures thorough cleaning of all types
of contaminants under any reasonable service conditions.
8-4
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Cleaning the air filter

For the procedure steps, refer to the following figure.
Figure 8-1: Inserting the air filter
NOTE: The air filter can be removed and reinstalled while

the XDM-900 shelf is in operation.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
8-5
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
To clean the air filter:

1. Release the two thumbnuts fastening the filter in the upmost position.
2. Lower the filter frame and pull the filter out.
3. Inspect the filter for damage. If any damage (for example, holes or torn
material) is evident, replace the filter with a new one.
CAUTION: Replace the filter only with a filter of the original
type. Failure to do so can impair equipment reliability and
performance.
4. Clean the filter using the method selected by your organization.

5. Identify the filter's air intake side, indicated by the two coding tabs.
6. Insert the clean filter in the holding frame, lift the thumbnuts and fasten
them in place.
8-6
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Traffic Monitoring System

Principles of Operation
The XDM-900 incorporates a traffic monitoring system that enables rapid
allocation of major problems in the traffic passing through its aggregate and
I/O modules.
The XDM-900 monitoring system enables you to monitor traffic passing
through the I/O modules installed in slots I1 to I16 of the modules cages.
NOTE: I/O CWDM modules installed in the modules cage
slots are not supported by the monitoring system.
The main components of the monitoring system interface are located on the
ECU900-F front panel. These components, except for the monitoring point and
monitoring indicator, are common to all modules. In addition, the system has a
monitoring point and monitoring indicators on the front panel of the modules.
The PIM2_21, PIM2_63/B, and PIM345 have only one monitoring indicator
used for all their channels. STM-1 modules do not have a monitoring point, and
use the monitoring point on the ECU900-F card.
Figure 8-2: ECU900-F monitoring system interface
The system's common components on the ECU900-F are as follows:
MODULE selector
CHANNEL selector
MODULE, 2-digit display
CHANNEL, 2-digit display
417006-2318-0H3-A02
8-7
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
The ECU900-F components that serve only STM-1 modules are:
STM-1 MON monitoring point
MON indicator
The monitoring system components on the monitored modules include:
MON monitoring point
MON indicators
Figure 8-3: Monitoring system interface of a typical module
The monitoring system enables you to monitor traffic passing through a

module. To do so, test equipment is connected to the monitoring point of the
corresponding module, and the module and port are selected by the system's
selectors. As a result, the traffic is closed through the test equipment and the
signal can be viewed, in an eye pattern, on the test equipment display.
Selecting a module
The MODULE selector chooses the monitored module slot number. The
selected module is displayed on the 2-digit display to the right of the selector.
Pressing the selector upward increments the slot number; pressing it downward
decrements the slot number. The selection is cyclic. Possible selections are QA
and QB for the aggregate cards (I/O cards), and I1 to I16 for the I/O modules.
If the selected module is an STM-1, the MON indicator on the ECU900 lights.
8-8
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Selecting a channel
The CHANNEL selector chooses the specific monitored channel (port) on the
module selected. The selected channel is displayed on the 2-digit display to the
left of the selector. Pressing the selector upward increments the channel
number; pressing it downward decrements the channel number. The selection is
cyclic. Possible selections are from 00 to the module's maximum number of
channels. For example, in a PIM2_21 (which has 21 ports), the selection goes
from 00 to 21. When the value 00 is selected, the system blocks the monitoring
to the selected module.
In addition to the number of the selected channel shown on the display, a MON
indicator lights near the selected port on the module. If an STM-1 module is
selected, the MON indicator on the ECU900-F lights in addition to the LED
near the selected port on the module.
Stabilization time
The monitoring system has a stabilization time of approximately 1.5 seconds.
This means that after a new value is selected with the MODULE or
CHANNEL selectors, the display starts blinking for the stabilization time, and
only after that the new selection is displayed.
Response to events
This section describes the response of the monitoring system to the following
events:
Power-on
Cold restart
MXC900 switching to redundancy
Warm restart
ECU900 extraction/insertion
After power-on, the monitoring system displays 17 00. This is the default state,
and indicates slot QA and channel 00. Channel 00 is defined in the system as
idle state, and indicates that no channel was selected and that monitoring is
disabled. To enable the monitoring results, a module and a channel must be
selected.
The response of the system to MXC900 switching to redundancy is identical to
the response to cold restart.
Warm restart does not affect the traffic or monitoring of any modules in the
XDM-900.
After extracting/inserting the ECU900, the monitoring display is reset to the
default state 17 00, and the monitoring history stored in the ECU900 memory is
lost.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
8-9
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Assigning modules to slots

To monitor a module installed in a specific slot, the management system must
have previously assigned that module to the slot. If the module was not
assigned, the CHANNEL display will indicate 00 and remain in this state, even
if you attempt to change the selection.
If a module in a slot is replaced with a module of the same type, the display
will not change and the system will read the monitoring result for the channel
that was last selected. If a module has to be replaced with a module of a
different type, the new module must be assigned to the slot. Then, a new
MODULE and CHANNEL selection must be made.
Monitoring options
The system can monitor a number of channels in different modules
simultaneously. This feature is useful when traffic passing through different
modules in the XDM-900 has to be analyzed.
After monitoring channels of different modules, all selected channel numbers
of these modules are saved in the ECU900 memory.
You can connect test equipment to various modules or connect test equipment
with multiple inputs to simultaneously monitor the traffic passing through the
channels in these modules.
Monitoring Signal Levels

The following table lists the normal signal levels at the monitoring points for
the various modules.
Table 8-2:
Number of
channels (ports)
Signal rate and level
Module type
Monitoring point
SIM1_4/O
SIM1_4/OB
ECU900-F front
panel
155 Mbps, CMI
SIM1_4/E
ECU900-F front
panel
155 Mbps, CMI
SIM1_8
ECU900-F front
panel
155 Mbps, CMI
SIM4_2
Module front panel
622 Mbps, NRZ
SIM4_4
Module front panel
622 Mbps, NRZ
PIM2_21
Module front panel
21
2.048 Mbps, HDB-3
Module front panel
63
2.048 Mbps, HDB-3
Module front panel
34 or 45 Mbps, HDB-3
PIM2_63/B
PIM345_3
8-10
I/O modules monitoring data
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Monitoring Modules Traffic

Monitoring the traffic of STM-1 and other modules operating at a different rate
is similar, and differs only in the location of the monitoring point and LED
indicators.
To monitor the traffic in a non-STM-1 module:
1. Identify the slot number of the module to be monitored.
2. Connect the test equipment to the monitoring point.
3. Select the slot number of the monitored module using the MODULE
selector.
4. Select the channel number of the monitored port using the CHANNEL
selector.
5. Wait for the display to stabilize (stop blinking), and then verify that the
required slot and channel were selected.
6. Verify that the MON indicator of the selected channel lights.
7. Read the test result on the test equipment connected to the monitoring
point.
To monitor the traffic in an STM-1 module:
1. Identify the slot number of the module to be monitored.
2. Connect the test equipment to the monitoring point on the ECU900 card.
3. Perform Steps 3 to 5 in the previous section.
4. Verify that the MON indicator on the ECU900 card and the corresponding
MON indicator on the STM-1 module light.
5. Read the test result on the test equipment connected to the monitoring
point.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
8-11
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Onsite Troubleshooting
The purpose of onsite troubleshooting is to identify the hardware causing the
malfunction and return the equipment to normal operation as soon as possible.
Troubleshooting is usually initiated in response to one of the following
conditions:
Alarm or performance degradation reported by the management station.
Alarm or malfunction detected on site by maintenance personnel, either as

a result of a troubleshooting activity initiated by the management center
personnel or as a result of a periodic inspection or preventive maintenance
action. Many problems can be detected via the various indicators available
on the XDM-900 system components.
This chapter assumes familiarity with the XDM-900, with SDH, data, and
CWDM equipment, and with the LightSoft and EMS-XDM management
stations. Refer to the respective user manuals for details on the various
capabilities of the management stations, and for instructions on performing the
desired activities.
The following sections provide procedures for performing onsite
troubleshooting for various trouble categories, as well as for specific
subsystems, for example, OADMs, Mux/DeMux subsystems, and so on. For
each category, you will find a troubleshooting table that provides the
instructions for identifying the trouble.
To use the troubleshooting table:
1. Identify the closest description of the trouble symptoms under
Symptoms.
2. Perform the required corrective actions listed under Corrective actions in
the order in which they appear until the trouble is corrected.
8-12
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Troubleshooting Power Problems

Table 8-3:
Troubleshooting power problems
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
RAP POWER
ON indicator is
off.
Both main and

backup power
sources failed.
Corrective actions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Equipment problem.
1.
2.
3.
MXC900
ACTIVE
indicator is off.
No input power to
the corresponding
unit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3
MXC900 FAIL
indicator lights.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Technical failure in
the corresponding
unit.
Check the site power distribution system.

Check the DC voltage at the main and backup power
terminals of the RAP.
If the voltage is not within the correct range, check
cable connections up to the DC power distribution
panel, and make sure no fuses are blown.
Check the voltage supplied by the main and backup
power sources.
Check the power connections to the RAP.
Check the circuit breakers in the RAP and replace if
necessary.
Check the voltage at the MXC900 end of each power
cable. Replace the cable or repair the RAP if there is no
voltage present.
If after checking (as explained above) and reconnecting
a cable to the equipment, the circuit breaker trips again,
replace the corresponding MXC900 card.
If the problem occurs again after Step 2, remove all the
cards and modules from the shelf and reinsert them one
by one until you find the component causing the circuit
breaker to trip. Replace that component
Check the corresponding circuit breaker in the RAP;
reset any tripped breaker.
Check the circuit breakers in the RAP and replace if
necessary.
If the circuit breaker trips again, disconnect the cable
protected by the corresponding circuit breaker from the
equipment and check the voltage polarity.
Check the power cable condition and make sure that the
cable is not damaged and does not cause short circuits.
Check proper cable connection at both ends.
Replace the unit.
8-13
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Troubleshooting Using Component

Indicators
The management station will usually provide onsite personnel with a list of
suspected components.
Start the troubleshooting of a suspected component by checking its indicators.
These indicators, located on the various cards and modules, can help you to
rapidly and efficiently identify a malfunctioning component in accordance with
the procedures outlined in the following tables.
NOTE: See description of indicator functions in the
XDM-100 Product Line Reference Manual.
CAUTION: The following corrective actions are

traffic-affecting.
Table 8-4:
General troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause Corrective actions
Green ACT/AC
indicator is off.
Defective
indicator
Defective
card/module
Press the LED TEST pushbutton on the ECU900, and check

that the indicator lights. If not, replace the card/module.
1.
2.
2
Red FAIL/FL
indicator does
not turn off after
software
download (this
occurs after
power-on and
resetting).
Defective
card/module
1.
2.
3.
Card/module
Orange (traffic
not configured
carrying)
to carry traffic
indicator is off
when indicator is
supported.
Remove the card/module and wait a minute before

reinserting it. Make sure that you fully insert the card or
module in its slot.
If the ACT/AC indicator does not turn on after
reinsertion, replace the card/module.
Remove the card/module and wait a few minutes before
reinserting it. Make sure the ACT/AC indicator turns on
after the card/module is reinserted.
The FAIL/FL indicator must flash while software is
downloaded to the card/module. Wait until the software
download is complete and check that the FAIL/FL
indicator turns off.
If the FAIL/FL indicator turns on again, replace the
card/module.
Check with the management station operator if the

card/module has already been configured and provisioned; if
not, ignore the state of the orange indicator.
CAUTION: Before checking fiber break problems using an

OTDR (Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer), it is the user's
responsibility to disconnect the receiver port. Failure to do so
may damage the receiver irreparably.
8-14
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Table 8-5:
Maintenance
General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins
No.
Symptoms
Green transceiver The corresponding

state indicator is optical transmitter
off.
may have been
turned off by the
ALS function (see
note below).
Probable cause
Corrective actions
1.
2.
3.
2
Transceiver state Test equipment is

indicator lights in connected to the
red.
monitoring
connector of the
corresponding
plug-in.
Defective
transceiver.
When available, press the laser-on pushbutton of the

ECU900 to activate the corresponding laser.
If the problem persists, the laser automatically turns
off again after a few seconds. Check that all the fibers
are properly connected to the corresponding optical
transceiver.
Replace the transceiver if the problem is not corrected
after the transceiver is reinserted.
1.
For plug-in transceivers with monitoring connector:

the test equipment is connected to the monitoring
connector. This indication is provided for
identification purposes, and does not necessarily
indicate a malfunction.
1.
Disconnect the fibers connected to the transceiver and

remove it.
Reinstall the transceiver in its position, making sure to
fully engage its connector to the mating card
connector.
Replace the transceiver if the problem is not corrected
after the transceiver is reinserted.
2.
3.
NOTE: An optical port with ALS capability turns off its

transmitter when the corresponding receive signal is lost.
Turning the transmitter off may cause a chain reaction, which
turns the optical signals off in a whole section of the network
and generates a large number of alarms.
As a result, it may be difficult to identify the real cause of the
problem, and you may need to use the management station
log records to identify the port.
Table 8-6:
Troubleshooting procedures for electrical interface modules
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Corrective actions
Green AC
indicator is off.
Defective
indicator
Press the LED TEST pushbutton on the ECU900 and check

that the indicator lights. If not, replace the card/module.
Defective
module
1.
2.
2
Red FL
indicator does
not turn off
after software
download (this
occurs after
power-on and
resetting).
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Defective
module
1.
2.
3.
Remove the module and wait a minute before

reinserting it. Make sure that you fully insert the
module in its slot.
If the AC indicator does not turn on after reinsertion,
replace the module.
Remove the module and wait a few minutes before
reinserting it to reset. Make sure the AC indicator
turns on after the module is reinserted.
The FL indicator must flash while software is
downloaded to the module. Wait until the software
download ends and check that the FL indicator turns
off.
If the FL indicator turns on again, replace the module.
8-15
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Table 8-7:
Troubleshooting procedures for optical OADM and Mux/DeMux
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Green AC
indicator is off.
Defective
module
Corrective actions
1.
2.
2
Red FL
indicator does
not turn off
after software
download (this
occurs after
power-on and
resetting).
Table 8-8:
Defective
module
1.
2.
3.

reinserting it to reset. Make sure the AC indicator turns
on after the module is reinserted.
downloaded to the component. Wait until the software
off.
Troubleshooting procedures for EISMs
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Green AC
indicator is off.
Defective
module
Corrective actions
1.
2.
1.

reinserting it. Make sure that you fully insert the card in
its slot.
replace the module.
Red FL indicator
on the module
does not turn off
after software
download (this
occurs after
power-on and
resetting).
Defective
module
Orange (traffic
carrying)
indicator on
module is off.
Module not
configured to
carry traffic
Green (link state) Problem related

to port
indicator of an
Ethernet optical
port is off.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check port configuration.

Check connections to LAN.
Make sure at least one LAN station is active.
Replace optical transceiver of port.
Link state
indicator of an
10/100BaseT
Ethernet port is
off.
Problem related
to port
1.
2.
3.
Check port configuration.

Check connections to LAN.
Make sure at least one LAN station is active.
8-16

reinserting it. Make sure that you fully insert the
module in its slot.
replace the module.
2.
3.

reinserting it to reset. Make sure the AC indicator turns
on after the module is reinserted.
downloaded to the module. Wait until the software
off.
Check with the management station operator whether the

module has already been configured and provisioned; if not,
ignore the state of the orange indicator.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Troubleshooting the Timing Subsystem

Table 8-9:
Troubleshooting procedures for timing subsystem
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Corrective actions
Switching to
standby TMU
Technical failure
Force switching of traffic to the other MXC900,

and then replace the MXC900 card with the
defective TMU.
Missing T3/BITS IN
external reference signal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Missing T4/BITS OUT
external reference signal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Loss of reference clock

source provided by a
tributary
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Check the equipment providing the external

reference signal and make sure it operates
normally.
Check the cable connected to the
corresponding ECU900-F connector. Make
sure both its ends are properly connected to
the mating connector.
Check the cable wiring. Replace the cable if
in doubt.
Replace the corresponding ECU900-F.
Check the cable connected to the
corresponding ECU900-F connector. Make
sure both its ends are properly connected to
the mating connector.
Check the cable wiring. Replace the cable if
in doubt.
Replace the corresponding ECU900-F.
Force switching of traffic to the other
MXC900, and then replace the MXC900 with
the defective TMU.
Troubleshoot the corresponding module and

replace it if found faulty.
8-17
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Troubleshooting Transmission and Traffic

Alarms
Before any other troubleshooting activity, check the management station log to
check if a specific component has been reported as faulty and replace it.
CAUTION: Before checking fiber break problems using an
OTDR (Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer), it is the user's
responsibility to disconnect the receiver port. Failure to do so
may damage the receiver irreparably.
Table 8-10: Troubleshooting transmission and traffic alarms
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Alarm related
to a client
signal
External problem
Corrective actions
1.
2.
Alarm related
to a line signal
External problem
1.
2.
3.
8-18
Check the proper operation of the equipment providing

the tributary signal and its connections to the XDM-900
I/O port.
Use the results of the commissioning tests as a reference
for the required signal levels, and make measurements
of current levels at all the relevant monitoring points.
Compare the reference levels with the measured values;
a significant discrepancy may point to the failed
component (for example, low transmit level, excessive
fiber attenuation due to physical damage, and so on).
Check the proper operation of the equipment providing
the line signal and its connections to the XDM-900 port.
Use the network and site documentation to identify the
path associated with the reported alarm and all related
optical and/or electrical components. Use the results of
the commissioning tests as a reference for the required
signal levels, and make measurements of current levels
at all the relevant monitoring points through the
management.
Compare the reference levels with the measured values;
a significant discrepancy may point to the failed
component (for example, low transmit level, excessive
fiber attenuation due to physical damage, and so on).
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Troubleshooting Management
Communication
When the management station cannot manage an XDM-900 shelf, use the
following table to identify the cause of the problem.
NOTE: Whenever you detect problems during
commissioning tests and when troubleshooting a new
installation, do not overlook the possibility of configuration
and/or provisioning errors. Under such circumstances, always
start the troubleshooting procedures by reviewing all
equipment configuration and provisioning parameters against
the original network design, and correct as necessary.
Table 8-11: Troubleshooting management communication

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Problems in
management
traffic path
Defective
card/module in
management
traffic path
Corrective actions
1.
Problem in
transmission path
1.
2.
2.
3.
Other problems
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Check for fault indications on the cards processing the

management communication (see General
troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules).
Force switching to the protection path and reset each
component. Use the results of the BIT test to identify
the faulty component.
Use the network and site documentation to identify the
path of the management communication to the
corresponding XDM shelf and all the related optical
components.
Use the results of the commissioning tests as a
reference for the required signal levels, and make
measurements of current levels at all the relevant
monitoring points through the management.
Compare the reference levels with the measured
values; a significant discrepancy may point to the
failed component (for example, low transmit level,
excessive fiber attenuation due to physical damage,
and so on).
Replace suspected components in the following sequence:

1. Hubs and Ethernet cables used for management traffic
2. ECU900
3. MXC900
8-19
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Replacing Cards and Modules

Safety and Workmanship
Refer to Before You Start/Safety Guidelines (page 1-1) for safety and
workmanship instructions.
CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices
PROPER HANDLING AND GROUNDING
PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED
XDM-900 equipment contains components sensitive to ESD.
To prevent ESD damage, strictly observe all the precautions
listed in Protection against ESD. Keep parts and cards in their
antistatic packaging material until you are ready to install
them.
Use an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded
equipment frame or rack when handling cards and modules
during installation, removal, or connection to internal
connectors.
Before you start:

When inserting cards and modules, make sure to align the card or module
carefully with the platform guide rails. If you feel resistance during insertion,
immediately retract the card/module and repeat the process.
Hold the card/module straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it
slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent
cards/modules.
Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening screws of cards and
modules.
Visually inspect the card and the mating backplane connectors and make sure
that there are no signs of physical damage. In particular, check for bent
connector pins.
8-20
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Before replacing any card, module, NVM, or optical

transceiver:
1. Check that the replacement component has not been physically damaged
during shipment.
2. Remove the replacement component from its antistatic protection
packaging and inspect visually to detect damage during shipment. Report
any problems.
3. Record the hardware and software versions as indicated on the component
identification labels, and make sure they are compatible with those of the
component to be replaced.
After replacing a component:
1. Place it in its antistatic protection packaging and close it.
2. Attach a report to the package explaining the reason for the replacement,
and identify the network site, physical location, platform, and time of
replacement.
Replacing MXC900 Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for the MXC900.
CAUTION:
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Do not extract/insert an MXC900 while the DC cables are

connected to it.
blink simultaneously, the MXC900 is not mounted
correctly or not all four screws are properly locked.
Before attempting to remove the card, monitor its NVM
(yellow) indicator; remove the card only after this
indicator has been off for at least 2 minutes.
8-21
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
To replace the MXC900:

1. Initiate a forced switching to the other MXC900.
2. Wait until the NVM (yellow) indicator of the MXC900 to be replaced turns
off and remains off for at least 2 minutes, and then remove the NVM card
as described in Replacing the NVM on MXC900 cards. It is recommended
to wait until the yellow indicator of the other MXC900 card also turns off.
CAUTION: When replacing any MXC900 card, the upper left
screw operates a microswitch. When this screw is open, it
indicates to the XDM-900 platform that the MXC900 is not
installed. This screw must be opened first when replacing an
MXC900 card.
3. Open the MXC900 upper left screw first, then the upper right screw, and
then the two lower screws.
4. Hold both extractor handles and pull them simultaneously outward until the
card is released from the backplane.
5. Keep holding the handles, and gently pull the card out of the shelf.
6. If necessary, transfer the NVM from the replaced MXC900 card to its
replacement (see Replacing the NVM on MXC900 cards).
7. Insert the rear end of the replacement card into the corresponding card
guides.
8. Push the cards front panel with both hands until the extractor handles
attach to the panel.
9. Push the card in by holding both handles and pushing them simultaneously
inward, until the card mates the chassis connectors and is locked in place. If
you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and
10. Close the cards upper left screws first, then the upper right screw, and then
the two lower screws.
NOTE: Make sure that all four screws in the MXC900 are
properly tightened. Failing to do so may result in improper
operation of the shelf.
blink simultaneously, the MXC is not mounted correctly or
not all four screws are properly locked.
8-22
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Replacing the NVM on MXC900 Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for the NVM.
CAUTION: To prevent disruption of data stored on the NVM,
make sure you do not open the NVM cover while the
MXC900 accesses the NVM. Before attempting to remove
the NVM, monitor the NVM (yellow) indicator; open the
NVM cover only after the NVM indicator on the MXC900
has been off for at least 2 minutes.
To replace the NVM:

1. Force switch to the other MXC900.
2. Wait until the NVM (yellow) indicator of the MXC900 on which the NVM
is to be replaced turns off, and remains off for at least 2 minutes.
3. Open the two captive screws fastening the NVM cover to the MXC900.
4. Press the NVM release pushbutton, using the NVM cover edge as an
extractor tool.
5. Carefully extract the NVM from the MXC900.
6. Orient the replacement NVM in the correct position and push it straight
into its socket.
7. Replace the NVM's cover, and fasten it to the MXC900 with its two captive
screws.
At this stage, you may either wait for the automatic updating of the database
stored on the new NVM (this may take up to one hour), or immediately force a
switching to the MXC900 on which the NVM has been replaced.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
8-23
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Replacing ECU900/ ECU900-F Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for the ECU900/ ECU900-F.
CAUTION: Replace the ECU900/ ECU900-F card as rapidly
as possible. While the ECU900/ ECU900-F card is out,
management, debugging, T3/T4 synchronization, and other
tasks supported by this card are not possible.
Before attempting to remove the card, monitor the NVM
(yellow) and TMU (orange) indicators of the MXC900
installed in the shelf; remove the ECU900/ ECU900-F only
after the MXC900 indicators have been off for at least 2
minutes.
To replace the ECU900/ ECU900-F:

1. Mark each cable connected to the card for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect the cables connected to the ECU900/ ECU900-F.
3. Open the two captive screws fastening the card to the shelf.
4. Remove the card to be replaced by pulling its handle.
5. Insert the rear end of the replacement card in the corresponding card
guides.
6. Push the card in until it mates the chassis connectors. If you feel resistance
7. Fasten the card to the shelf by its two captive screws.
8. Reconnect the cables disconnected in Step 2 to the replacement card.
8-24
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Replacing I/O Modules

The following procedure is applicable to all I/O modules.
Before you start:
For modules with electrical interfaces that use electrical interface protection via
TPMs, first force a switch to the protection module (IOP) before replacing the
module.
To replace I/O modules:
1. Mark each cable and fiber connected to the module for identification
purposes.
2. Disconnect any cables or fibers connected to the module to be replaced.
3. Open the captive screws fastening the module to the shelf.
4. Remove the module to be replaced by pulling its handle.
5. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding
module guides.
6. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors. If you feel
resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and repeat
the procedure.
7. Fasten the module to the shelf by its captive screws.
8. Reconnect any cables or fibers disconnected in Step 2 to the replacement
module.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
8-25
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Replacing SFP/XFP Transceivers

ECI Telecom's Network Solutions Division supplies field-replaceable SFP/XFP
transceivers. Hot swapping is allowed, provided you observe all the safety
precautions described in Laser Device Operating Precautions during the
replacement.
To replace an SFP/XFP transceiver:
1. Mark each fiber connected to the transceiver for identification purposes.
2. Identify the position of the SFP/XFP transceiver to be replaced.
3. Disconnect the fibers connected to the transceiver.
4. Remove the transceiver plug-in by pulling its tab.
5. Insert the rear end of the replacement transceiver plug-in into the prescribed
position, and push slowly backward to mate its rear connector with the
corresponding optical interface module connector until the transceiver
clicks into place (see the following figure). If you feel resistance before the
transceiver plug-in is fully inserted, retract the transceiver and repeat the
insertion.
Figure 8-4: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module
6. Reconnect the fibers disconnected in Step 3.
8-26
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Replacing the FCU900

The FCU900 can be replaced without disconnecting the power from the
XDM-900 shelf.
CAUTION: To prevent the shelf overheating, complete the
replacement within 2 to 3 minutes.
To replace the FCU900:

1. Prepare the replacement FCU900 so you can install it immediately after
removing the old FCU900. In particular, carefully inspect the interior of the
FCU900 to ensure that no foreign matter, for example, packaging chips, is
present inside the unit.
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the FCU900 to the shelf.
3. Carefully remove the FCU900 to be replaced by slowly pulling it out of the
shelf. Be aware that the internal fans may still be rotating.
4. Insert the replacement FCU900 in the corresponding shelf guides, and push
it carefully in until the FCU900 fully engages the mating internal connector
of the XDM-900 shelf. Make sure that the FCU900 front panel is flush with
the shelf frame front edges. As the FCU900 is plugged into its mating
connector, the green ACTIVE indicator on its panel should turn on.
5. Fasten the FCU900 to the shelf by its two captive screws.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
8-27
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Replacing RAP Components

This section describes how to replace RAP components identified as faulty via
the troubleshooting procedures described in this chapter.
Replacing xRAP-100 Circuit Breakers

xRAP-100 circuit breakers can be replaced without disconnecting the power
(hot swapping).
To replace the xRAP-100 circuit breakers:
1. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover to its
chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure).
2. Identify the faulty circuit breaker and remove it by pulling it straight out of
its socket.
3. Check the replacement circuit breaker ratings against those of the replaced
circuit breaker.
WARNING: For continued protection against risk of fire,
replace only with a fuse of the same type and rating.
4. Insert the replacement circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets of the
corresponding xRAP-100 power terminal board, as shown in the following
figure.
8-28
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
5. Reinstall the xRAP-100 front cover and fasten it with its two captive
screws.
Figure 8-5: Replacing the xRAP-100 circuit breakers
Replacing xRAP-D Circuit Breakers

xRAP-D circuit breakers can be replaced without disconnecting the power (hot
swapping).
To replace the xRAP-D circuit breakers:
1. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-D front cover to its
chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure).
2. Identify the faulty circuit breaker and remove it by pulling it straight out of
its socket.
3. Check the replacement circuit breaker ratings against those of the replaced
circuit breaker.
WARNING: For continued protection against risk of fire,
replace only with a circuit breaker of the same type and
rating.

417006-2318-0H3-A02
8-29
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
4. Insert the replacement circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets of the
corresponding xRAP-D power terminal board, as shown in the following
figures.
5. Reinstall the xRAP-D front cover and fasten it with its two captive screws.
Figure 8-6: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers
8-30
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A
Connector Pin Assignments
In this appendix:
Overview ........................................................................................................ A-1
ECU900 Card Connectors ............................................................................. A-2
F-CHANNEL Connector ................................................................................ A-5
T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 Connectors ......................................................... A-6
ETHERNET Connectors ................................................................................ A-7
MXC900 DC Input Power Connectors ........................................................... A-8
PIM2_21 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-8
PIM2_42 Connection Data ........................................................................... A-12
PIM2_63/B Connection Data ....................................................................... A-18
PIM2_63S Connection Data ......................................................................... A-22
TPM2_63_3 Connection Data ...................................................................... A-30
EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors .............................................................. A-38
ACP900 Connectors ..................................................................................... A-39
xRAP-100 Connectors .................................................................................. A-40
RAP-4B Connectors ..................................................................................... A-45
xRAP-D Connectors ..................................................................................... A-50
Overview
This appendix provides connection data for the user connectors located in
XDM shelves and associated ancillary equipment supplied by ECI Telecom.
Optical and coaxial connectors are described in the XDM-1000 Product Line
Reference Manual.
Any connectors not described in this appendix are reserved for use by ECI
Telecoms Network Solutions Division technical support personnel and/or for
future expansion, and therefore no user equipment may be connected to them.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-1

Maintenance Manual
ECU900 Card Connectors

Alarms Client Cable
This cable provides a direct connection between the XDM-900 and the
customers distribution frame. The cable has a 36-pin SCSI male connector on
one end which connects to the ALARMS connector, and open wires for
connecting to the customers facility on the other end. The following table lists
the pin assignment in the SCSI connector, and the color of the wire connected
to the corresponding pin for the connection between the XDM-900 ALARMS
connector and a distribution frame.
Table A-1: ALARMS client cable wiring
A-2
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
COMMON_F
Floating power supply

common
Input
Brown
Not connected
ALM_IN1
Alarm input 1, wire
Input
Brown/gray-ring
Not connected
ALM_IN2
Alarm input 2, wire
Input
Red
Not connected
ALM_IN3
Alarm input 3, wire
Input
Red/gray-ring
Not connected
ALM_IN4
Alarm input 4, wire
Input
Orange
10
Not connected
11
ALM_IN5
Alarm input 5, wire
Input
Orange/gray-ring
12
ALM_O1NO/
IN6
Alarm output 1
NO/input 6, wire
Output/Input
Yellow
13
ALM_O1/IP6
Alarm output 1
common/input 6, + wire
Output/
Input
Yellow/gray-ring
14
ALM_O1NC
Alarm output 1 NC
Output
Green
15
ALM_O2NO/
IN7
Alarm output 2 NO/input 7,

wire
Output/
Input
Green/gray-ring
16
ALM_O2/IP7
Alarm output 2
Output/
Input
Blue
17
ALM_O2NC
Alarm output 2 NC
Output
Blue/gray-ring
18
BUZ_COM
Buzzer common
Input
Violet
19
CRIT_NC
Critical alarm NC
Input
White
20
CRIT_NO
Critical alarm NO
Input
White/gray-ring
21
CRIT_COM
Critical alarm common
22
MAJ_NC
Major alarm NC
Input
Pink/gray-ring
23
MAJ_COM
Major alarm common
Input
Brown/white-ring
Pink
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
24
MAJ_NO
Major alarm NO
Input
Red/white-ring
25
MIN_NC
Minor alarm NC
Orange/white-ring
26
MIN_NO
Minor alarm NO
Input
Yellow/white-ring
27
MIN_COM
Minor alarm common
Input
Green/white-ring
28
WARN_NC
Warning alarm NC
Input
Blue/white-ring
29
WARN_COM
Warning alarm common
Violet/white-ring
30
WARN_NO
Warning alarm NO
Light gray/
white-ring
31
ALM_O3NO/
IN8
Alarm output 3
common/input 8, wire
Red/brown-ring
32
ALM_O3/IP8
Alarm output 3
Input
Yellow/brown-ring
33
ALM_O3NC
Alarm output 3 NC
Input
Orange/brown-ring
34
EXTA_SN2
External alarm sense 2
Input
35
BUZ_NO
Audio alarm activation line
Input
36
EXTA_SN1
Input
Violet/gray-ring
xRAP-100 alarms cable

This cable connects the XDM-900 to the xRAP-100. The cable has a 36-pin
SCSI male connector on both ends; one connects to the XDM-900 ALARMS
connector, and the other to the xRAP-100 ALARMS connector. The following
table lists the xRAP-100 alarms cable wiring.
Table A-2: xRAP-100 alarms cable wiring
XDM-900 side
SCSI connector
Name
Function
xRAP-100 side
SCSI connector
COMMON_F
Floating power supply

common
ALM_IP1
Alarm input 1, + wire
ALM_IN1
Alarm input 1, wire
ALM_IP2
ALM_IN2
Alarm input 2, wire
ALM_IP3
ALM_IN3
Alarm input 3, wire
ALM_IP4
ALM_IN4
Alarm input 4, wire
10
ALM_IP5
10
11
ALM_IN5
Alarm input 5, wire
11
12
ALM_O1NO/IN6
Alarm output 1 NO/input

6, wire
12
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-3
A-4

Maintenance Manual
XDM-900 side
SCSI connector
Name
Function
xRAP-100 side
SCSI connector
13
ALM_O1/IP6
Alarm output 1
13
14
ALM_O1NC
Alarm output 1 NC
14
15
ALM_O2NO/IN7
Alarm output 2 NO/input

7, wire
15
16
ALM_O2/IP7
Alarm output 2
16
17
ALM_O2NC
Alarm output 2 NC
17
18
BUZ_COM
Buzzer common
18
19
CRIT_NC
Critical alarm NC
19
20
CRIT_NO
Critical alarm NO
20
21
CRIT_COM
21
22
MAJ_NC
Major alarm NC
22
23
MAJ_COM
Major alarm common
23
24
MAJ_NO
Major alarm NO
24
25
MIN_NC
Minor alarm NC
25
26
MIN_NO
Minor alarm NO
26
27
MIN_COM
Minor alarm common
27
28
WARN_NC
Warning alarm NC
28
29
WARN_COM
29
30
WARN_NO
Warning alarm NO
30
31
ALM_O3NO/IN8
Alarm output 3
common/input 8, wire
31
32
ALM_O3/IP8
Alarm output 3
32
33
ALM_O3NC
Alarm output 3 NC
33
34
EXTA_SN2
34
35
BUZ_NO
Audio alarm activation

line
35
36
EXTA_SN1
36
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
F-CHANNEL Connector
The F-CHANNEL connector is a 9-pin D-type male connector that provides a
serial RS-232 communication channel supporting SLIP. This connector is
intended for connection to a Craft terminal. The connection is made to one of
the serial RS-232 ports of the PC serving as a Craft terminal, using a crossed
cable.
The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into
the connector. The table lists the connector pin assignment, together with the
corresponding pin in the Craft terminal serial RS-232 port (assuming that this
port uses a 9-pin connector).
Figure A-1: F-CHANNEL connector pin identification

Table A-3: F-CHANNEL connector pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Craft terminal serial port pin
Not connected
Not connected
COM-F-RX
F-channel receive
Input
Pin 3 (transmit output)
COM-F-TX
F-channel transmit
Output
Pin 2 (receive input)
Not connected
Not connected
GND
Ground
Pin 5 (ground)
6, 7,
8, 9
Not connected
Not connected
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-5

Maintenance Manual
T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2

Connectors
The T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors are 9-pin D-type male connectors,
each including two groups of lines:
Clock input (T3 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703 interface)
Clock output (T4 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703 interface)
The MAIN connector serves the main TMU, and the PROTECT connector
serves the standby (protection) TMU. They are connected to the site timing
reference distribution subsystem.
the connector, and the table lists their pin assignment.
Figure A-2: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin identification

Table A-4: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin assignment
A-6
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
SHIELD
Shield
CK_2M_MIL
Clock input, low
Input
SHIELD
Shield
CK_2M_MOL
Clock output, low
Output
Not connected
CK_2M_MIH
Clock input, high
Input
SHIELD
Shield
CK_2M_MOH
Clock output, high
Output
Not connected
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
ETHERNET Connectors
The two ETHERNET connectors located on the ECU900 panel, designated
MANAGEMENT MAIN and PROT/LCT, are 8-pin RJ-45 connectors that
provide two Ethernet 10BaseT management interfaces (one for each MXC900
card installed in the XDM-900 shelf).
At any time, only the interface connected to the MXC900 serving as the current
main card is active; the interface connected to the MXC900 serving as the
protection card is in standby to provide protection for the out-of-band
management traffic.
Each ETHERNET connector is wired as a station port intended for direct
connection through a straight cable to a port of a 10BaseT Ethernet hub.
the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for a typical connector.
Figure A-3: ETHERNET connectors pin identification

Table A-5: ETHERNET connectors pin assignment
Designation
Function
Direction
TX+
Transmit, + wire
Output
TX
Transmit, wire
Output
RX+
Receive, + wire
Input
N/C
Not connected
RX
Receive, wire
FGND
Frame ground
N/C
Not connected
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Input
A-7

Maintenance Manual
MXC900 DC Input Power

Connectors
The DC input power connector, designated POWER, is a 5-pin D-type male
connector located on the MXC900 panel. The following figure identifies the
functions of the POWER connector pins, as seen when looking into the
connector.
Figure A-4: POWER input power connector pin functions
PIM2_21 Connection Data

The PIM2_21 provides 21 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces and
has two 50-pin SCSI female connectors. The upper connector serves the E1
receive signals and the lower connector serves the E1 transmit signals.
the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical connector (for
unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor, and wire B is the
shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the
corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecoms Network Solutions
Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame.
Figure A-5: PIM2_21 E1 connectors pin identification
A-8
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Table A-6: PIM2_21 receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
RTIP1
Receive, tributary 1, wire A
Input
Brown
RTIP2
Input
Red
RTIP3
Input
Orange
RTIP4
Input
Yellow
RTIP5
Input
Green
RTIP6
Input
Blue
RTIP7
Input
Violet
GND
Shield
Brown/green-ring
RTIP8
Input
White
10
RTIP9
Input
Pink
11
RTIP10
Input
Brown/white-ring
12
RTIP11
Input
Orange/white-ring
13
RTIP12
Input
Green/white-ring
14
RTIP13
Input
Violet/white-ring
15
RTIP14
Input
Red/brown-ring
16
GND
Shield
Light-gray/green-ring
17
RTIP15
Input
Orange/brown-ring
18
RTIP16
Input
Blue/brown-ring
19
RTIP17
Input
Light-gray/brown-ring
20
RTIP18
Input
Brown/red-ring
21
RTIP19
Input
Yellow/red-ring
22
RTIP20
Input
Blue/red-ring
23
RTIP21
Input
White/red-ring
24
GND
Shield
Yellow/green-ring
25
Not connected
26
GND
Shield
Orange/green-ring
27
RRING1
Receive, tributary 1, wire B
Input
Brown/gray-ring
28
RRING2
Input
Red/gray-ring
29
RRING3
Input
Orange/gray-ring
30
RRING4
Input
Yellow/gray-ring
31
RRING5
Input
Green/gray-ring
32
RRING6
Input
Blue/gray-ring
33
RRING7
Input
Violet/gray-ring
34
GND
Shield
Violet/green-ring
35
RRING8
Input
White/gray-ring
36
RRING9
Input
Pink/gray-ring
37
RRING10
Input
Red/white-ring
38
RRING11
Input
Yellow/white-ring
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-9

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
39
RRING12
Input
Blue/white-ring
40
RRING13
Input
Light-gray/white-ring
41
RRING14
Input
Yellow/brown-ring
42
GND
Shield
Blue/green-ring
43
RRING15
Input
Green/brown-ring
44
RRING16
Input
Violet/brown-ring
45
RRING17
Input
Pink/brown-ring
46
RRING18
Input
Light-gray/red-ring
47
RRING19
Input
Green/red-ring
48
RRING20
Input
Violet/red-ring
49
RRING21
Input
Pink/red-ring
50
GND
Shield
Pink/green-ring
Table A-7: PIM2_21 transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment
A-10
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
TTIP1
Transmit, tributary 1, wire A
Output
Brown/yellow-ring
TTIP2
Output
Orange/yellow-ring
TTIP3
Output
Blue/yellow-ring
TTIP4
Output
Light-gray/
yellow-ring
TTIP5
Output
Brown/blue-ring
TTIP6
Output
Orange/blue-ring
TTIP7
Output
Green/blue-ring
GND
Shield
Pink/orange-ring
TTIP8
Output
Light-gray/blue-ring
10
TTIP9
Output
Brown/orange-ring
11
TTIP10
Output
Yellow/orange-ring
12
TTIP11
Output
Blue/orange-ring
13
TTIP12
Output
Light-gray/
orange-ring
14
TTIP13
Output
Brown/violet-ring
15
TTIP14
Output
Orange/violet-ring
16
GND
Shield
Pink/blue-ring
17
TTIP15
Output
Green/violet-ring
18
TTIP16
Output
Light-gray/
violet-ring
19
TTIP17
Output
Brown/pink-ring
20
TTIP18
Output
Orange/pink-ring
21
TTIP19
Output
Green/pink-ring
22
TTIP20
Output
Light-gray/pink-ring
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
23
TTIP21
Output
Pink/violet-ring
24
GND
Shield
Pink/white-ring
25
Not connected
26
GND
Shield
White/brown-ring
27
TRING1
Transmit, tributary 1, wire B
Output
Red/yellow-ring
28
TRING2
Output
Green/yellow-ring
29
TRING3
Output
Violet/yellow-ring
30
TRING4
Output
White/yellow-ring
31
TRING5
Output
Red/blue-ring
32
TRING6
Output
Yellow/blue-ring
33
TRING7
Output
Violet/blue-ring
34
GND
Shield
Black
35
TRING8
Output
White/blue-ring
36
TRING9
Output
Red/orange-ring
37
TRING10
Output
Green/orange-ring
38
TRING11
Output
Violet/orange-ring
39
TRING12
Output
White/orange-ring
40
TRING13
Output
Red/violet-ring
41
TRING14
Output
Yellow/violet-ring
42
GND
Shield
Black/white-ring
43
TRING15
Output
Blue/violet-ring
44
TRING16
Output
White/violet-ring
45
TRING17
Output
Red/pink-ring
46
TRING18
Output
Yellow/pink-ring
47
TRING19
Output
Blue/pink-ring
48
TRING20
Output
White/pink-ring
49
TRING21
Output
Pink/yellow-ring
50
GND
Shield
Black/yellow
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-11

Maintenance Manual
PIM2_42 Connection Data

The PIM2_42 provides 42 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces and
has two 100-pin SCSI female connectors. The upper connector serves the first
21 E1s (#1 to #21) receive and transmit signals, and the lower connector serves
the second 21 E1s (#22 to #42) receive and transmit signals.
Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame.
Figure A-6: PIM2_42 E1 connectors pin identification

Table A-8: PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines upper connector (1-21) pin assignment
A-12
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CGND
Shield
Brown/green-ring
CGND
Shield
Light Gray/green-ring
RTIP1
Input
Brown
RRING1
Input
Brown/gray-ring
RTIP2
Input
Red
RRING2
Input
Red/gray-ring
RTIP3
Input
Orange
RRING3
Input
Orange/gray-ring
RTIP4
Input
Yellow
10
RRING4
Input
Yellow/gray-ring
11
RTIP5
Input
Green
12
RRING5
Input
Green/gray-ring
13
RTIP6
Input
Blue
14
RRING6
Input
Blue/gray-ring
15
RTIP7
Input
Violet
16
RRING7
Input
Violet/gray-ring
17
RTIP8
Input
White
18
RRING8
Input
White/gray-ring
19
RTIP9
Input
Pink
20
RRING9
Input
Pink/gray-ring
21
RTIP10
Input
Brown/white-ring
22
RRING10 Receive, tributary 10, wire B
Input
Red/white-ring
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
23
CGND
Shield
Violet/green-ring
24
CGND
Shield
Blue/green-ring
25
CGND
Shield
Pink/orange-ring
26
CGND
Shield
Pink/blue-ring
27
TTIP1
Output
Brown/yellow-ring
28
TRING1
Output
Red/yellow-ring
29
TTIP2
Output
Orange/yellow-ring
30
TRING2
Output
Green/yellow-ring
31
TTIP3
Output
Blue/yellow-ring
32
TRING3
Output
Violet/yellow-ring
33
TTIP4
Output
Light gray/yellow-ring
34
TRING4
Output
White/yellow-ring
35
TTIP5
Output
Brown/blue-ring
36
TRING5
Output
Red/blue-ring
37
TTIP6
Output
Orange/blue-ring
38
TRING6
Output
Yellow/blue-ring
39
TTIP7
Output
Green/blue-ring
40
TRING7
Output
Violet/blue-ring
41
TTIP8
Output
Light gray/blue-ring
42
TRING8
Output
White/blue-ring
43
TTIP9
Output
Brown/orange-ring
44
TRING9
Output
Red/orange-ring
45
TTIP10
Output
Yellow/orange-ring
46
TRING10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire B
Output
Green/orange-ring
47
TTIP11
Output
Blue/orange-ring
48
Output
Violet/orange-ring
49
CGND
Shield
Pink/white-ring
50
CGND
Shield
White/brown-ring
51
CGND
Shield
Yellow/green-ring
52
CGND
Shield
Orange/green-ring
53
RTIP11
Input
Orange/white-ring
54
Input
Yellow/white-ring
55
RTIP12
Input
Green/white-ring
56
Input
Blue/white-ring
57
RTIP13
Input
Violet/white-ring
58
Input
Light gray/white-ring
59
RTIP14
Input
Red/brown-ring
60
Input
Yellow/brown-ring
61
RTIP15
Input
Orange/brown-ring
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-13
A-14
Pin
Name
62

Maintenance Manual
Function
Direction
Wire color
Input
Green/brown-ring
63
RTIP16
Input
Blue/brown-ring
64
Input
Violet/brown-ring
65
RTIP17
Input
Light gray/brown-ring
66
Input
Pink/brown-ring
67
RTIP18
Input
Brown/red-ring
68
Input
Light gray/red-ring
69
RTIP19
Input
Yellow/red-ring
70
Input
Green/red-ring
71
RTIP20
Input
Blue/red-ring
72
Input
Violet/red-ring
73
RTIP21
Input
White/red-ring
74
Input
Pink/red-ring
75
CGND
Shield
Pink/green-ring
76
CGND
Shield
White/green-ring
77
CGND
Shield
Black
78
CGND
Shield
Black/white-ring
79
TTIP12
Output
Light gray/orange-ring
80
Output
White/orange-ring
81
TTIP13
Output
Brown/violet-ring
82
Output
Red/violet-ring
83
TTIP14
Output
Orange/violet-ring
84
Output
Yellow/violet-ring
85
TTIP15
Output
Green/violet-ring
86
Output
Blue/violet-ring
87
TTIP16
Output
Light gray/violet-ring
88
Output
White/violet-ring
89
TTIP17
Output
Brown/pink-ring
90
Output
Red/pink-ring
91
TTIP18
Output
Orange/pink-ring
92
Output
Yellow/pink-ring
93
TTIP19
Output
Green/pink-ring
94
Output
Blue/pink-ring
95
TTIP20
Output
Light gray/pink-ring
96
Output
White/pink-ring
97
TTIP21
Output
Pink/violet-ring
98
Output
Pink/yellow-ring
99
CGND
Shield
Black/yellow-ring
100
CGND
Shield
Black/pink-ring
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Table A-9: PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines lower connector (22-42) pin

assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CGND
Shield
Brown/green-ring
CGND
Shield
Light Gray/green-ring
RTIP22
Input
Brown
Input
Brown/gray-ring
RTIP23
Input
Red
Input
Red/gray-ring
RTIP24
Input
Orange
Input
Orange/gray-ring
RTIP25
Input
Yellow
10
Input
Yellow/gray-ring
11
RTIP26
Input
Green
12
Input
Green/gray-ring
13
RTIP27
Input
Blue
14
Input
Blue/gray-ring
15
RTIP28
Input
Violet
16
Input
Violet/gray-ring
17
RTIP29
Input
White
18
Input
White/gray-ring
19
RTIP30
Input
Pink
20
Input
Pink/gray-ring
21
RTIP31
Input
Brown/white-ring
22
Input
Red/white-ring
23
CGND
Shield
Violet/green-ring
24
CGND
Shield
Blue/green-ring
25
CGND
Shield
Pink/orange-ring
26
CGND
Shield
Pink/blue-ring
27
TTIP22
Output
Brown/yellow-ring
28
Output
Red/yellow-ring
29
TTIP23
Output
Orange/yellow-ring
30
Output
Green/yellow-ring
31
TTIP24
Output
Blue/yellow-ring
32
Output
Violet/yellow-ring
33
TTIP25
Output
Light gray/yellow-ring
34
Output
White/yellow-ring
35
TTIP26
Output
Brown/blue-ring
36
Output
Red/blue-ring
37
TTIP27
Output
Orange/blue-ring
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-15
A-16
Pin
Name
38

Maintenance Manual
Function
Direction
Wire color
Output
Yellow/blue-ring
39
TTIP28
Output
Green/blue-ring
40
Output
Violet/blue-ring
41
TTIP29
Output
Light gray/blue-ring
42
Output
White/blue-ring
43
TTIP30
Output
Brown/orange-ring
44
Output
Red/orange-ring
45
TTIP31
Output
Yellow/orange-ring
46
Output
Green/orange-ring
47
TTIP32
Output
Blue/orange-ring
48
Output
Violet/orange-ring
49
CGND
Shield
Pink/white-ring
50
CGND
Shield
White/brown-ring
51
CGND
Shield
Yellow/green-ring
52
CGND
Shield
Orange/green-ring
53
RTIP32
Input
Orange/white-ring
54
Input
Yellow/white-ring
55
RTIP33
Input
Green/white-ring
56
Input
Blue/white-ring
57
RTIP34
Input
Violet/white-ring
58
Input
Light gray/white-ring
59
RTIP35
Input
Red/brown-ring
60
Input
Yellow/brown-ring
61
RTIP36
Input
Orange/brown-ring
62
Input
Green/brown-ring
63
RTIP37
Input
Blue/brown-ring
64
Input
Violet/brown-ring
65
RTIP38
Input
Light gray/brown-ring
66
Input
Pink/brown-ring
67
RTIP39
Input
Brown/red-ring
68
Input
Light gray/red-ring
69
RTIP40
Input
Yellow/red-ring
70
Input
Green/red-ring
71
RTIP41
Receive, tributary 41 wire A
Input
Blue/red-ring
72
Input
Violet/red-ring
73
RTIP42
Input
White/red-ring
74
Input
Pink/red-ring
75
CGND
Shield
Pink/green-ring
76
CGND
Shield
White/green-ring
77
CGND
Shield
Black
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
78
CGND
Shield
Black/white-ring
79
TTIP33
Output
Light gray/orange-ring
80
Output
White/orange-ring
81
TTIP34
Output
Brown/violet-ring
82
Output
Red/violet-ring
83
TTIP35
Output
Orange/violet-ring
84
Output
Yellow/violet-ring
85
TTIP36
Output
Green/violet-ring
86
Output
Blue/violet-ring
87
TTIP37
Output
Light gray/violet-ring
88
Output
White/violet-ring
89
TTIP38
Output
Brown/pink-ring
90
Output
Red/pink-ring
91
TTIP39
Output
Orange/pink-ring
92
Output
Yellow/pink-ring
93
TTIP40
Output
Green/pink-ring
94
Output
Blue/pink-ring
95
TTIP41
Output
Light gray/pink-ring
96
Output
White/pink-ring
97
TTIP42
Output
Pink/violet-ring
98
Output
Pink/yellow-ring
99
CGND
Shield
Black/yellow-ring
100
CGND
Shield
Black/pink-ring
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-17

Maintenance Manual
PIM2_63/B Connection Data

The PIM2_63/B provides 63 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces
and has three pairs of 50-pin SCSI female connectors. Each connector pair
supports 21 E1 interfaces. The upper connector in each pair serves the E1
receive signals and the lower, the E1 transmit signals. The tributaries and type
of signal (IN for receive, OUT for transmit) supported by each connector are
marked near the connector: IN 1-21, OUT 1-21, IN 22-42, OUT 22-42, IN
43-63, and OUT 43-63.
The following figure identifies the connector pins in each pair as seen when
looking into the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical
connector pair (for unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor,
and wire B is the shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire
connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecoms
Network Solutions Division for connecting the tributary connector and a
distribution frame. The tributary numbers appearing in these tables are given
for the IN 1-21 and OUT 1-21 connectors. To obtain the correct tributary
numbers for the other connectors, interpret the numbers as representing the
number of the tributary in its group (for example, in connectors IN 22-42 and
OUT 22-42, 7 represents E1 tributary 28; in connectors IN 43-63 and OUT
43-63, 12 represents E1 tributary 57).
Figure A-7: PIM2_63/B typical pair connectors pin identification

Table A-10: PIM2_63/B typical receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment
A-18
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
RTIP1
Input
Brown
RTIP2
Input
Red
RTIP3
Input
Orange
RTIP4
Input
Yellow
RTIP5
Input
Green
RTIP6
Input
Blue
RTIP7
Input
Violet
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
GND
Shield
Brown/green-ring
RTIP8
Input
White
10
RTIP9
Input
Pink
11
RTIP10
Input
Brown/white-ring
12
RTIP11
Input
Orange/white-ring
13
RTIP12
Input
Green/white-ring
14
RTIP13
Input
Violet/white-ring
15
RTIP14
Input
Red/brown-ring
16
GND
Shield
Light-gray/green-ring
17
RTIP15
Input
Orange/brown-ring
18
RTIP16
Input
Blue/brown-ring
19
RTIP17
Input
Light-gray/
brown-ring
20
RTIP18
Input
Brown/red-ring
21
RTIP19
Input
Yellow/red-ring
22
RTIP20
Input
Blue/red-ring
23
RTIP21
Input
White/red-ring
24
GND
Shield
Yellow/green-ring
25
Not connected
26
GND
Shield
Orange/green-ring
27
RRING1
Input
Brown/gray-ring
28
RRING2
Input
Red/gray-ring
29
RRING3
Input
Orange/gray-ring
30
RRING4
Input
Yellow/gray-ring
31
RRING5
Input
Green/gray-ring
32
RRING6
Input
Blue/gray-ring
33
RRING7
Input
Violet/gray-ring
34
GND
Shield
Violet/green-ring
35
RRING8
Input
White/gray-ring
36
RRING9
Input
Pink/gray-ring
37
RRING10
Input
Red/white-ring
38
RRING11
Input
Yellow/white-ring
39
RRING12
Input
Blue/white-ring
40
RRING13
Input
Light-gray/white-ring
41
RRING14
Input
Yellow/brown-ring
42
GND
Shield
Blue/green-ring
43
RRING15
Input
Green/brown-ring
44
RRING16
Input
Violet/brown-ring
45
RRING17
Input
Pink/brown-ring
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-19

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
46
RRING18
Input
Light-gray/
red-ring
47
RRING19
Input
Green/red-ring
48
RRING20
Input
Violet/red-ring
49
RRING21
Input
Pink/red-ring
50
GND
Shield
Pink/green-ring
Table A-11: PIM2_63 typical transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment
A-20
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
TTIP1
Output
Brown/yellow-ring
TTIP2
Output
Orange/yellow-ring
TTIP3
Output
Blue/yellow-ring
TTIP4
Output
Light-gray/
yellow-ring
TTIP5
Output
Brown/blue-ring
TTIP6
Output
Orange/blue-ring
TTIP7
Output
Green/blue-ring
GND
Shield
Pink/orange-ring
TTIP8
Output
Light-gray/
blue-ring
10
TTIP9
Output
Brown/orange-ring
11
TTIP10
Output
Yellow/orange-ring
12
TTIP11
Output
Blue/orange-ring
13
TTIP12
Output
Light-gray/
orange-ring
14
TTIP13
Output
Brown/violet-ring
15
TTIP14
Output
Orange/
violet-ring
16
GND
Shield
Pink/blue-ring
17
TTIP15
Output
Green/violet-ring
18
TTIP16
Output
Light-gray/
violet-ring
19
TTIP17
Output
Brown/pink-ring
20
TTIP18
Output
Orange/pink-ring
21
TTIP19
Output
Green/pink-ring
22
TTIP20
Output
Light-gray/
pink-ring
23
TTIP21
Output
Pink/violet-ring
24
GND
Shield
Pink/white-ring
25
Not connected
26
GND
Shield
White/brown-ring
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
27
TRING1
Output
Red/yellow-ring
28
TRING2
Output
Green/yellow-ring
29
TRING3
Output
Violet/yellow-ring
30
TRING4
Output
White/yellow-ring
31
TRING5
Output
Red/blue-ring
32
TRING6
Output
Yellow/blue-ring
33
TRING7
Output
Violet/blue-ring
34
GND
Shield
Black
35
TRING8
Output
White/blue-ring
36
TRING9
Output
Red/orange-ring
37
TRING10
Output
Green/orange-ring
38
TRING11
Output
Violet/orange-ring
39
TRING12
Output
White/orange-ring
40
TRING13
Output
Red/violet-ring
41
TRING14
Output
Yellow/violet-ring
42
GND
Shield
Black/white-ring
43
TRING15
Output
Blue/violet-ring
44
TRING16
Output
White/violet-ring
45
TRING17
Output
Red/pink-ring
46
TRING18
Output
Yellow/pink-ring
47
TRING19
Output
Blue/pink-ring
48
TRING20
Output
White/pink-ring
49
TRING21
Output
Pink/yellow-ring
50
GND
Shield
Black/yellow
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-21

Maintenance Manual
PIM2_63S Connection Data

The PIM2_63S provides 63 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces and
has a 272-pin VHDCI female connector. The connector has two parts, each
with 136 pins; the upper part serves the 63 E1 transmit signals, and the lower
part the 63 E1 receive signals.
ECI Telecom offers a special cable for connecting to the PIM2_63S. For a
description of the cable refer to Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S (page 6-7). The
cable end, connecting to the PIM2_63S terminates with a double 136-pin
VHDCI male connector. The connector parts are designated as P1 for the
transmit lines and P3 for the receive lines.
corresponding pin in the cable offered by ECI Telecoms Network Solutions
Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame. The
cable marking in the heading of each table refers to the 26AWG cable
connected to the connectors as designated in the cable description.
Figure A-8: PIM2_63S connector pin identification

Table A-12: Connector P1, E1 #1 to E1 #21 Tx lines
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Cable a (Red dots on jacket)
A-22
CGND
Shield
CGND
Shield
TXD_P1
Output
Brown
TXD_N1
Output
Brown/Gray
TXD_P2
Output
Red
TXD_N2
Output
Red/Gray
TXD_P3
Output
Orange
TXD_N3
Output
Orange/Gray
TXD_P4
Output
Yellow
10
TXD_N4
Output
Yellow/Gray
11
TXD_P5
Output
Green
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
12
TXD_N5
Output
Green/Gray
13
TXD_P6
Output
Blue
14
TXD_N6
Output
Blue/Gray
15
TXD_P7
Output
Purple
16
TXD_N7
Output
Purple/Gray
17
TXD_P8
Output
White
18
TXD_N8
Output
White/Gray
19
TXD_P9
Output
Pink
20
TXD_N9
Output
Pink/Gray
21
TXD_P10
Output
Brown/White
22
TXD_N10
Output
Red/White
23
TXD_P11
Output
Orange/White
24
TXD_N11
Output
Yellow/White
25
TXD_P12
Output
Green/White
26
TXD_N12
Output
Blue/White
27
TXD_P13
Output
Purple/White
28
TXD_N13
Output
Light-Gray/White
29
TXD_P14
Output
Red/Brown
30
TXD_N14
Output
Yellow/Brown
31
TXD_P15
Output
Orange/Brown
32
TXD_N15
Output
Green/Brown
33
TXD_P16
Output
Blue/Brown
34
TXD_N16
Output
Purple/Brown
35
--
N/C
--
--
36
--
N/C
--
--
37
TXD_P17
Output
Light-Gray/Brown
38
TXD_N17
Output
Pink/Brown
39
TXD_P18
Output
Brown/Red
40
TXD_N18
Output
Light-Gray/Red
41
TXD_P19
Output
Yellow/Red
42
TXD_N19
Output
Green/Red
43
TXD_P20
Output
Blue/Red
44
TXD_N20
Output
Purple/Red
45
TXD_P21
Output
White/Red
46
TXD_N21
Output
Pink/Red
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-23

Maintenance Manual
Table A-13: Connector P3, E1 #1 to E1 #21 Rx lines

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Cable b (Red dots on jacket)
A-24
91
RXD_N21
Input
Brown/Yellow
92
RXD_P21
Input
Red/Yellow
93
RXD_N20
Input
Orange/Yellow
94
RXD_P20
Input
Green/Yellow
95
RXD_N19
Input
Blue/Yellow
96
RXD_P19
Input
Purple/Yellow
97
RXD_N18
Input
Light-Gray/Yellow
98
RXD_P18
Input
White/Yellow
99
RXD_N17
Input
Brown/Blue
100
RXD_P17
Input
Red/Blue
101
--
N/C
--
--
102
--
N/C
--
--
103
RXD_N16
Input
Orange/Blue
104
RXD_P16
Input
Yellow/Blue
105
RXD_N15
Input
Green/Blue
106
RXD_P15
Input
Purple/Blue
107
RXD_N14
Input
Light-Gray/Blue
108
RXD_P14
Input
White/Blue
109
RXD_N13
Input
Brown/Orange
110
RXD_P13
Input
Red/Orange
111
RXD_N12
Input
Yellow/Orange
112
RXD_P12
Input
Green/Orange
113
RXD_N11
Input
Blue/Orange
114
RXD_P11
Input
Purple/Orange
115
RXD_N10
Input
Light-Gray/Orange
116
RXD_P10
Input
White/Orange
117
RXD_N9
Input
Brown/Purple
118
RXD_P9
Input
Red/Purple
119
RXD_N8
Input
Orange/Purple
120
RXD_P8
Input
Yellow/Purple
121
RXD_N7
Input
Green/Purple
122
RXD_P7
Input
Blue/Purple
123
RXD_N6
Input
Light-Gray/Purple
124
RXD_P6
Input
White/Purple
125
RXD_N5
Input
Brown/Pink
126
RXD_P5
Input
Red/Pink
127
RXD_N4
Input
Orange/Pink
128
RXD_P4
Input
Yellow/Pink
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
129
RXD_N3
Input
Green/Pink
130
RXD_P3
Input
Blue/Pink
131
RXD_N2
Input
Light-Gray/Pink
132
RXD_P2
Input
White/Pink
133
RXD_N1
Input
Pink/Purple
134
RXD_P1
Input
Pink/Yellow
135
--
N/C
--
--
136
--
N/C
--
--

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
47
TXD_P22
Output
Brown
48
TXD_N22
Transmit, tributary22, wire B
Output
Brown/Gray
49
TXD_P23
Output
Red
50
TXD_N23
Output
Red/Gray
51
TXD_P24
Output
Orange
52
TXD_N24
Output
Orange/Gray
53
TXD_P25
Output
Yellow
54
TXD_N25
Output
Yellow/Gray
55
TXD_P26
Output
Green
56
TXD_N26
Output
Green/Gray
57
TXD_P27
Output
Blue
58
TXD_N27
Output
Blue/Gray
59
TXD_P28
Output
Purple
60
TXD_N28
Output
Purple/Gray
61
TXD_P29
Output
White
62
TXD_N29
Output
White/Gray
63
TXD_P30
Output
Pink
64
TXD_N30
Output
Pink/Gray
65
TXD_P31
Output
Brown/White
66
TXD_N31
Output
Red/White
67
--
N/C
--
--
68
--
N/C
--
--
69
--
N/C
--
--
70
--
N/C
--
--
71
TXD_P32
Output
Orange/White
72
TXD_N32
Output
Yellow/White
73
TXD_P33
Output
Green/White
74
TXD_N33
Output
Blue/White
75
TXD_P34
Output
Purple/White
76
TXD_N34
Output
Light-Gray/White
77
TXD_P35
Output
Red/Brown
Cable c (Blue dots on jacket)
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-25

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
78
79
TXD_N35
Output
Yellow/Brown
TXD_P36
Output
Orange/Brown
80
TXD_N36
Output
Green/Brown
81
TXD_P37
Output
Blue/Brown
82
TXD_N37
Output
Purple/Brown
83
TXD_P38
Output
Light-Gray/Brown
84
TXD_N38
Output
Pink/Brown
85
TXD_P39
Output
Brown/Red
86
TXD_N39
Output
Light-Gray/Red
87
TXD_P40
Output
Yellow/Red
88
TXD_N40
Output
Green/Red
89
TXD_P41
Output
Blue/Red
90
TXD_N41
Output
Purple/Red
91
TXD_P42
Output
White/Red
92
TXD_N42
Output
Pink/Red

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Cable d (Blue dots on jacket)
A-26
45
RXD_N42
Input
Brown/Yellow
46
RXD_P42
Input
Red/Yellow
47
RXD_N41
Input
Orange/Yellow
48
RXD_P41
Input
Green/Yellow
49
RXD_N40
Input
Blue/Yellow
50
RXD_P40
Input
Purple/Yellow
51
RXD_N39
Input
Light-Gray/Yellow
52
RXD_P39
Input
White/Yellow
53
RXD_N38
Input
Brown/Blue
54
RXD_P38
Input
Red/Blue
55
RXD_N37
Input
Orange/Blue
56
RXD_P37
Input
Yellow/Blue
57
RXD_N36
Input
Green/Blue
58
RXD_P36
Input
Purple/Blue
59
RXD_N35
Input
Light-Gray/Blue
60
RXD_P35
Input
White/Blue
61
RXD_N34
Input
Brown/Orange
62
RXD_P34
Input
Red/Orange
63
RXD_N33
Input
Yellow/Orange
64
RXD_P33
Input
Green/Orange
65
RXD_N32
Input
Blue/Orange
66
RXD_P32
Input
Purple/Orange
67
--
N/C
--
--
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
68
--
N/C
--
--
69
--
N/C
--
--
70
--
N/C
--
--
71
RXD_N31
Input
Light-Gray/Orange
72
RXD_P31
Input
White/Orange
73
RXD_N30
Input
Brown/Purple
74
RXD_P30
Input
Red/Purple
75
RXD_N29
Input
Orange/Purple
76
RXD_P29
Input
Yellow/Purple
77
RXD_N28
Input
Green/Purple
78
RXD_P28
Input
Blue/Purple
79
RXD_N27
Input
Light-Gray/Purple
80
RXD_P27
Input
White/Purple
81
RXD_N26
Input
Brown/Pink
82
RXD_P26
Input
Red/Pink
83
RXD_N25
Input
Orange/Pink
84
RXD_P25
Input
Yellow/Pink
85
RXD_N24
Input
Green/Pink
86
RXD_P24
Input
Blue/Pink
87
RXD_N23
Input
Light-Gray/Pink
88
RXD_P23
Input
White/Pink
89
RXD_N22
Input
Pink/Purple
90
RXD_P22
Input
Pink/Yellow

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Cable e (Yellow dots on jacket)
93
TXD_P43
Output
Brown
94
TXD_N43
Output
Brown/Gray
95
TXD_P44
Output
Red
96
TXD_N44
Output
Red/Gray
97
TXD_P45
Output
Orange
98
TXD_N45
Output
Orange/Gray
99
TXD_P46
Output
Yellow
100
TXD_N46
Output
Yellow/Gray
101
TXD_P47
Output
Green
102
TXD_N47
Output
Green/Gray
103
TXD_P48
Output
Blue
104
TXD_N48
Output
Blue/Gray
105
TXD_P49
Output
Purple
106
TXD_N49
Output
Purple/Gray
107
TXD_P50
Output
White
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-27

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
108
TXD_N50
Output
White/Gray
109
TXD_P51
Output
Pink
110
TXD_N51
Output
Pink/Gray
111
TXD_P52
Output
Brown/White
112
TXD_N52
Output
Red/White
113
TXD_P53
Output
Orange/White
114
TXD_N53
Output
Yellow/White
115
TXD_P54
Output
Green/White
116
TXD_N54
Output
Blue/White
117
TXD_P55
Output
Purple/White
118
TXD_N55
Output
Light-Gray/White
119
TXD_P56
Output
Red/Brown
120
TXD_N56
Output
Yellow/Brown
121
TXD_P57
Output
Orange/Brown
122
TXD_N57
Output
Green/Brown
123
TXD_P58
Output
Blue/Brown
124
TXD_N58
Output
Purple/Brown
125
TXD_P59
Output
Light-Gray/Brown
126
TXD_N59
Output
Pink/Brown
127
TXD_P60
Output
Brown/Red
128
TXD_N60
Output
Light-Gray/Red
129
TXD_P61
Output
Yellow/Red
130
TXD_N61
Output
Green/Red
131
TXD_P62
Output
Blue/Red
132
TXD_N62
Output
Purple/Red
133
TXD_P63
Output
White/Red
134
TXD_N63
Output
Pink/Red
135
--
N/C
--
--
136
--
N/C
--
--

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Cable f (Yellow dots on jacket)
A-28
--
N/C
--
--
--
N/C
--
--
RXD_N63
Input
Brown/Yellow
RXD_P63
Input
Red/Yellow
RXD_N62
Input
Orange/Yellow
RXD_P62
Input
Green/Yellow
RXD_N61
Input
Blue/Yellow
RXD_P61
Input
Purple/Yellow
RXD_N60
Input
Light-Gray/Yellow
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
10
RXD_P60
11
RXD_N59
Input
White/Yellow
Input
Brown/Blue
12
RXD_P59
Input
Red/Blue
13
RXD_N58
Input
Orange/Blue
14
RXD_P58
Input
Yellow/Blue
15
RXD_N57
Input
Green/Blue
16
RXD_P57
Input
Purple/Blue
17
RXD_N56
Input
Light-Gray/Blue
18
RXD_P56
Input
White/Blue
19
RXD_N55
Input
Brown/Orange
20
RXD_P55
Input
Red/Orange
21
RXD_N54
Input
Yellow/Orange
22
RXD_P54
Input
Green/Orange
23
RXD_N53
Input
Blue/Orange
24
RXD_P53
Input
Purple/Orange
25
RXD_N52
Input
Light-Gray/Orange
26
RXD_P52
Input
White/Orange
27
RXD_N51
Input
Brown/Purple
28
RXD_P51
Input
Red/Purple
29
RXD_N50
Input
Orange/Purple
30
RXD_P50
Input
Yellow/Purple
31
RXD_N49
Input
Green/Purple
32
RXD_P49
Receive, tributary 49 wire B
Input
Blue/Purple
33
RXD_N48
Input
Light-Gray/Purple
34
RXD_P48
Input
White/Purple
35
RXD_N47
Input
Brown/Pink
36
RXD_P47
Input
Red/Pink
37
RXD_N46
Input
Orange/Pink
38
RXD_P46
Input
Yellow/Pink
39
RXD_N45
Input
Green/Pink
40
RXD_P45
Input
Blue/Pink
41
RXD_N44
Input
Light-Gray/Pink
42
RXD_P44
Input
White/Pink
43
RXD_N43
Input
Pink/Purple
44
RXD_P43
Input
Pink/Yellow
135
--
N/C
--
--
136
--
N/C
--
--
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-29

Maintenance Manual
TPM2_63_3 Connection Data

The TPM2_63_3 provides four interfaces for connecting to three working
(active) and one protection (standby) PIM2_63S modules. Each interface
supports connection to the 63 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces
via a 272-pin VHDCI female connector. The connector has two parts, each
with 136 pins; the upper part serves the 63 E1 transmit signals, and the lower
part the 63 E1 receive signals.
ECI Telecom offers a special jumper cable for connecting each of the four
interfaces on the TPM2_63_3 to a PIM2_63S. Each cable end terminates with a
double 136-pin VHDCI male connector. The following figure shows the cable's
structure.
Figure A-9: TPM_2_63_3 jumper cable structure
The jumper is made up of six cables attached together and designated: a, b, c,

d, e, and f. The connectors at each end of the jumper are designated P1 for the
transmit lines and P3 for the receive lines at one end and P2 and P4 at the other
end, respectively. The jumper is wired corresponding to pin numbers, meaning
that each pin number in connector P1 is connected to the same pin number in
P2 and each pin in P3 connects to the same pin in P4.
corresponding pin in the cable offered by ECI Telecoms Network Solutions
Division. The cable marking in the heading of each table (a, b, etc.) refers to
the 26AWG cable connected to the connectors as designated in the cable
description.
Figure A-10: TPM2_63_3, typical double 136-pin VHDCI connector, pin assignment
A-30
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Table A-18: Connectors P1 and P2, E1 #1 to E1 #21 Tx lines

Pin
Name
Function
Wire color
Cable a
CGND
Shield
CGND
Shield
TXD_P1
Brown
TXD_N1
Brown/Gray
TXD_P2
Red
TXD_N2
Red/Gray
TXD_P3
Orange
TXD_N3
Orange/Gray
TXD_P4
Yellow
10
TXD_N4
Yellow/Gray
11
TXD_P5
Green
12
TXD_N5
Green/Gray
13
TXD_P6
Blue
14
TXD_N6
Blue/Gray
15
TXD_P7
Purple
16
TXD_N7
Purple/Gray
17
TXD_P8
White
18
TXD_N8
White/Gray
19
TXD_P9
Pink
20
TXD_N9
Pink/Gray
21
TXD_P10
Brown/White
22
TXD_N10
Red/White
23
TXD_P11
Orange/White
24
TXD_N11
Yellow/White
25
TXD_P12
Green/White
26
TXD_N12
Blue/White
27
TXD_P13
Purple/White
28
TXD_N13
Light-Gray/White
29
TXD_P14
Red/Brown
30
TXD_N14
Yellow/Brown
31
TXD_P15
Orange/Brown
32
TXD_N15
Green/Brown
33
TXD_P16
Blue/Brown
34
TXD_N16
Purple/Brown
35
--
N/C
--
36
--
N/C
--
37
TXD_P17
Light-Gray/Brown
38
TXD_N17
Pink/Brown
39
TXD_P18
Brown/Red
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-31
Pin
Name
40
41
42
43
44
45
46

Maintenance Manual
Function
Wire color
TXD_N18
Light-Gray/Red
TXD_P19
Yellow/Red
TXD_N19
Green/Red
TXD_P20
Blue/Red
TXD_N20
Purple/Red
TXD_P21
White/Red
TXD_N21
Pink/Red
Table A-19: Connectors P3 and P4, E1 #1 to E1 #21 Rx lines

Pin
Name
Function
Wire color
Cable b
A-32
91
RXD_N21
Brown/Yellow
92
RXD_P21
Red/Yellow
93
RXD_N20
Orange/Yellow
94
RXD_P20
Green/Yellow
95
RXD_N19
Blue/Yellow
96
RXD_P19
Purple/Yellow
97
RXD_N18
Light-Gray/Yellow
98
RXD_P18
White/Yellow
99
RXD_N17
Brown/Blue
100
RXD_P17
Red/Blue
101
--
N/C
--
102
--
N/C
--
103
RXD_N16
Orange/Blue
104
RXD_P16
Yellow/Blue
105
RXD_N15
Green/Blue
106
RXD_P15
Purple/Blue
107
RXD_N14
Light-Gray/Blue
108
RXD_P14
White/Blue
109
RXD_N13
Brown/Orange
110
RXD_P13
Red/Orange
111
RXD_N12
Yellow/Orange
112
RXD_P12
Green/Orange
113
RXD_N11
Blue/Orange
114
RXD_P11
Purple/Orange
115
RXD_N10
Light-Gray/Orange
116
RXD_P10
White/Orange
117
RXD_N9
Brown/Purple
118
RXD_P9
Red/Purple
119
RXD_N8
Orange/Purple
120
RXD_P8
Yellow/Purple
121
RXD_N7
Green/Purple
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Wire color
122
RXD_P7
Blue/Purple
123
RXD_N6
Light-Gray/Purple
124
RXD_P6
White/Purple
125
RXD_N5
Brown/Pink
126
RXD_P5
Red/Pink
127
RXD_N4
Orange/Pink
128
RXD_P4
Yellow/Pink
129
RXD_N3
Green/Pink
130
RXD_P3
Blue/Pink
131
RXD_N2
Light-Gray/Pink
132
RXD_P2
White/Pink
133
RXD_N1
Pink/Purple
134
RXD_P1
Pink/Yellow
135
--
N/C
--
136
--
N/C
--
Table A-20: Connector P1 and P2, E1 #22 to E1 #42 Tx lines

Pin
Name
Function
Wire color
Cable c
47
TXD_P22
Brown
48
TXD_N22
Transmit, tributary22, wire B
Brown/Gray
49
TXD_P23
Red
50
TXD_N23
Red/Gray
51
TXD_P24
Orange
52
TXD_N24
Orange/Gray
53
TXD_P25
Yellow
54
TXD_N25
Yellow/Gray
55
TXD_P26
Green
56
TXD_N26
Green/Gray
57
TXD_P27
Blue
58
TXD_N27
Blue/Gray
59
TXD_P28
Purple
60
TXD_N28
Purple/Gray
61
TXD_P29
White
62
TXD_N29
White/Gray
63
TXD_P30
Pink
64
TXD_N30
Pink/Gray
65
TXD_P31
Brown/White
66
TXD_N31
Red/White
67
--
N/C
--
68
--
N/C
--
69
--
N/C
--
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-33

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Wire color
70
71
--
N/C
--
TXD_P32
Orange/White
72
TXD_N32
Yellow/White
73
TXD_P33
Green/White
74
TXD_N33
Blue/White
75
TXD_P34
Purple/White
76
TXD_N34
Light-Gray/White
77
TXD_P35
Red/Brown
78
TXD_N35
Yellow/Brown
79
TXD_P36
Orange/Brown
80
TXD_N36
Green/Brown
81
TXD_P37
Blue/Brown
82
TXD_N37
Purple/Brown
83
TXD_P38
Light-Gray/Brown
84
TXD_N38
Pink/Brown
85
TXD_P39
Brown/Red
86
TXD_N39
Light-Gray/Red
87
TXD_P40
Yellow/Red
88
TXD_N40
Green/Red
89
TXD_P41
Blue/Red
90
TXD_N41
Purple/Red
91
TXD_P42
White/Red
92
TXD_N42
Pink/Red

Pin
Name
Function
Wire color
Cable d
A-34
45
RXD_N42
Brown/Yellow
46
RXD_P42
Red/Yellow
47
RXD_N41
Orange/Yellow
48
RXD_P41
Green/Yellow
49
RXD_N40
Blue/Yellow
50
RXD_P40
Purple/Yellow
51
RXD_N39
Light-Gray/Yellow
52
RXD_P39
White/Yellow
53
RXD_N38
Brown/Blue
54
RXD_P38
Red/Blue
55
RXD_N37
Orange/Blue
56
RXD_P37
Yellow/Blue
57
RXD_N36
Green/Blue
58
RXD_P36
Purple/Blue
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Wire color
59
RXD_N35
Light-Gray/Blue
60
RXD_P35
White/Blue
61
RXD_N34
Brown/Orange
62
RXD_P34
Red/Orange
63
RXD_N33
Yellow/Orange
64
RXD_P33
Green/Orange
65
RXD_N32
Blue/Orange
66
RXD_P32
Purple/Orange
67
--
N/C
--
68
--
N/C
--
69
--
N/C
--
70
--
N/C
--
71
RXD_N31
Light-Gray/Orange
72
RXD_P31
White/Orange
73
RXD_N30
Brown/Purple
74
RXD_P30
Red/Purple
75
RXD_N29
Orange/Purple
76
RXD_P29
Yellow/Purple
77
RXD_N28
Green/Purple
78
RXD_P28
Blue/Purple
79
RXD_N27
Light-Gray/Purple
80
RXD_P27
White/Purple
81
RXD_N26
Brown/Pink
82
RXD_P26
Red/Pink
83
RXD_N25
Orange/Pink
84
RXD_P25
Yellow/Pink
85
RXD_N24
Green/Pink
86
RXD_P24
Blue/Pink
87
RXD_N23
Light-Gray/Pink
88
RXD_P23
White/Pink
89
RXD_N22
Pink/Purple
90
RXD_P22
Pink/Yellow
Table A-22: Connectors P1 and P2, E1 #43 to E1 #63 Tx lines

Pin
Name
Function
Wire color
Cable e
93
TXD_P43
Brown
94
TXD_N43
Brown/Gray
95
TXD_P44
Red
96
TXD_N44
Red/Gray
97
TXD_P45
Orange
98
TXD_N45
Orange/Gray
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-35

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Wire color
99
TXD_P46
Yellow
100
TXD_N46
Yellow/Gray
101
TXD_P47
Green
102
TXD_N47
Green/Gray
103
TXD_P48
Blue
104
TXD_N48
Blue/Gray
105
TXD_P49
Purple
106
TXD_N49
Purple/Gray
107
TXD_P50
White
108
TXD_N50
White/Gray
109
TXD_P51
Pink
110
TXD_N51
Pink/Gray
111
TXD_P52
Brown/White
112
TXD_N52
Red/White
113
TXD_P53
Orange/White
114
TXD_N53
Yellow/White
115
TXD_P54
Green/White
116
TXD_N54
Blue/White
117
TXD_P55
Purple/White
118
TXD_N55
Light-Gray/White
119
TXD_P56
Red/Brown
120
TXD_N56
Yellow/Brown
121
TXD_P57
Orange/Brown
122
TXD_N57
Green/Brown
123
TXD_P58
Blue/Brown
124
TXD_N58
Purple/Brown
125
TXD_P59
Light-Gray/Brown
126
TXD_N59
Pink/Brown
127
TXD_P60
Brown/Red
128
TXD_N60
Light-Gray/Red
129
TXD_P61
Yellow/Red
130
TXD_N61
Green/Red
131
TXD_P62
Blue/Red
132
TXD_N62
Purple/Red
133
TXD_P63
White/Red
134
TXD_N63
Pink/Red
135
--
N/C
--
136
--
N/C
--

Pin
Name
Function
Wire color
Cable f
A-36
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Wire color
--
N/C
--
--
N/C
--
RXD_N63
Brown/Yellow
RXD_P63
Red/Yellow
RXD_N62
Orange/Yellow
RXD_P62
Green/Yellow
RXD_N61
Blue/Yellow
RXD_P61
Purple/Yellow
RXD_N60
Light-Gray/Yellow
10
RXD_P60
White/Yellow
11
RXD_N59
Brown/Blue
12
RXD_P59
Red/Blue
13
RXD_N58
Orange/Blue
14
RXD_P58
Yellow/Blue
15
RXD_N57
Green/Blue
16
RXD_P57
Purple/Blue
17
RXD_N56
Light-Gray/Blue
18
RXD_P56
White/Blue
19
RXD_N55
Brown/Orange
20
RXD_P55
Red/Orange
21
RXD_N54
Yellow/Orange
22
RXD_P54
Green/Orange
23
RXD_N53
Blue/Orange
24
RXD_P53
Purple/Orange
25
RXD_N52
Light-Gray/Orange
26
RXD_P52
White/Orange
27
RXD_N51
Brown/Purple
28
RXD_P51
Red/Purple
29
RXD_N50
Orange/Purple
30
RXD_P50
Yellow/Purple
31
RXD_N49
Green/Purple
32
RXD_P49
Receive, tributary 49 wire B
Blue/Purple
33
RXD_N48
Light-Gray/Purple
34
RXD_P48
White/Purple
35
RXD_N47
Brown/Pink
36
RXD_P47
Red/Pink
37
RXD_N46
Orange/Pink
38
RXD_P46
Yellow/Pink
39
RXD_N45
Green/Pink
40
RXD_P45
Blue/Pink
41
RXD_N44
Light-Gray/Pink
42
RXD_P44
White/Pink
43
RXD_N43
Pink/Purple
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-37

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Wire color
44
RXD_P43
Pink/Yellow
135
--
N/C
--
136
--
N/C
--
EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors
EISMB_804 and DIOM_04 are GbE/Fast Ethernet modules that provide
electrical 10/100/1000BaseT ports. DIOM_08 is a Fast Ethernet module that
provides 10/100BaseT ports. MCSM in an MPLS Core Switch module that
provides 10/100BaseT ports. All these modules use 8-pin RJ-45 connectors for
the electrical ports.
the connector. The first table lists the pin out for a 10/100BaseT interface and
the second for a 1000BaseT interface.
Figure A-11: 10/100BaseT connectors pin identification

Table A-24: 10/100BaseT connectors pin assignment
A-38
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
TD+
Transmit, + wire
Output
TD
Transmit, wire
Output
RD+
Receive, + wire
Input
RD
Receive, wire
Input
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Table A-25: 1000BaseT connector pin assignment

Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
TR1P
Transmit/Receive, pair 1, + wire
I/O
TR1N
Transmit/Receive, pair 1, wire
I/O
TR2P
Transmit/Receive, pair 2, + wire
I/O
TR2N
Transmit/Receive, pair 2 wire
I/O
TR3P
Transmit/Receive, pair 3 + wire
I/O
TR3N
I/O
TR4P
Transmit/Receive, pair 4 + wire
I/O
TR4N
I/O
ACP900 Connectors
ACP900 is the control plane for ASON based networks working with XDM
small shelves. The ACP900 has four Ethernet ports used to connect the module
to the system management and protection option. All ports use 10-pin RJ-45
connectors and operate at 10/100BaseT.
the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for a typical connector.
Figure A-12: ACP900 connector pin identification

Table A-26: ACP900 Ethernet connector pin assignments
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
RX+
Receive + wire
Input
RX-
Receive - wire
Input
3, 4
VCC
Power 3.3 V
TX+
Transmit + wire
Output
TX-
Transmit - wire
Output
LED_RA
Indicator light
LED_RC
Indicator light
LED_LA
Indicator light
10
LED_LC
Indicator light
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-39

Maintenance Manual
xRAP-100 Connectors
Shelf DC Input Power Connectors
The shelf DC input power connectors, designated Shelf 1, Shelf 2, and Shelf 3
are 3-pin D-type male connectors. The Shelf 4 connector is a 5-pin D-type male
connector that can be connected to regular or high-power XDM shelves or to
BG shelves. The following figure identifies the functions of the shelf DC input
connectors pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure A-13: DC input power connectors pin functions
SHELF ALARM Connectors

The four ALARMS connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors. Each
connector can be connected to the ALARMS connector of an XDM platform or
to a BG platform. The following figure identifies the connector pins (as seen
when looking into the connector).
Figure A-14: xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connector pin identification
The following table lists the pin assignment for this connector.
Table A-27: xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connector pin assignment
A-40
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
N/C
--
--
ALM_IP1
Input
ALM_IN1
Alarm input 1, - wire
Input
ALM_IP2
Input
ALM_IN2
Input
ALM_IP3
Input
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
ALM_IN3
Input
ALM_IP4
Input
ALM_IN4
Input
10
N/C
--
--
11
N/C
--
--
12
GND
Ground
--
13
ALM_O1
Alarm output 1 common
Output
14
N/C
--
--
15
GND
Ground
--
16
ALM_O2
Output
17
N/C
--
--
18
BUZ_COM
Buzzer common
Input
19
N/C
--
--
20
GND
Ground
--
21
CRIT_COM
--
22
N/C
--
--
23
MAJ_COM
Major alarm common
Input
24
GND
Ground
--
25
N/C
--
--
26
GND
Ground
--
27
MIN_COM
Minor alarm common
Input
28
N/C
--
--
29
WARN_COM
--
30
GND
Ground
--
31
N/C
--
--
32
N/C
--
--
33
N/C
--
--
34
N/C
--
--
35
GND
Ground
--
36
N/C
--
--
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-41

Maintenance Manual
ALARM IN/OUT Connector

The ALARM IN/OUT connector is a 68-pin SCSI female connector that carries
three groups of lines to the customer equipment:
Sixteen external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the XDM
shelves. Four inputs are allocated to each XDM platform. Each input is
activated by closing a dry contact provided from the customer's facility.
Eight sets of change-over relay contacts, floating with respect to platform

ground, which serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Each couple of the eight
relays is assigned to the two output alarm lines of each XDM platform
connected to the xRAP-100.
Four sets of change-over relay contacts, floating with respect to platform

ground, which serve as rack (bay) alarm indication lines. The relays,
identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated by the
corresponding alarm relays of XDM shelves.
Relay contact ratings are 72 V in open state, and 1A in closed state.

The following figure identifies the ALARM IN/OUT connector pins, as seen
when looking into the connector.
Figure A-15: xRAP-100 ALARM IN/OUT connector pin identification
The following table lists the pin assignment for the ALARM IN/OUT
connector.
Table A-28: xRAP-100 ALARM IN/OUT connector pin assignment
A-42
Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Shelf 1
ALM_01NO
Output relay 1, normally open Output

contact
Black
ALM_01COM
Output relay 1, common

contact
Output
Brown
ALM_01NC
Output relay 1, normally

closed contact
Output
Red
ALM_02NO

contact
Orange
ALM_02COM

contact
Output
Yellow
ALM_02NC

closed contact
Output
Green
Direction
Wire color
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Shelf 2
ALM_03NO

contact
Blue
ALM_03COM

contact
Output
Violet
ALM_03NC

closed contact
Output
Gray
10
ALM_04NO

contact
White
11
ALM_04COM

contact
Output
Pink
12
ALM_04NC

closed contact
Output
Light Green
13
ALM_05NO

contact
Black/White
14
ALM_05COM

contact
Output
Brown/White
15
ALM_05NC

closed contact
Output
Red/White
16
ALM_06NO

contact
Orange/White
17
ALM_06COM

contact
Output
Green/White
18
ALM_06NC

closed contact
Output
Blue/White
19
ALM_07NO

contact
Violet/White
20
ALM_07COM

contact
Output
Red/Black
21
ALM_07NC

closed contact
Output
Orange/Black
22
ALM_08NO

contact
Yellow/Black
23
ALM_08COM

contact
Output
Green/Black
24
ALM_08NC

closed contact
Output
Gray/Black
25
CRIT_NC
Critical alarm relay, normally

closed contact
Output
Pink/Black
26
CRIT_NO

open contact
Output
Pink/Green
27
CRIT_COM
Critical alarm relay, common

contact
Output
Pink/Red
28
MAJ_NC
Major alarm relay, normally

closed contact
Output
Pink/Violet
29
MAJ_NO

open contact
Output
Light Blue
30
MAJ_COM
Major alarm relay, common

contact
Output
Light Blue/Brown
31
MIN_NC
Minor alarm relay, normally

closed contact
Output
Light Blue/Red
Shelf 3
Shelf 4
All shelves
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Direction
Wire color
A-43
Assignment
Shelf 1
Shelf 2
Shelf 3
Shelf 4
A-44

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
Wire color
32
MIN_NO

open contact
Output
Light Blue/Violet
33
MIN_COM
Minor alarm relay, common

contact
Output
Light Blue/Black
34
WARN_COM
Warning alarm relay,

common contact
Output
Gray/Green
35
ALMIN1
External alarm input 1
Input
Gray/Red
36
ALM_IN1
Input
Gray/Violet
37
ALMIN2
Input
Light Green/Black
38
ALM_IN2
Input
Violet/Black
39
ALMIN3
Input
Black/White dots
40
ALM_IN3
Input
Brown/White dots
41
ALMIN4
Input
Red/White dots
42
ALM_IN4
Input
Orange/White dots
43
ALMIN5
Input
Green/White dots
44
ALM_IN5
Input
Blue/White dots
45
ALMIN6
Input
Violet/White dots
46
ALM_IN6
Input
White/Black dots
47
ALMIN7
Input
Yellow/Black dots
48
ALM_IN7
Input
Green/Black dots
49
ALMIN8
Input
Light Blue/Black dots
50
ALM_IN8
Input
Pink/Black dots
51
ALMIN9
Input
Red/Black dots
52
ALM_IN9
Input
Orange/Black dots
53
ALMIN10
Input
Violet/Black dots
54
ALM_IN10
Input
Gray/Black dots
55
ALMIN11
Input
56
ALM_IN11
Input
Orange/Red dots
57
ALMIN12
Input
Yellow/Red dots
58
ALM_IN12
Input
Green/Red dots
59
ALMIN13
Input
Violet/Red dots
60
ALM_IN13
Input
Gray/Red dots
61
ALMIN14
Input
White/Red dots
62
ALM_IN14
Input
Pink/Red dots
63
ALMIN15
Input
Yellow/White
64
ALM_IN15
Input
Gray/White
65
ALMIN16
Input
Pink/White
66
ALM_IN16
Input
Brown/Black
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
Wire color
All shelves
67
WARN_NC

normally closed contact
Output
Blue/Black
68
WARN_NO

normally open contact
Output
Gray/White dots
RAP-4B Connectors
SHELF ALARM Connectors
The four ALARM connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors that can each
be connected to the ALARMS connector of an XDM, BG, or 9600 series
platform. The following figure identifies the connector pins (as seen when
looking into the connector).
Figure A-16: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector, pin identification

Table A-29: RAP-4B PLATFORM ALARM connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
N/C
--
--
ALM_IP1
Input
ALM_IN1
Input
ALM_IP2
Input
ALM_IN2
Input
ALM_IP3
Input
ALM_IN3
Input
ALM_IP4
Input
ALM_IN4
Input
10
N/C
--
--
11
N/C
--
--
12
GND
Ground
--
13
ALM_O1
Output
14
N/C
--
--
15
GND
Ground
--
16
ALM_O2
Output
17
N/C
--
--
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-45

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
18
BUZ_COM
Buzzer common
Input
19
N/C
--
--
20
GND
Ground
--
21
CRIT_COM
--
22
N/C
--
--
23
MAJ_COM
Major alarm common
Input
24
GND
Ground
--
25
N/C
--
--
26
GND
Ground
--
27
MIN_COM
Minor alarm common
Input
28
N/C
--
--
29
WARN_COM
--
30
GND
Ground
--
31
N/C
--
--
32
N/C
--
--
33
N/C
--
--
34
N/C
--
--
35
GND
Ground
--
36
N/C
--
--
ALARM IN/OUT Connector

The ALARM IN/OUT connector is a 68-pin SCSI female connector that carries
three groups of lines to the customer equipment:
Sixteen external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the XDM
platforms. Four inputs are allocated to each one. Each input is activated by
closing a dry contact provided from the customer's facility.
Eight sets of changeover relay contacts, floating with respect to platform

ground, that serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Each couple of the eight
relays is assigned to the two output alarm lines of each XDM platform
connected to the RAP-4B.
Four sets of changeover relay contacts, floating with respect to platform

ground, that serve as rack (bay) alarm indication lines. The relays,
identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated by the
corresponding alarm relays of XDM platforms.
Relay contact ratings are 72 V in open state and 1A in closed state.
A-46
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
The following figure identifies the ALARM IN/OUT connector pins, as seen
when looking into the connector.
Figure A-17: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin identification
Table A-30: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin assignment

Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Platform 1
ALM_01NO

contact
Black
ALM_01COM

contact
Output
Brown
ALM_01NC

closed contact
Output
Red
ALM_02NO

contact
Orange
ALM_02COM

contact
Output
Yellow
ALM_02NC

closed contact
Output
Green
ALM_03NO

contact
Blue
ALM_03COM

contact
Output
Violet
ALM_03NC

closed contact
Output
Gray
10
ALM_04NO

contact
White
11
ALM_04COM

contact
Output
Pink
12
ALM_04NC

closed contact
Output
Light Green
13
ALM_05NO

contact
Black/White
14
ALM_05COM

contact
Output
Brown/White
15
ALM_05NC

closed contact
Output
Red/White
16
ALM_06NO

contact
Orange/White
17
ALM_06COM

contact
Output
Green/White
18
ALM_06NC

closed contact
Output
Blue/White
Platform 2
Platform 3
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Direction
Wire color
A-47
Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Platform 4
19
ALM_07NO

contact
Violet/White
20
ALM_07COM

contact
Output
Red/Black
21
ALM_07NC

closed contact
Output
Orange/Black
22
ALM_08NO

contact
Yellow/Black
23
ALM_08COM

contact
Output
Green/Black
24
ALM_08NC

closed contact
Output
Gray/Black
25
CRIT_NC

closed contact
Output
Pink/Black
26
CRIT_NO

open contact
Output
Pink/Green
27
CRIT_COM
Critical alarm relay, common

contact
Output
Pink/Red
28
MAJ_NC

closed contact
Output
Pink/Violet
29
MAJ_NO

open contact
Output
Light Blue
30
MAJ_COM
Major alarm relay, common

contact
Output
Light Blue/Brown
31
MIN_NC

closed contact
Output
Light Blue/Red
32
MIN_NO

open contact
Output
Light Blue/Violet
33
MIN_COM
Minor alarm relay, common

contact
Output
Light Blue/Black
34
WARN_COM

common contact
Output
Gray/Green
35
ALMIN1
Input
Gray/Red
36
ALM_IN1
Input
Gray/Violet
37
ALMIN2
Input
Light Green/Black
38
ALM_IN2
Input
Violet/Black
39
ALMIN3
Input
Black/White dots
40
ALM_IN3
Input
Brown/White dots
41
ALMIN4
Input
Red/White dots
42
ALM_IN4
Input
Orange/White dots
All platforms
Platform 1
A-48

Maintenance Manual
Direction
Wire color
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
Wire color
Platform 2
43
ALMIN5
Input
Green/White dots
44
ALM_IN5
Input
Blue/White dots
45
ALMIN6
Input
Violet/White dots
46
ALM_IN6
Input
White/Black dots
47
ALMIN7
Input
Yellow/Black dots
48
ALM_IN7
Input
Green/Black dots
49
ALMIN8
Input
Light Blue/Black
dots
50
ALM_IN8
Input
Pink/Black dots
51
ALMIN9
Input
Red/Black dots
52
ALM_IN9
Input
Orange/Black dots
53
ALMIN10
Input
Violet/Black dots
54
ALM_IN10
Input
Gray/Black dots
55
ALMIN11
Input
56
ALM_IN11
Input
Orange/Red dots
57
ALMIN12
Input
Yellow/Red dots
58
ALM_IN12
Input
Green/Red dots
59
ALMIN13
Input
Violet/Red dots
60
ALM_IN13
Input
Gray/Red dots
61
ALMIN14
Input
White/Red dots
62
ALM_IN14
Input
Pink/Red dots
63
ALMIN15
Input
Yellow/White
64
ALM_IN15
Input
Gray/White
65
ALMIN16
Input
Pink/White
66
ALM_IN16
Input
Brown/Black
67
WARN_NC

normally closed contact
Output
Blue/Black
68
WARN_NO

normally open contact
Output
Gray/White dots
Platform 3
Platform 4
All platforms
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-49

Maintenance Manual
xRAP-D Connectors
This section provides information on the connectors located on the xRAP-D
unit.
Platform DC Input Power Connectors

The SHELF DC input power connectors, designated Shelf 1 and Shelf 2, are
5-pin D-type male connectors. The following figure identifies the functions of
the platform DC input connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure A-18: xRAP-D and xRAP-B shelf DC input power connector pin functions
SHELF Alarm Connectors

The SHELF alarm connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors. Each
connector is connected to the ALARMS connector of an XDM-900 platform.
Refer to ALARMS Connector for description. The following figure identifies
the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector, and the table lists
the pin assignment for this connector.
Figure A-19: SHELF alarm connector pin identification

Table A-31: SHELF alarm connector pin assignment
A-50
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
N/C
Not connected
--
ALM_IP1
Input
ALM_IN1
Alarm input 1, wire
Input
ALM_IP2
Input
ALM_IN2
Alarm input 2, wire
Input
ALM_IP3
Input
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
ALM_IN3
Alarm input 3, wire
Input
ALM_IP4
Input
ALM_IN4
Alarm input 4, wire
Input
10
ALM_O4
Alarm output 4
Output
11
N/C
Not connected
--
12
GND
Ground
--
13
ALM_O1
Alarm output 1
Output
14
N/C
Not connected
--
15
GND
Ground
--
16
ALM_O2
Alarm output 2
Output
17
N/C
Not connected
--
18
BUZZ
Buzzer
Input
19
N/C
Not connected
--
20
GND
Ground
--
21
CRIT_COM
Critical alarm
Output
22
N/C
Not connected
--
23
MAJ_COM
Major alarm
Output
24
GND
Ground
--
25
N/C
Not connected
--
26
GND
Ground
--
27
MIN_COM
Minor alarm
Output
28
N/C
Not connected
--
29
WARN_COM
Warning alarm
Output
30
GND
Ground
--
31
ALM_O3
Alarm output 3
Output
32
GND
Ground
--
33
N/C
Not connected
--
34
N/C
Not connected
--
35
GND
Ground
--
36
N/C
Not connected
--
417006-2318-0H3-A02
A-51

Maintenance Manual
ALARMS Connector
The ALARMS connector is a SCSI 68-pin female connector that carries the
following groups of lines to the customer equipment:
Eight external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the

XDM-900 platforms. Four inputs are allocated to each XDM-900 platform.
Each input is activated by closing a dry contact provided from the
customers facility.
Eight sets of change-over relay contacts floating with respect to platform

ground, which serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Four outputs are allocated
to each XDM-900 platform connected to the xRAP-B/xRAP-D.
Eight sets of change-over relay contacts (four per platform) floating with
respect to platform ground, which serve as rack (bay) alarm indication
lines. The relays, identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are
activated by the corresponding alarm relays of XDM-900 platforms.
Two sets of change-over relay contacts floating with respect to platform

ground, which serve as Critical alarm buzzer activation signal. The relay is
activated whenever a Critical alarm is detected in the corresponding
platform. The signal can be used to activate a local buzzer (Critical buzzer)
in the customer's alarms collecting system.
Two lines for muting the Critical buzzer in the customer's alarms collecting
system.
Relay contact ratings are 72 V in open state, and 1A in closed state.

The following figure identifies the ALARMS connector pins as seen when
looking into the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for the ALARMS
connector. This table also lists the color of the wire connected to the
Division for connecting between the ALARMS connector and a distribution
frame.
Figure A-20: ALARMS connector pin identification
A-52
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Table A-32: ALARMS connector pin assignment

Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Shelf 2
CRIT_NC
Critical alarm relay, Output

normally closed
contact
Black
CRIT_COM

common contact
Brown
CRIT_NO

normally open
contact
Red
MAJ_NC
Major alarm relay,

normally closed
contact
Output
Orange
MAJ_COM
Major alarm relay,

common contact
Output
Yellow
MAJ_NO
Major alarm relay,

normally open
contact
Output
Green
MIN_NC
Minor alarm relay,

normally closed
contact
Output
Blue
MIN_COM
Minor alarm relay,

common contact
Output
Violet
MIN_NO
Minor alarm relay,

normally open
contact
Output
Gray
10
WARN_NC
Warning alarm
relay, normally
closed contact
Output
White
11
WARN_COM
Warning alarm
relay, common
contact
Output
Pink
12
WARN_NO
Warning alarm
Output
relay, normally open
contact
Light green
13
BUZZ_NC
Buzzer relay,
normally closed
contact
Output
Black/white
14
BUZZ_COM
Buzzer relay,
common contact
Output
Brown/
white
15
BUZZ_NO
Buzzer relay,
normally open
contact
Output
Red/white
16
ALMO1_NC
Output relay 1,
normally closed
contact
Output
Orange/
white
17
ALMO1_COM
Output relay 1,
common contact
Output
Green/
white
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Direction
Wire color
A-53
Assignment
A-54

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
Wire color
18
ALMO1_NO
Output relay 1,
normally open
contact
Output
Blue/white
19
ALMO2_NC
Output relay 2,
normally closed
contact
Output
Violet/
white
20
ALMO2_COM
Output relay 2,
common contact
Output
Red/black
21
ALMO2_NO
Output relay 2,
normally open
contact
Output
Orange/
black
22
ALMO3_NC
Output relay 3,
normally closed
contact
Output
Yellow/
black
23
ALMO3_COM
Output relay 3,
common contact
Output
Green/
black
24
ALMO3_NO
Output relay 3,
normally open
contact
Output
Gray/black
25
ALMO4_NC
Output relay 4,
normally closed
contact
Output
Pink/black
26
ALMO4_COM
Output relay 4,
common contact
Output
Pink/green
27
ALMO4_NO
Output relay 4,
normally open
contact
Output
Pink/red
28
ALMIN_1
External alarm input Input

1
Pink/violet
29
ALMIN_2

2
Light blue
30
GND
ground
Light
blue/brown
31
ALMIN_3

3
Light blue/red
32
ALMIN_4

4
Light
blue/violet
33
GND
ground
Light
blue/black
34
BUZZ_OFF
Buzzer mute
Output
Gray/green
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Shelf 1
35
CRIT_NC

normally closed
contact
Gray/red
36
CRIT_COM

common contact
Gray/violet
37
CRIT_NO

normally open
contact
Light
green/black
38
MAJ_NC
Major alarm relay,

normally closed
contact
Output
Violet/black
39
MAJ_COM
Major alarm relay,

common contact
Output
Black/white
dots
40
MAJ_NO
Major alarm relay,

normally open
contact
Output
Brown/
white dots
41
MIN_NC
Minor alarm relay,

normally closed
contact
Output
Red/white
dots
42
MIN_COM
Minor alarm relay,

common contact
Output
Orange/
white dots
43
MIN_NO
Minor alarm relay,

normally open
contact
Output
Green/
white dots
44
WARN_NC
Warning alarm
relay, normally
closed contact
Output
Blue/white
dots
45
WARN_COM
Warning alarm
relay, common
contact
Output
Violet/
white dots
46
WARN_NO
Warning alarm
Output
relay, normally open
contact
White/
black dots
47
BUZZ_NC
Buzzer relay,
normally closed
contact
Output
Yellow/
black dots
48
BUZZ_COM
Buzzer relay,
common contact
Output
Green/
black dots
49
BUZZ_NO
Buzzer relay,
normally open
contact
Output
Light blue/
black dots
50
ALMO1_NC
Output relay 1,
normally closed
contact
Output
Pink/black
dots
51
ALMO1_COM
Output relay 1,
common contact
Output
Red/black
dots
52
ALMO1_NO
Output relay 1,
normally open
contact
Output
Orange/
black dots
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Direction
Wire color
A-55
Assignment
A-56

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
Wire color
53
ALMO2_NC
Output relay 2,
normally closed
contact
Output
Violet/black
dots
54
ALMO2_COM
Output relay 2,
common contact
Output
Gray/black
dots
55
ALMO2_NO
Output relay 2,
normally open
contact
Output
Orange/red
dots
56
ALMO3_NC
Output relay 3,
normally closed
contact
Output
Yellow/red
dots
57
ALMO3_COM
Output relay 3,
common contact
Output
Green/red
dots
58
ALMO3_NO
Output relay 3,
normally open
contact
Output
Blue/red dots
59
ALMO4_NC
Output relay 4,
normally closed
contact
Output
Violet/red
dots
60
ALMO4_COM
Output relay 4,
common contact
Output
Gray/red dots
61
ALMO4_NO
Output relay 4,
normally open
contact
Output
White/red
dots
62
ALMIN_1

1
Pink/red dots
63
ALMIN_2

2
Yellow/
white
64
GND
ground
Gray/white
65
ALMIN_3

3
Pink/white
66
ALMIN_4

4
Brown/
black
67
GND
ground
Blue/black
68
BUZZ_OFF
Buzzer mute
Output
Gray/white
dots
417006-2318-0H3-A02
B
Standards and References
In this appendix:
Overview ........................................................................................................ B-1
Broadband Forum ........................................................................................... B-2
Environmental Standards ................................................................................ B-2
ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute ............................. B-2
IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission ........................................... B-4
IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers................................... B-5
IETF: Internet Engineering Task Force .......................................................... B-5
ISO: International Organization for Standardization ...................................... B-8
ITU-T: International Telecommunication Union ........................................... B-8
MEF: Metro Ethernet Forum ........................................................................ B-13
NIST: National Institute of Standards and Technology................................ B-13
North American Standards ........................................................................... B-13
OMG: Object Management Group ............................................................... B-14
TMF: TeleManagement Forum .................................................................... B-15
Web Protocol Standards ............................................................................... B-15
Overview
The following is a list of standards and reference documents that relate to the
XDM platform families. The standards are listed alphabetically by groups.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
B-1

Maintenance Manual
Broadband Forum
Af-phy-0064.000 ATM Forum E1 Physical Layer Interface.
Af-phy-0086.000 ATM Forum IMA V1.0.
Af-phy-0086.001 ATM Forum IMA V1.1.
Af-phy-00121.00 ATM Forum Traffic Management Specifications V4.1.
Environmental Standards
EuP Directive 2005/32/EC: Ecodesign Requirements for Energy-Using

Products.
OHSAS 18001: Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems Requirements.
REACh Directive 2005/32/EC: Registration, Evaluation, Authorization,

and Restriction of Chemicals.
RoHS Directive 2005/747/EC: Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous

Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
WEEE Directive 2002/96/EC: Waste from Electrical and Electronic

Equipment.
ETSI: European
Telecommunications Standards
Institute
B-2
EN 300 019-1-1 Class 1.2: Environmental Engineering (EE);

Environmental Conditions and Environmental Tests for
Telecommunications Equipment; Part 1-1: Classification of Environmental
Conditions; Storage.

Conditions; Transportation.
EN 300 019-1-3 Classes 3.2 and 3.3: Environmental Engineering (EE);

Conditions; Stationary use at weather-protected locations.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual

Telecommunications Equipment; Part 2-4: Specification of Environmental
Tests; Stationary use at non-weather-protected locations.
EN 300 132 -2: Environmental Engineering (EE); Power Supply Interface

at the Input to Telecommunications Equipment.
EN 300-166: Physical and electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital

interfaces for equipment using the 2 048 kbit/s based plesiochronous or
synchronous digital hierarchies.
EN 300 386: Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters

(ERM); Telecommunication network equipment; Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) requirements.
EN 300-417-2-1: Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic

requirements of transport functionality of equipment.
EN 300-417-5-1: Generic requirements of transport functionality of

equipment.
EN 300-462-5-1: Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic

requirements for synchronization networks.
EN 300-689: 34 Mbit/s digital leased lines (D34U and D34S); Terminal

equipment interface.
EN 301-164: SDH leased lines connection characteristics.
EN 301-165: SDH leased lines Network and Terminal interface

presentation.
EN 55022: Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Information Technology

Equipment.
ETR 114: Functional Architecture of SDH Transport Networks.
ETR 275: Considerations on Transmission Delay and Transmission Delay

value for components on connections supporting speech communication
over evolving digital networks.
FTZ 1TR9: Deutsche Telekom A.G. EMC Requirements.
FTZ 153 TL 1part 1: Synchronous Multiplexing Equipment (SM) for

Synchronous Multiplex Hierarchy.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
B-3

Maintenance Manual
IEC: International
Electrotechnical Commission
B-4
IEC 68: Environmental Testing.
IEC 917: Modular Order for the Development of Mechanical Structures for
Electronic Equipment Practices.
IEC 3309: Information Technology Telecommunications and Information

Exchange between Systems High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC)
Procedures Frame Structure.
IEC 9314-3: Information Processing Systems - Fiber Distributed Data

Interface (FDDI) Multiplex.
IEC 9595, Information Technology: Open Systems Interconnection,

Common Management Information Services.
IEC 9596, Information Technology: Open Systems Interconnection,

Common Management Information Protocol.
IEC 13239: Information technology Telecommunications and

information exchange between systems High-level data link control
(HDLC) procedures.
IEC 17025: General Requirements for Competence of Testing and

Calibration Laboratories.
IEC 60825-1: Safety of Laser Products Part 1: Equipment Classification

and Requirements.
IEC 60825-2 (AS/NZS 2211.2): Safety of Laser Products Part 2: Safety

of Optical Fiber Communication System (OFCS).
IEC/EN/UL 60950-1: Information Technology Equipment - Safety General Requirements.
IS 1249-1: Safety of Laser products: Equipment classification requirements

and users guide.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
IEEE: Institute of Electrical and

Electronic Engineers
IEEE 802.1ad: Virtual Bridged Local Area NetworksRevision

Amendment 4: Provider Bridges.
IEEE 802.1ag: Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks Amendment 5:

Connectivity Fault Management.
IEEE 802.1D: Media access control (MAC) Bridges (Incorporates IEEE

802.1t and IEEE 802.1w).
IEEE 802.1P: Traffic Class Expediting and Dynamic Multicast Filtering.
IEEE 802.1Q: Virtual Bridged Local Area NetworksRevision.
IEEE 802.1w: Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree.
IEEE 802.3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection

(CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications.
IEEE 802.3ad: Link Aggregation.
IEEE 802.3ah: Ethernet in the First Mile (Link OAM).
IEEE 802.3x: Full Duplex Operation and Flow Control Protocol.
IETF: Internet Engineering Task

Force
RFC 1493: Definition of Managed Objects for Bridges.
RFC 1643: Ethernet-like Interfaces.
RFC 1662: PPP in HDLC-Life Framing.
RFC 1757: Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base.
RFC 1823: LDAP Application Program Interface (API).
RFC 1901: Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2.
RFC 2108: Definitions of Managed Objects for IEEE 802.3 Repeater

Devices using SMIv2.
RFC 2251: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3) [specification of

the LDAP on-the-wire protocol].
RFC 2252: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): Attribute Syntax

Definitions.
RFC 2253: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): UTF-8 String

Representation of Distinguished Names.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
B-5
B-6

Maintenance Manual
RFC 2254: The String Representation of LDAP Search Filters.
RFC 2255: The LDAP URL Format.
RFC 2256: A Summary of the X.500(96) User Schema for use with
LDAPv3.
RFC 2401: Security Architecture for the Internet Protocol.
RFC 2409: Internet Key Exchange Protocol (IKE).
RFC 2474: Definition of the Differentiated Services Field (DS Field) in the
IPv4 and IPv6 Headers.
RFC 2597: Assured Forwarding PHB Group.
RFC 2615: PPP over SONET/SDH.
RFC 2665: Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernet-like Interface

Types.
RFC 2674: Bridge MIB with VLAN/Traffic Classes/Multicast Extensions.
RFC 2702: Requirements for Traffic Engineering Over MPLS.
RFC 2737: Entity MIB (Version 2).
RFC 2819: Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base.
RFC 2829: Authentication Methods for LDAP.
RFC 2830: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): Extension for

Transport Layer Security.
RFC 2863: Interfaces Group MIB.
RFC 3014: Notification Log MIB.
RFC 3031: Multiprotocol Label Switching Architecture.
RFC 3032: MPLS Label Stack Encoding.
RFC 3246: An Expedited Forwarding PHB (Per-Hop Behavior).
RFC 3270: Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) Support of

Differentiated Services.
RFC 3377: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): Technical

Specification.
RFC 3411: SNMP Framework MIB.
RFC 3414: SNMP User-Based SM MIB.
RFC 3415: SNMP Vies-Based ACM MIB.
RFC 3443: Time To Live (TTL) Processing in Multi-Protocol Label

Switching (MPLS) Networks.
RFC 3812: Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Traffic Engineering

(TE) Management Information Base (MIB).
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
RFC 3813: Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Switching Router

(LSR) Management Information Base (MIB).
RFC 3916: Requirements for Pseudo-Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge

(PWE3).
RFC 3985: Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Architecture.
RFC 4090: Fast Reroute Extensions to RSVP-TE for LSP Tunnels.
RFC 4125: Maximum Allocation Bandwidth Constraints Model for

Diffserv-aware MPLS Traffic Engineering.
RFC 4126: Max Allocation with Reservation Bandwidth Constraints Model

for Diffserv-aware MPLS Traffic Engineering & Performance
Comparisons.
RFC 4379: Detecting Multi-Protocol Label Switched (MPLS) Data Plane

Failures.
RFC 4448: Encapsulation Methods for Transport of Ethernet over MPLS

Networks.
RFC 5462: Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Stack Entry:

"EXP" Field Renamed to "Traffic Class" Field.
IETF Drafts:
draft-ietf-l2vpn-vpls-ldp.
draft-ietf-l2vpn-vpls-mcast-reqts.
draft-ietf-magma-snoop.
draft-ietf-mpls-rsvp-te-p2mp.
draft-ietf-mpls-tp-nm-framework.
draft-ietf-mpls-tp-nm-req.
draft-ietf-pwe3-ethernet-encap.
draft-martini-l2circuit-encap-mpls.
draft-sajassi-l2vpn-vpls-multicast-congruency.
draft-vasseur-mpls-backup-computation.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
B-7

Maintenance Manual
ISO: International Organization

for Standardization
A2LA: Accredited Laboratory for Electrical and Mechanical Testing.
ISO 9001: Quality Management System Requirements.
ISO 14001: Environmental Management Systems Requirements With

Guidance for Use.
ISO 27001: Information Security Management Systems Requirements.
TL 9000, QuEST Forum: Quality Management System Requirements &

Measurements Handbooks for the Telecom Industry.
ITU-T: International
Telecommunication Union
B-8
G.650: Definition and Test Methods for the Relevant Parameters of

Single-Mode Fibers.
G.651: Characteristics of a 50/125 m Multimode Graded Index Optical

Fiber Cable.
G.652: Characteristics of a Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable.
G.653: Characteristics of a Dispersion-Shifted Single-Mode Optical Fiber

Cable.
G.654: Characteristics of a Cut-off Shifted Single-Mode Optical Fiber

Cable.
G.655: Characteristics of a Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted Single-Mode

Optical Fiber Cable.
G.661: Definition and Test Methods for the Relevant Generic Parameters of
Optical Amplifier Devices and Subsystems.
G.662: Generic Characteristics of Optical Fiber Amplifier Devices and

Subsystems.
G.663: Application Related Aspects of Optical Fiber Amplifier Devices

and Subsystems.
G.664: Optical Safety Procedures and Requirements for Optical Transport

Systems.
G.671: Transmission Characteristics of Passive Optical Components.
G.691: Optical Interfaces for Single Channel SDH Systems with Optical
Amplifiers and STM-64 Systems (Draft).
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
G.692: Optical Interfaces for Multi-Channel Systems with Optical

Amplifiers.
G.694.1: Spectral Grids for WDM Applications: DWDM Frequency Grid.
G.694.2: Spectral Grids for WDM Applications: CWDM Wavelength Grid.
G.695: Optical Interfaces for Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing

Applications.
G.703: Physical/Electrical Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital

Interfaces.
G.704: Synchronous Frame Structures Used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and
44 736 kbps Hierarchical Levels.
G.706: Frame Alignment and CRC Procedures Relating to Basic Frame

Structure Defined in Rec G.704.
G.707: Network Node Interface for the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy.
G.709: Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN).
G.752: Characteristics of digital multiplex equipments based on a second

order bit rate of 6312 kbit/s and using positive justification.
G.772: Protected Monitoring Points Provided on Digital Transmission

Systems.
G.774 & G774.n: SDH Information Model.
G.775: Loss of Signal (LOS), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and Remote
Defect Indication (RDI) defect detection and clearance criteria for PDH
signals.
G.781: Synchronization Layer Functions.
G.783: Characteristics of SDH Equipment Functional Blocks.
G.784: Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Management.
G.798: Characteristics of OTN Hierarchy Equipment Functional Blocks.
G.803: Architectures of Transport Networks based on the Synchronous

Digital Hierarchy.
G.805: Generic Functional Architecture of Transport Networks.
G.806: Characteristics of Transport Equipment Description Methodology

and Generic Functionality.
G.809: Functional Architecture of Connectionless Layer Networks.
G.811: Timing Characteristics of Primary Reference Clocks.
G.812: Timing Requirements of Slave Clocks Suitable for Use as Node

Clocks in Synchronization Networks.
G.813: Timing Characteristics of SDH Equipment Slave Clocks (SEC).
417006-2318-0H3-A02
B-9
B-10

Maintenance Manual
G.823: The Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks Based on
the 2048 kbit/s Hierarchy.
G.825: The Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks Based on
the SDH (Draft).
G.8251: The Control of Jitter and Wander within the Optical Transport
Network (OTN).
G.826: Error Performance Parameters and Objectives for International,

Constant Bit Rate Digital Paths at or above the Primary Rate.
G.828: Error Performance Parameters and Objectives for International,

Constant Bit Rate Synchronous Digital Paths.
G.829: Error Performance Events for SDH Multiplex and Regenerator

Sections.
G.831: Management Capabilities of Transport Networks Based on the

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH).
G.841: Types and Characteristics of SDH Network Protection

Architectures.
G.842: Inter-Working of SDH Protection Architectures.
G.872: Architecture of Optical Transport Networks.
G.874: Management Aspects of the Optical Transport Network Element.
G.874.1: Optical Transport Network (OTN): Protocol-Neutral Management

Information Model for the Network Element View.
G.957: Optical Interfaces for Equipment and Systems relating to the

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy.
G.959.1: Optical Transport Network Physical Layer Interfaces.
G.975: Forward Error Correction for Submarine Systems.
G.985: 100 Mbit/s point-to-point Ethernet based optical access system.
G.7041: Generic Framing Procedure (GFP).
G.7042: Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) for Virtual

Concatenated Signals.
G.7713: Distributed Connection Management.
G.7713.2: RSVP-TE Implementation.
G.7714: Generalized Automatic Discovery Techniques.
G.7714.1: Protocol for Automatic Discovery in SDH & OTN network.
G.7715: ASON Routing.
G.7715.1: Based on PNNI, OSPF or IS_IS.
G.8001/Y.1354: Terms and definitions for Ethernet frames over transport.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
G.8010/Y.1306: Architecture of Ethernet Layer Networks.
G.8011/Y.1307: Ethernet Services Framework.
G.8011.1/Y.1307.1: Ethernet Private Line Service.
G.8011.2/Y.1307.2: Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service.
G.8012/Y.1308: Ethernet UNI and Ethernet NNI.
G.8080/Y.1304: Architecture for the automatically switched optical

network (ASON)
G.8201/Y.1354: Error performance parameters and objectives for

multi-operator international paths within the Optical Transport Network
(OTN)
G.8261/Y. 1361: Timing and synchronization aspects in packet network.
G.8262/Y. 1362: Timing characteristics of synchronous Ethernet

equipment slave clock (EEC).
G.8080: Architecture for ASON.
I.356: ATM Layer Cell Transfer Performance.
I.361: ATM Layer Specification.
I.371: Traffic Control and Congestion Control.
I.610: ATM Operation and Maintenance Principles.
M.2140: Transport Network Event Correlation.
M.3010: Principles for a Telecommunications Management Network.
M.3013: Considerations for a Telecommunications Management Network.
M.3016.0: Security for the management plane: Overview.
M.3017: Framework for the integrated management of hybrid circuit/packet

networks.
M.3100: Generic Network Information Model.
M.3180: Catalogue of TMN Management Information.
M.3200: TMN Management Services and Telecommunications Managed

Areas: Overview.
M.3300: TMN F Interface Requirements.
M.3400: TMN Management Functions.
Q.821: Alarm Surveillance.
Q.822: Performance Monitoring.
X.217: Open Systems Interconnection, Service Definition for the

Association Control Service Element.
X.219: Remote Operations - Model, Notation and Service Definition.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
B-11
B-12

Maintenance Manual
X.227: Open Systems Interconnection, Connection-Oriented Protocol for

the Association Control Service Element - Protocol Specification.
X.229: Remote Operations: Protocol Specification.
X.710: Open Systems Interconnection, Common Management Information

Service.
X.720: Open Systems Interconnection, Structure of Management

Information - Management Information Model.
X.721 Information Technology: Open Systems Interconnection, Structure

of Management Information - Definition of Management Information.
X.722: Open Systems Interconnection, Structure of Management

Information - Guidelines for the Definition of Managed Objects.
X.731: Open Systems Interconnection, Systems Management - State

Management Function.
X.733: Open Systems Interconnection, Systems Management - Alarm

Reporting Function.
X.743: Open Systems Interconnection, Systems Management - Time

X.744: Open Systems Interconnection, Systems Management - Software

Y.1311: Network-based VPNs - Generic architecture and service

requirements.
Y.1710: Requirements for Operation & Maintenance functionality for

MPLS networks.
Y.1711: Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks.
Z.351: Data oriented human-machine interface specification technique

introduction.
Z.352: Data oriented human-machine interface specification technique

scope, approach and usage.
Z.361: Design guidelines for Human-Computer Interfaces (HCI) for the

management of telecommunications networks.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
MEF: Metro Ethernet Forum
MEF4 Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 1: Generic

Framework.
MEF6 Metro Ethernet Services Definitions.
MEF7 EMS-NMS Information Model.
MEF9 Test Suite for Ethernet Services at the UNI.
MEF10 Ethernet Service Attributes.
MEF11 User Network Interface (UNI) Requirements and Framework.
MEF12 Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 2: Ethernet

Services Layer.
MEF14 Test Suite for Ethernet Traffic Management.
MPLS-TP Network Management requirements (draft-ietf-mpls-tp-nm-req)
MPLS-TP NM Framework (draft-ietf-mpls-tp-nm-framework)
NIST: National Institute of

Standards and Technology
FIPS PUB 197: Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).
FIPS PUB 140-2: Security Requirements for Cryptographic Modules.
North American Standards
ANSI FCF1-2: Fiber Channel Physical Interface REV 10.
ANSI T1.102: Digital hierarchy electrical interface.
ANSI T1.105: Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) - Basic Description

including Multiplex Structure, Rates, and Formats.
ANSI X3.296: Single-Byte Command code sets CONnection (SBCON)

architecture.
FCC CFR Title 47 Part 15: Radio Emission.
FCC Part 101.147 Fixed microwave services: (i8, i7, K7, 7)
NEBS GR1089 and GR63 (temperature aspect)
NEBS Level 3 support for N.A. platforms.
Rural Utility Service (RUS) Certification.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
B-13

Maintenance Manual
Telcordia GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment Building System (NEBS)

Requirements: Physical Protection.
Telcordia GR-253-CORE: Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)

Transport Systems: Common Generic Criteria.
Telcordia GR-383-CORE: COMMON LANGUAGE Equipment Codes

(CLEI Codes) Generic Requirements for Bar Code Labels.
Telcordia GR-487-CORE: Generic Requirements for Electronic Equipment

Cabinets.
Telcordia GR-499-CORE: Transport System Generic Requirements

(TSGR): Common Requirements.
Telcordia GR-1089-CORE: Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical

Safety Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment.
Telcordia GR-1209-CORE: Generic Requirements for Passive Optical

Components.
Telcordia GR-1230-CORE: SONET Bidirectional Line-Switched Ring

Equipment Generic Criteria.
Telcordia GD-1244-CORE: Clock for the synchronization network:

Common generic criteria.
Telcordia GR-1312-CORE: Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber

Amplifiers and Proprietary Dense Wavelength-Division Multiplexed
Systems.
Telcordia GR-1400-CORE: SONET Dual-Fed Unidirectional Path

Switched Ring (UPSR) Equipment Generic Criteria.
Telcordia GD-2979-CORE: Common Generic Requirements for Optical

Add-Drop Multiplexers (OADMs) and Optical Terminal Multiplexers
(OTMs).
OMG: Object Management Group
B-14
Notification Service Specification V 1.0.
The Common Object Request Broker: Architecture and Specification V 2.6.
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
TMF: TeleManagement Forum
TMF 513: MTNM Business Agreement Release 3.5.
TMF 518: Framework Document Delivery Package (DDP) Business

Agreement (BA) V1.1.
TMF 518: Resource Provisioning DDP BA V1.0.
TMF 608: Multi Technology Network Management Information

Agreement V 2.1 and V 3.5.
TMF 814: Multi Technology Network Management Solution Set V 2.1 and
V 3.5.
TMF 854: The MTOSI XML Solution Set Package Release 1.1.
Web Protocol Standards

W3C: World Wide Web Consortium
SOAP 1.1: Simple Object Access Protocol.
WSDL 1.1: Web Services Description Language.
WS-I: Web Services Interoperability Organization
WS-I Basic Profile 1.1: Web Services Interoperability.
417006-2318-0H3-A02
B-15
B-16

Maintenance Manual
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Index
1
19 in. Rack Installation 3-47
Cables
alarm 3-11
data 3-16
DC power 3-10
electric traffic 3-13
grounding 3-8
management 3-12
optical fibers 3-14
timing (clock) 3-12
Card and Module Installation 5-1
Cards 5-1
ECU900 5-3
FCU900 5-2
MXC900 5-4
Quad I/O 5-10
Checking Cards and Modules Installed in
Each Shelf 7-3
Checking DC Voltage Polarity 3-83
Cleaning Optical Connectors 3-4
Cleaning the air filter 8-5
Commissioning Tests 7-1
Connecting Alarm Cables 6-4
Connecting an optical fiber to a data
module 6-25
Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the
xRAP-D 3-53
Connecting Electrical Interfaces through
the TPU 6-21
Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A
Racks 6-1
Connecting I/O Protection Cables in the
XDM-900 6-13
Connecting Management Cables 6-26
2
2 Mbps tests 7-7
3
34 Mbps tests 7-7
4
45 Mbps tests 7-8
A
About This Manual xv
Accessories 3-18
ACP900 Connectors A-39
ACP900 Module 5-7
Adding a Second TPU/OCU 5-38
Air Filter Preventive Maintenance 8-3
Alarm Cables 3-11
Alarm handling test 7-21
ALARM IN/OUT Connector A-42,
A-46
Alarms Client Cable A-2
ALARMS Connector A-52
Assigning modules to slots 8-10
Attaching Protective Covers 3-57
Attaching TPUs/OCU to the XDM-900
Shelf 5-30
Attaching TPUs/OCUs to the shelf 5-30
B
Basic XDM-900 Shelf 2-3
BER and stability test 7-27
Broadband Forum B-2
417006-2318-0H3-A02
I-1
Index

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical

Modules and Cards 6-5
Connecting Power Cables 6-3
Connecting Timing (Clock) Cables 6-26
Connection via RAP 1-11
Connector Pin Assignments A-1
Connectors
ECU900 card A-2
EISMB/DIOM/MCSM A-38
MXC900 DC input card A-8
PIM2_21 A-8
PIM2_42 A-12
PIM2_63/B A-18
xRAP-100 A-40
Connectors Pin Assignment A-1
Equipment Installation 3-32

Equipment Installation Sequence 3-33
Equipment power-on test 7-10, 7-24
ETHERNET Connectors A-7
Ethernet Port Precautions 1-20
ETSI
European Telecommunications
Standards Institute B-2
Expanded XDM-900 with I/O Protection
2-5
Expanding a PIM2_21 I/O Slot to 42 E1s
5-21
Extracting RJ-45 connectors 6-28
Extracting/Inserting DIN 1.0/2.3 coaxial
connectors 6-38
Extracting/Inserting LC connectors and
SFPs 6-31
Data Cables for EISMBs, DIOMs, and

MCSMs 3-16
Data Network Commissioning Tests
7-18
DC Power Cables 3-10
DC Power Warnings 1-12
DC Supply Circuit Connection to the
Grounding Conductor 1-19
Document Conventions xvi
Document Organization xvi
ECU900 Card 5-3

ECU900 Card Connectors A-2
EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors
A-38
Electric Traffic Cables 3-13
Electricity Safety Warning 1-16
Environmental and Health Concerns
1-29
Environmental Considerations 4-8
Environmental Standards B-2
1-11, 1-18
General 1-24
General Safety Requirements 1-6
Grounded Conductors Requirements
1-18
Grounding 3-8
racks 3-46
RAP-4B 3-78
RAP-BG 3-71
XDM-900 shelf 4-26
xRAP-100 3-64
Grounding Cables 3-8
Grounding Requirements 1-8
Grounding the XDM-900 Shelf 4-26
I-2
F-CHANNEL Connector A-5

FCU900 Card 5-2
Fibers and cables
connecting 6-1, 6-9, 6-13, 6-21,
6-26
I/O protection cables 6-13
preparing 3-7
Frame loss rate test 7-19
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Index
I
IEC
International Electrotechnical
Commission B-4
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers B-5
IETF
Internet Engineering Task Force B-5
Input sensitivity test 7-9, 7-25
Installation
(300/900)options 4-1
procedure 3-39
Installation Options 4-1
Installation Warning 1-5
Installing
(300/900)Ancillary units 3-48
fiber guide 3-85
FST 3-87
intergrating equipment in one rack
4-12
Modules
double-slot modules 5-22
I/O electrical, optical, CWDM,
and electrical 5-16
OHU 5-22
SIM16_1 5-18
TPU 5-24, 5-26, 5-27, 5-29
ODF 3-89
OPP 3-92
PIM2_63S trafficcable box tray
3-86
Power sources 3-3
racks 3-42
RAP-4B 3-76
RAP-BG 3-70
SFP/XFP transceivers 5-20
the shelf in the rack 4-7
Typical XDM-900 installation 4-10
xRAP-100 3-63
Installing a TPU under the XDM-900
Shelf 5-35
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Installing a TPU/OCU on the XDM-900

shelf 5-31
Installing an xDDF-21 patch panel 6-11
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks 3-48
Installing Double-Slot Modules 5-22
Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU
5-27
Installing Equipment Racks 3-42
Installing Extendable Rails 3-46
Installing Optical Amplifiers in the TPU
5-27
Installing Quad I/O Cards in Quad I/O
Slots 5-12
Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in
optical/CWDM modules and cards
5-20
Installing SIM16_1 modules in quad slots
5-18
Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU
5-26
Installing the Cable Guide 3-84
Installing the Cable Slack Tray 3-85
Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI A
Racks 3-85
Installing the FST 3-87
Installing the ODF 3-89
Installing the OHU module 5-22
Installing the OPP 3-92
Installing the PIM2_63S Traffic Cable
Box Tray 3-86
Installing the RAP-4B 3-76, 3-78
Installing the RAP-BG 3-70, 3-71
Installing the TC/TCF Module in the TPU
Shelf 5-25
Installing the Vertical Air Filter 4-22
Installing the XDM-900 Shelf in Racks
4-7
Horizontal Position 4-14
Vertical Position 4-14
Installing the xRAP-100 3-63
Installing the xRAP-100 circuit breakers
3-68
I-3
Index

Maintenance Manual
Installing the xRAP-D 3-49

Installing TPU Modules 5-24
Installing Triple-Slot TPMs in the TPU
5-29
Installing XDM-900
Before You Start Safety Guidelines
1-1
Installing XDM-900 Cards 5-1
Installing XDM-900 Modules 5-15
Installing, Optical, CWDM, and
Electrical I/O Modules 5-15
Integrating XDM-900 Shelves and Other
Equipment in One Rack 4-12
Intended Audience xv
intergrating equipment in one rack 4-12
Introduction 2-1
IOP hardware protection test 7-14
ISO
International Organization for
Standardization B-8
ITU-T
International Telecommunication
Union B-8
ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory Warnings and
Requirements 1-19
J
Jewelry Removal Warning 1-7
L
Laser Classification 1-21
Laser Device Operating Precautions
1-22
Laser Information 1-21
Laser Safety Requirements 1-21
Laser Safety Statutory Warning 1-22
Layout of XDM-900 Horizontal
Installation in ETSI A Racks 4-2
Layout of XDM-900 Vertical Installation
in ETSI A Racks 4-6
LOS detection test 7-24
Loss of Signal (LOS) detection test 7-9
I-4
M
Main Equipment Dimensions 3-2
Maintenance 8-1
onsite troubleshooting 8-12
preventive 8-2
replacing cards and modules 8-20
replacing RAP components 8-28
test equipment, tools and materials
8-1
traffic monitoring system 8-7
Maintenance action handling test 7-26
Maintenance actions tests 7-17
Management Cables 3-12
Measuring Optical Levels 7-5
MEF
Metro Ethernet Forum B-13
Modules
double-slot modules 5-22
I/O electrical, optical, CWDM, and
electrical 5-16
OHU 5-22
SIM16_1 5-18
TPU 5-24, 5-26, 5-27, 5-29
Monitoring Modules Traffic 8-11
Monitoring options 8-10
Monitoring Signal Levels 8-10
MSP test 7-12
MS-SPRing test 7-13
MXC redundancy test 7-17
MXC900 Card 5-4
MXC900 DC Input Power Connectors
A-8
N
Network Commissioning Tests 7-7
Network timing synchronization test 7-8
NIST
National Institute of Standards and
Technology B-13
North American Standards B-13
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Index
O
Obtaining Technical Documentation
xviii
OMG
Object Management Group B-14
Onsite Troubleshooting 8-12
Optical Fiber and Cable Installation and
Routing 6-1
Optical Fibers 3-14
Optical Network Commissioning Tests
7-22
Optical power measurement test 7-23
Outline of Installation Procedure 3-39
Overcurrent Protection Requirements
1-17
Overview xv, 1-1, 3-1, 7-1, 8-1, A-1,
B-1
P
Path protection and nonretrieval test
7-11
Path protection test 7-25
Personnel Training 1-25
Physical Location 3-3
PIM2_21 Connection Data A-8
PIM2_42 Connection Data A-12
PIM2_63/B Connection Data A-18
PIM2_63S Connection Data A-22
Platform DC Input Power Connectors
A-50
Platform Installation 4-1
Platform overview 2-1
Power Sources 3-3
Power Supply Requirements 1-11
Preliminary Preparations 3-33
Preparations for installation 3-1, 3-4,
3-5, 3-7, 3-33, 4-1, 4-8
Preparing Cables and Fibers 3-7
Preparing DC Input Power Cables 3-50,
3-70, 3-77
Preventive Maintenance 8-2
417006-2318-0H3-A02
Principles of Operation 8-7

Protection Against Electrostatic
Discharge 1-24
Q
Quad I/O Cards 5-10
Qualified Personnel Warning 1-4
R
Rack Alarm Panel Power and Alarm
Connection Options 3-32
Rack Floor Marking 3-42
Rack Grounding 3-46
Rack Grounding Requirements 1-9
Rack Installation 3-42
concrete floors 3-43
extendable rails 3-46
floor marking 3-42
suspended overhead tray assembly
3-46
wooden floors 3-43
Rack Installation on Concrete Floors
3-43
Rack Installation on Floating (Suspended)
Floors 3-45
Rack Installation on Wooden Floors
3-43
RAP input power cables 3-10
RAP-4B 3-29
RAP-4B Connectors A-45
RAP-BG 3-28
Recommended Cleaning Methods 8-4
Related Documentation xvii
Replacing
cards 8-20
circuit breakers 8-28, 8-29
modules 8-20
RAP components 8-28
Replacing ECU900/ ECU900-F Cards
8-24
Replacing Cards and Modules 8-20
I-5
Index

Maintenance Manual
Replacing I/O Modules 8-25

Replacing MXC900 Cards 8-21
Replacing RAP Components 8-28
Replacing SFP/XFP Transceivers 8-26
Replacing the FCU900 8-27
Replacing the NVM on MXC900 Cards
8-23
Replacing xRAP-100 Circuit Breakers
8-28
Replacing xRAP-D Circuit Breakers
8-29
Required Test Equipment, Tools, and
Materials 8-1
Response to events 8-9
Routing and Connecting Cables to Data
Modules (EISMBs/DIOMs/MCSMs)
6-24
Routing and connecting coaxial cables
6-12
Routing and Connecting Electrical
Interface Cables to Electrical
Modules 6-6
Routing and connecting multipair cables
6-6
Routing and Connecting the Traffic Cable
for PIM2_63S 6-9
S
Safety and Workmanship 8-20
SDH Commissioning Tests 7-7
SDH tests 7-8
Selecting a channel 8-9
Selecting a module 8-8
Severity assignment test 7-15
SHELF Alarm Connectors A-50
SHELF ALARM Connectors A-40,
A-45
Shelf DC Input Power Connectors A-40
Shelf power cables 3-11
Shelf Power-On Test Procedure 7-6
Shelf types
basic 2-3
expanded 2-5
Site Commissioning Tests 7-3
I-6
Site Environmental Requirements 3-2

Site Preparation 3-1
Site Preparation and Rack Installation
3-1
Stability test 7-21
Stabilization time 8-9
Standards and References B-1
Support xviii
Suspended Overhead Tray Assembly
3-46
System recovery and reset tests 7-20
T
T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 Connectors
A-6
Technical Assistance xviii
Test Equipment 7-2
Test equipment setup 7-7
Test setup and required test equipment
7-22
Throughput and latency tests 7-18
Timing (Clock) Cables 3-12
TMF
TeleManagement Forum B-15
To ground the XDM-900 4-26
Tool kit 6-27
Tool Kit 6-27
Tools and test equipment 3-4
Tools and Test Equipment 3-4
TPM2_42_2 Protection Assignment for
the XDM-900 6-20
TPM2_63_3 Connection Data A-30
Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S 6-7
Traffic monitoring 8-7, 8-9, 8-10
modules traffic monitoring 8-11
options 8-10
principles of operation 8-7
signal levels monitoring 8-10
Traffic Monitoring System 8-7
Traffic stability test 7-10
Training for Laser Safety 1-22
Transmission alarm handling tests 7-16
417006-2318-0H3-A02

Maintenance Manual
Index
Troubleshooting Management
Communication 8-19
Troubleshooting Power Problems 8-13
Troubleshooting the Timing Subsystem
8-17
Troubleshooting Transmission and
Traffic Alarms 8-18
Troubleshooting Using Component
Indicators 8-14
TUV Statutory Warnings and
Requirements 1-17
Typical XDM-900 Installation 4-10
U
Unpacking and Performing Visual
Inspection 3-5
Use of Temporary EPA 1-26
V
Visual Inspection and Mechanical Checks
7-4
W
Warning Definition 1-3
Warning Label 1-17
Warning Labels for Laser Products 1-21
Web Protocol Standards B-15
Work Arrangements within a Temporary
EPA 1-28
417006-2318-0H3-A02
X
XDM Rack Installation Options 3-6
XDM-900 1
1 protection scheme connections
6-15
(PIM2_63) 6-16
(PIM2_63S) 6-17
3 protection scheme connections 618
3 protection scheme connections for
TPM2_63_3 6-19
XDM-900 Accessories 3-18
XDM-900 Horizontal Shelf and
Accessories Installation Sequence
3-34
XDM-900 I/O Protection Options 2-3
XDM-900 Platform Overview 2-1
XDM-900 Shelf with CWDM
Networking Capabilities 2-7
XDM-900 Vertical Shelf and Accessories
Installation Sequence 3-37
xRAP-100 3-25
xRAP-100 alarms cable A-3
xRAP-100 Connectors A-40
xRAP-D 3-18
xRAP-D Connectors A-50
I-7
Index
I-8

Maintenance Manual
417006-2318-0H3-A02

XDM-900 IMM ETSI A02 8.3 en

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

XDM-900 IMM ETSI A02 8.3 en

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

XDM-900

Installation and Maintenance Manual

XDM-900 (ETSI) Installation and Maintenance Manual

Copyright by ECI Telecom, 2010-2011. All rights reserved worldwide.

Installing XDM-900: Before You Start Safety Guidelines ..... 1-1

Site Preparation and Rack Installation .................................. 3-1

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-900 Installation and

Platform Installation ................................................................ 4-1

Card and Module Installation ................................................. 5-1

Optical Fiber and Cable Installation and Routing................. 6-1

Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 7-1

Maintenance ............................................................................. 8-1

Connector Pin Assignments ................................................. A-1

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-900 Installation and

TPM2_63_3 Connection Data ........................................................................ A-30

Standards and References .................................................... B-1

Index .......................................................................................... I-1

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-900 Installation and

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-900 Installation and

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-900 Installation and

Figure 4-1: Typical XDM-900 horizontal installation in an ETSI A ................................. 4-2

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-900 Installation and

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-900 Installation and

Figure 6-20: LC/SFP extractor ..................................................................................... 6-31

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-900 Installation and

Figure A-6: PIM2_42 E1 connectors pin identification ................................................. A-12

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

Equipment dimensions .......................................................................... 3-2

Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools ....................................... 3-4

Equipment rack data.............................................................................. 3-6

Optical fibers and mating connector data ............................................ 3-15

EISM optical fibers and mating connector data ................................... 3-16

DIOM optical fibers and mating connector data .................................. 3-17

MCSM optical fibers and mating connector data ................................ 3-17

xRAP-D front panel component functions ........................................... 3-22

xRAP-D connector functions ............................................................... 3-23

xRAP-100 front panel component functions ........................................ 3-26

xRAP-100 connectors.......................................................................... 3-27

RAP-BG front panel component functions .......................................... 3-29

RAP-4B front panel component functions ........................................... 3-30

RAP-4B connector functions ............................................................... 3-31

Outline of XDM-900 horizontal installation sequence ......................... 3-35

Outline of XDM-900 vertical installation sequence .............................. 3-38

XDM-900 protection schemes ............................................................. 6-14

XDM-900 slots allocation for protection schemes ............................... 6-15

XDM-900 1:2 I/O protection (PIM2_63) ............................................... 6-16

XDM-900 1:2 I/O protection (PIM2_63S) ............................................ 6-17

XDM-900 1:3 I/O protection ................................................................. 6-18

XDM-900 1:3 I/O protection ................................................................. 6-19

TPM2_42_2 and PIM2_42 slot assignment in the XDM-900 .............. 6-20

Card and module inventory ................................................................... 7-3

Visual inspection and mechanical checks ............................................. 7-4

Measured optical levels ......................................................................... 7-5

Traffic stability test time intervals ........................................................ 7-11